Curtarolo (Padova) Italy

www.avselectronics.com

GENERAL INSTALLATION
AND
PROGRAMMING MANUAL

tream
Certified products
IMQ - Security Systems
EN 50136-2
EN 50131-1
EN 50131-3
EN 50131-6
CEB T031

IST0769V3.4

-1-
 Index
GENERAL INFORMATION ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ page 3
Compliance with EN50131 - Grade 2 and Grade 3 ....................................................................................................................................................................... page 4
Functions Required ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ page 4
Equipment required ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... page 4
Levels of access ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ page 4
Auxillary control equipment ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ page 4
XTREAM 640 - Technical features ................................................................................................................................................................................................. page 6
XTREAM 64 B - Technical features ............................................................................................................................................................................................... page 7
XTREAM 64 - Technical features ................................................................................................................................................................................................... page 8
XTREAM 32 B - Technical features ............................................................................................................................................................................................... page 9
XTREAM 32- Technical features .................................................................................................................................................................................................... page 10
XTREAM 6B - Technical features .................................................................................................................................................................................................. page 11
XTREAM 6 - Technical features ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... page 12
DISTRIBUTION OF THE ZONES .................................................................................................................................................................................................. page 13
PHYSICAL ZONES - SOFTWARE ZONES ASSOCIATION ................................................................................................................................................... page 13
Extensions on serial 1 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. page 22
Extensions on serial 2 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. page 22
Type of connections ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... page 23
Terminal board XTREAM 640 ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ page 26
Control panel board XTREAM 64B - XTREAM 64 - XTREAM 32B - XTREAM32 - XTREAM 6B - XTREAM 6 ............................................................................ page 27
Fixing the electronic board - XTREAM 64B - XTREAM 64 - XTREAM 32B - XTREAM32 - XTREAM 6B - XTREAM 6 ............................................................... page 27
Terminal board XTREAM 64B - XTREAM 64 - XTREAM 32B - XTREAM32 - XTREAM 6B - XTREAM 6 ................................................................................... page 28
Supply unit section XTREAM 640 .................................................................................................................................................................................................. page 29
Power section for central control units certified by IMQ - Grade 2 ................................................................................................................................................. page 30
Power supply unit section for control panels certified by IMQ – Grade 3 ...................................................................................................................................... page 30
Supply unit section - XTREAM 64 - XTREAM 32 .......................................................................................................................................................................... page 31
Power unit fixing- XTREAM64 ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... page 31
Housing fixing CONTXTREAM ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... page 32
Housing fixing CONTXTREAMS ................................................................................................................................................................................................... page 32
Tamper proof .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. page 32
Housing XTREAM 32 - XTREAM 6 ............................................................................................................................................................................................... page 33
Supply unit section - XTREAM 6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................... page 33
Cables fixing CONXTREAM .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... page 34
Cables fixing CONTXTREAMS ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... page 35
A300 - A300Plus Keypads ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. page 36
A500 - A500 Plus Keypads ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ page 37
A600 - A600 Plus Keypads ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ page 38
Keypad A600 EVO - A600 EVO Plus ............................................................................................................................................................................................. page 39
Tastiere ICE ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... page 40
A600 Plus and ICE Connection ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... page 41
Satellites ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ page 42
Key installation ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... page 44
"Impulsive" Management ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... page 44
"State" Management ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... page 44
Hints on armings management ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... page 45
RS serial readers ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... page 46
Functioning of the serial RS key blocks ......................................................................................................................................................................................... page 47
RS Functioning in Single Modality ................................................................................................................................................................................................. page 47
RS Functioning in Immediate Modality .......................................................................................................................................................................................... page 47
PSTN Telephone - Technical features ........................................................................................................................................................................................... page 48
Vocal sinthesis board XSINT (NO XTREAM640) .......................................................................................................................................................................... page 48
Xgsm - Technical features ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. page 49
PSTN + GSM ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. page 50
SIM Card Inclusion/Antenna Connector Input ............................................................................................................................................................................... page 50
XGSM485 - XGSM485 PRO - Technical features ......................................................................................................................................................................... page 50
XGSM485 Installation - Warnings: ........................................................................................................................................................................................... page 52
TAMPER XGSM485 and XGSM485 PRO ............................................................................................................................................................................... page 52
Terminals X1, X2, X3 operation (only XGSM485PRO) ............................................................................................................................................................ page 52
Checking Credit and Expiry of the SIM Card for XGSM - XGSM485 and XGSM485PRO ............................................................................................................ page 53
Recording of vocal messages ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... page 53
Vocal messages ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ page 54
Telephone Table - 1st ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... page 55
Telephone Table - 2nd ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... page 56
Telephone Table - recorded messages .......................................................................................................................................................................................... page 56
RTC ACTIVATION BY A CALL FROM THE CONTROL PANEL .................................................................................................................................................... page 57
USER RTC ACTIVATION .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. page 57
DTMF Commands ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... page 57
RTC USER with recognition of incoming number ......................................................................................................................................................................... page 57
INSTALLER RTC ACTIVATION ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... page 57
Outgoing SMS Management ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... page 58
Incoming SMS Management ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... page 58
Commands List ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ page 58
Sirens ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. page 59
Technical Features ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... page 59
Board ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... page 59
HP Sirens ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... page 61
EWEB PLUS / EWEB PLUS VIDEO / EWEB WIFI II - LAN network board (ETHERNET / WIFI) ............................................................................................... page 63
Programming ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. page 64
Hints on sectors management ................................................................................................................................................................................................. page 64
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY WITH R&TTE DIRECTIVE 99/05/EC .................................................................................................................................. page 109
DICHIARAZIONE DI CONFORMITA’ ALLA DIRETTIVA R&TTE 99/05/CE ................................................................................................................................... page 110

-2-
GENERAL INFORMATION
The central control units of the Xtream serial and the devices described in this manual, certified by IMQ - Security Systems, are
compliant with the following standards: EN 50131-1, EN 50131-3:2009, EN 50131-6:2008, EN50136-2:2013 and CEB T031,
Grade 3 and Grade 2.

ARTICLES DESCRIPTION

XTREAM 640 Microprocessor central control unit P Grade 3

XTREAM 64 B - XTREAM 32 B - XTREAM 6 B Microprocessor central control unit P Grade 2
XTREAM 64 - XTREAM 32 - XTREAM 6 Microprocessor central control unit

ICE Operating keyboard P

A600 - A600 Plus Operating keyboard P
A600 EVO - A600 EVO plus Operating keyboard P
A500 - A500 Plus Operating keyboard P
A 300 - A 300 Plus Operating keyboard P
RS Serie Proximity reader P
TOUCH Serie Proximity key P
XGSM GSM telephone communicator P
XGSM485 - XGSM485 PRO GSM telephone communicator
XSINT Voice synthesis boards P
XEXP8 Zone expansion module P
SATWS - XSATWS - XSATWS 2 - XSATWS 4
Zone expansion module via radio
XWS 4 VIDEO
XSAT2 solo in CONT-SX Zone and output expansion module P
XSAT8 solo in CONT-SX Zone and output expansion module P
XSAT MINI Zone and output expansion module P
XSAT36 in CONT-SATW o CONT-XTREAM Zone and output expansion module P
XSATHP - XSAT HP Mini Expansion module for digital sensors
XSATPW 3 solo in CONT-XTREAM Power feeder in boards with zone and output expansion P Grade 2
XSATPW 3 Q Power feeder in metallic box with zone and output expansion P Grade 2
XSATPW 5 Power feeder in boards with zone and output expansion
XSATPW 5 Q Power feeder in metallic box with zone and output expansion
POWER 3 solo in CONT-XTREAM Extra power feeder in board P Grade 2
POWER 3 Q Extra power feeder in metallic box P Grade 2
POWER 5 Extra power feeder in board
POWER 5 Q Extra power feeder in metallic box
XMR2 2-relay board P
MR4 4-relay board P
MR8 8-relay board P
XWEB - EWEB LAN - WEB SERVER interface
EWEB Plus LAN - WEB SERVER interface P Grade 3
EWEB WIFI LAN - WEB SERVER WIFI interface
SIRENE SERIE LED HP Sirens with RS485 connection P
SIRENE SERIE LED PLUS Sirens P

Compliance with EN50131 is voided if:

• the devices are not installed in the CONT-XTREAM, CONT SX and CONT SAT W containers or with reference to that specifically
indicated in the table.

The products must be used according to the intended use and in compliance with the rules applicable to the
various plant engineering types.
However, before commissioning the installed products, the system must be tested in order to verify its functioning
and compliance with the safety rules according to that indicated by Law n. 46 dated 05/03/90 and by Standard CEI
79-3.

The equipment must not be exposed to dripping or water sprays and no object full of liquid must be placed on it.

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MUST BE EXECUTED BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL

AVS ELECTRONICS S.p.a. reserves the right to make amendments at any moment and without notice.

-3-
 Compliance with EN50131 - Grade 2 and Grade 3
To enable conformity with EN50131 Standards Grade 3 of the XTREAM 640 control panel, certified by IMQ - Security Systems,
and conformity with EN50131 standards Grade 2 of the XTREAM 64B, XTREAM 32B and XTREAM 6B control panels,
certified by IMQ - Security Systems, simply adapt the default programming supplied by AVS Electronics S.p.A..

In particular:
• option "Compliant with EN50131" active
• "Conditioned Start" option active
• "Signal Tamper" option active for every type of zone
• "Memorise Alarm" option active for every type of zone
• "Encode Alarms" option active for every type of zone, with a minimum of 3 and a maximum of 10
• "Report Tamper" option active, for cases to be reported by phone
• "Listen upon reply" option enabled
• there must be an input programmed as "Primary Failure", to manage Siren Failures
• there must be an input programmed as "Secondary Failure", to manage Sensor Failures and Robbery Device Failures
• Compliance with EN50131 also requires at least one user to be empowered to authorise access by the fitter. Consequently, it is necessary
for at least one user code to be programmed accordingly, see "User Profile" -> "Authorise fitter"

In the XTREAM640 control panel, compliance of the configurations and/or connections described below passes from EN50131
standards Grade 3 to Grade 2:
• “Enable PSTN” option enabled
• “Enable XGSM” option enabled
• connect non-conforming XSATPW 3 Q and XSATPW 5 Q devices to the system

N.B.: Though it passes to Grade 2, the XTREAM640 control panel maintains the operating characteristics indicated in Grade 3

The configurations and/or connections described below shall void compliance with Grade 3 and Grade 2 of EN50131:
• "Delay Network Failure" option active. Programmed time not 0.
• "Start zones" option active (At least one zone used for this function)
• connect non-compliant devices to the system, such as SATWS, XSATWS, XSATWS 2, XSATWS 4 XSATHP, POWER1, POWER4 and
POWER5

Functions Required
To maintain Conformity with EN50131 Standards, Grade 2 and Grade 3, all zone types must be programmed with the "Signal
Tamper", "Memo Alarm" options set to "YES" and the maximum "Number of Pulses" must be 1.

In addition to these functions, particular zone types must also observe the functions described below:
• The zones used to manage "Intrusions", must be programmed with the "Central Relay" option set to "YES" and at least one phone number
must be matched to call in the event of an alarm.
• The zones used to manage "Robberies" must be programmed as "Robbery". For this function at least one phone number must be matched
to call in the event of an alarm. The "Activate buzzer" and "Central relay" options are optional.
• The zones used to manage "Primary Failure", destined to signal failures from the external sirens, must be programmed with the "Central
Relay" option set to "NO"
• The zones used to manage "Secondary Failure", destined to signal failures from the intrusion sensors and robbery devices, must be
programmed with the "Central Relay" option set to "NO"
• The zones used to manage "AntiMask" events must be programmed with the "Central Relay" set to "NO"

NOTE: All the options that disable the TAMPER and the sending of phone messages for these events are not compliant with
EN50131, Grade 2 and Grade 3.

Equipment required
• To comply with EN50131, Grade 2, it is necessary to have a self-powered external siren and telephone combiner.

• To maintain Conformity with EN50131 Standards, Grade 3, it is necessary to have a self-powered outdoor siren and a network card (EWEB
PLUS) with SP3 encrypted transmission type.

Levels of access
The standard defines the levels of access to the central control unit functions:

• Level 1: access by anyone

• Level 2: access by the user (e.g.: operator)
• Level 3: access by the maintenance operator (only following authorisation by someone with Access Level 2)
• Level 4: access by the manufacturer

Auxillary control equipment

• The A300, A300 Plus, A600 and A600 Plus keyboards are Type B auxiliary control equipment
• RS1, RS2, RS3, RS4, RS5, RS6, RS7, RS7B and RS7S inserters are Type A auxiliary control equipment.

-4-
 "Changes in operation ""COMPLIANT WITH EN 50131"" YES/NO"
Changes from version 1.2p0 unconnected with programming
INCORRECT CODE Keyboard: after the third attempt the keyboard is blocked for 100 seconds; if a user leaves the entry of code unfinished
and after 10 seconds the code in cancelled and an incorrect code signaled.
FALSE KEY Inserter: after the third attempt it is blocked for 100 seconds
NEW CODE The zone code intervenes for the events listed below.
The reset following self-exclusion only occurs after the system has been switched off.
Zone: Allarm - Tamper - Survival
Central Control Unit/ Satellites: Tamper switch - Power failure - Low battery - Battery Failure - Absence of battery -
Low output voltage - Power feeder or recharger failure - Absence of network telephone line - PSTN fault - GSM fault
Keyboard/ RS Inserter: Tamper switch - Tamper comunication
Changes from version 1.2p0 with ""CONFORM EN50131"" step set to ""YES"" or ""NO""
VIEWING EVENTS ON YES Possible only from the user menu, or after entering the user code
DISPLAY
Occurred alarms, SIM Credit, Reprogramming devices, Fuses State, Internal information (EEPROM data error, ...), Codes
NO
variation
YES There are never displayed
""Check the event log " - Wireless Sensors Low battery - Sensors Antimask - Sensors Disqualification ,- Sensors Dirty
NO
lens - Sensors wireless supervision - Fire Alarm
ZONES YES The first 32 zones take priority over all others; moreover, this priority decreases, i.e.: zone 1 takes priority over zone 2
NO There is no priority
Robbery zones do not follow the compulsory alarm encoding system: the first alarms, up to the number allowed, are in the
YES
event memory, while subsequent events are not in the alarm memory but are reported on the phone
NO See description for programming ALARM ENCODING
SWITCH-ONS "When switching on, the central control unit does not immediately pass to on status, but passes through a ""pre-switch-on""
status in which the zones are active but do not trigger immediate alarms; in the presence of non-times zones which
YES imbalance when setting, switch-on is denied; this deni a activates the central relay for 5 seconds
It is possible to force switch-on from the guided user manual (ENT key), new steps ""ON/HO/AR/PE forced switch-on"";
these situations allow forcing."
NO "See description for programming ""CONDITIONED SWITCH-ON"" YES/NO"
- QUICK SWITCH-ON - YES Possible only from the user menu, after entering the user code
- MACRO SWITCH-ONS
KEYS A/B/C/D - NO No limit

INSTALLATION CODE YES The fitter can enter with his code only after receiving authorisation from the user (submenu key 1)
No blocks other than:
NO
Prog. if on setting NO disables access of the fitter code if the central control unit has at least one sector on.
TIMING PROGRAMMER If any of the causes that block switch-on is present, switch-on is blocked (not performed) and nothing is memorised in the
YES
event memory. A phone call is made to report failure to switch on
NO Switch-on is performed anyway and, if there are zones open, the central control unit will trigger an alarm.
EVENT MEMORY Only the events listed below are memorized:
User_codes - Switch-on - Tamper - Tamper communication
ZONE EVENTS:Zone alarm - Zone Tamper - Tamper Zone Fire/Failure/Masking - Zone exclusion - Zone Failure Alarm
- Masking Zone Alarm - Robbery Zone Alarm - Zone excluded after forcing by user
ZONE TECHNICAL ALARM: Radio sensor survival
YES
TECHNICAL ALARM: Low output voltage - Power feeder failure - Absence of network - Low / no battery / Battery failure
- Absence of telephone line - PSTN Fault - GSM Fault
MISCELLANEOUS:Radio interference - Forced switch-on - False Code
FITTER OPERATION: Date/Time change - Code change - Change in Programming
USER OPERATION:Date/Time change
NO No filter
FORCED SWITCH-ON The central control unit accepts forcing by the user for the following statuses:
FROM USER MENU - Zone type Secondary FAILURE, MASKING, ROBBERY - Zones in Antimask status - Zones in survival status
CENTRAL CONTROL UNIT AND SATELLITES: Absence of network - Power feeder failure - Low output voltage -
Recharger failure - Low / No battery / Battery failure
YES It is not possible to force switch-on for:
Central control unit tamper - Keyboard Tamper / Tamper - Kyboard communications - Satellite Tamper / Tamper - Satellite
Communication - Radio interference - Tamper communication - RS inserter - Absence of telephone line / Telephone line
fault - GSM malfunction - Zones in Tamper status - ""TAMPER"" type zone open - Primary ""FAILURE"" type zone open
- ""ISTANT"" type zone open - ""TIMED"" and ""CONDITIONED"" zone type with ""OFF Times"" open "
NO "See description for programming ""CONDITIONED SWITCH-ON"" YES/NO"
TELEPHONE With the system switched on and an input time of xx programmed, the telephone alarm delays communication of the alarm
COMMUNICATION FOR YES zones (even when instant) by the input time programmed.
ZONE ALARM If the system is switched off within the xx time, IT DOES NOT MAKE THE CALLS
NO With the system switched on, telephone communications are activated as soon as a zone alarm occurs.
SWITCH-OFF WITH YES The central control unit returns to date/time after 10 seconds if no keys are pressed
KEY 5
NO The central control unit returns to date/time after 120 seconds if no keys are pressed
TEST CALL XTREAM640: The control panel makes a test call at least every 5 hours to all the programmed phone numbers.
YES XTREAM64B - XTREAM32B - XTREAM6B: The control panel makes a test call at least every 25 hours to all the
programmed phone numbers.
NO The control panel does not make the test call.
XTREAM640: After exiting the installer menu, the control panel makes a test call to all the programmed phone numbers.
YES XTREAM64B - XTREAM32B - XTREAM6B: After exiting the installer menu, the control panel makes a test call to all the
programmed phone numbers.
NO The control panel does not make the test call

-5-
XTREAM 640 - Technical features
Microprocessor control panel that manages all functions typical of a safety and protection system, in that it is able to discriminate
the signals coming from burglar proof , fire protection, anti-robbery, medical assistance, etc detectors.
The system is made of a control panel and of at least one keypad of (mod. A 600-A600Plus-A300-A300Plus) type and it can be
completed with extension satellite electronic boards of type, with RS485 HP siren and with GSM dialler; the PSTN dialler and the
vocal synthesizer are already included in the control panel electronic board.

Keypads • maximum n. 32 with display, on 600 total meters of cable with 4 wires per serial
Satellites • maximum n. 32 satellites - 16 for serial - mod.XSAT2, XSAT8,SAT03, SAT04 ,XSAT36 ,
XSATPW 3, XSATPW 5, SAT WS, XSAT WS,XSAT WS 2, XSAT WS 4, XSATWS 4 VIDEO,
XSATMINI, XSATHP, XSATHP Mini e XSATHP Virtuale)
- on 600 total meters of cable with 4 wires per serial
Serial keys • n. 32 serial readers - 16 for serial
- on 600 total meters of cable with 4 wires per serial
Input zones • n° 10 + 10 expandable at 640, programmable with automatic detection of the state of alarm and
of tamper proof, individually manageable
• n° 1 input dedicated to tamper proof, balanced and cannot be excluded.
Sectors • n° 64 (separate sectors)
Zones configuration • Immediate, Conditional, Immediate with permanent exclusion, Immediate with temporary
exclusion, Immediate with pre-alarm 1-2-3-4, Timed 1-2-3, Timed with temporary exclusion 1-2-
3, Timed with permanent exclusion 1-2-3, Arming ON, HOME, ZONE, PERIMETER, 24 hour
line, Timed 24 hour line 1-2-3, 24 Hour line with pre-alarm 1-2-3-4, Tamper line, not used
Zone options • Impulses, alarm memory and reset, tamper signal, chime function, door, zones under test, buzzer
(zone double profile) i n alarm, acti vates O.C . outputs, AND zones and AND di rectional, radio supervision
management, 16 digits alphanumerical stripe, Alarms Coding, Switch alarm.
Events memory • n° 2000 events can be memorised with date and time and outcome of the calls
Alarm outputs • n° 1 alarm relay programmable with 2-ways and output. Connect only circuits working with SELV
voltage to these outputs.
• n° 8 transistorised outputs (50 mA-OpenCollector) on terminal boards for connection with relay
electronic boards upon request. Configurable in various modalities.
• n° 1 transistorised outputs 100 mA on terminal board dedicated to Tamper line
• n° 1 output (50 mA - O.C.) on quality terminal board of the control panel
Armings • n° 4 automatic arming modality
• From display keypad or from outdoor activations in it ON, HOME, AREA and PERIMETRO
modality
Codes • n° 512 user codes available from 4 to 6 digits
• n° 32 programmable user profiles
• n° 512 automatic Emergency codes (with more than 1.000.000 combinations)
Timer • 32 daily operations for all sectors
• armings/disarmings of sectors and OC activation
• "copy copy from Monday to Friday" and "copy from Monday to Sunday" functionca
• 20 programmable holiday periods
• automatic summer time-standard time and standard time-summer time change
• duration Inclusion Warning/Extraordinary management
• inhibition of the codes with Timer armed
Telephone • n° 64 telephone numbers on PSTN/GSM line
• n° 40 customisable vocal messages as well as extended vocaburlay
• GSM telephone dialler optional
Check on power supplies • signal on display of the control panel functioning anomalies or supervised additional supply units
Programming • from display keypad with simplified guided menu
• from PC in direct connection with software Xwin and USB cable
• from PC connected via telephone with software Xwin and universal modem
Voltage • stabilised power supply nominal voltage: 13.8 V =
Sizes • ICE keyboard: 129,5 x 92 x 15,5 mm
• A600 - A600 Plus - A600 EVO - A600 EVO Plus keyboard: (LxHxP) 153 x 120 x 35 mm
• A500 - A500 Plus keyboard: (LxHxP) 135 x 114 x 35 mm
• A300 - A300 Plus keyboard: (LxHxP): 120 x 90 x 15 mm
• housing (LxHxP): 330 x 420 x 107 mm
Environmental conditions • -10 °C / + 40 °C - Humidity 95 %
Environmental class • Class II
Weight without battery • 5 Kg
• 1,3A / 115 V ~
Max. current absorbed
• 0,8A / 230 V ~
Max. current absorbed on only 250 mA control panel electronic board with PSTN telephone dialler activated
•
13.8V =
Placeable battery • maximum 18Ah
IMQ Performances • EN 50131 - 1 Grado 3 • EN50136-2
• EN 50131 - 3 Grado 3
• EN 50131 - 6 Grado 3

-6-
XTREAM 64 B - Technical features
Microprocessor control panel that manages all functions typical of a safety and protection system, in that it is able to discriminate
the signals coming from burglar proof , fire protection, anti-robbery, medical assistance, etc detectors.
The system is made of a control panel and of at least one keypad of (mod. A 600-A600Plus-A300-A300Plus) type and it can be
completed with extension satellite electronic boards of type, with RS485 HP and with GSM dialler and the vocal synthesizer; the
PSTN dialler is already included in the control panel electronic board.

Keypads • maximum n. 8 with display, on 600 total meters of cable with 4 wires per serial
Satellites • maximum n. 8 satellites - mod.XSAT2, XSAT8,SAT03, SAT04 ,XSAT36 , XSATPW 3,
XSATPW 5, SAT WS, XSAT WS,XSAT WS 2, XSAT WS 4, XSATWS 4 VIDEO, XSATMINI,
XSATHP, XSATHP Mini e XSATHP Virtuale)
- on 600 total meters of cable with 4 wires per serial
Serial keys • n. 16 serial readers - on 600 total meters of cable with 4 wires per serial
Input zones • n° 6 + 6 expandable at 64, programmable with automatic detection of the state of alarm and of
tamper proof, individually manageable
• n° 1 input dedicated to tamper proof, balanced and cannot be excluded.
Sectors • n° 8 (separate sectors)
Zones configuration • Immediate, Conditional, Immediate with permanent exclusion, Immediate with temporary
exclusion, Immediate with pre-alarm 1-2-3-4, Timed 1-2-3, Timed with temporary exclusion 1-2-
3, Timed with permanent exclusion 1-2-3, Arming ON, HOME, ZONE, PERIMETER, 24 hour
line, Timed 24 hour line 1-2-3, 24 Hour line with pre-alarm 1-2-3-4, Tamper line, not used
Zone options • Impulses, alarm memory and reset, tamper signal, chime function, door, zones under test, buzzer
(zone double profile) in alarm, activates O.C. outputs, AND zones and AND directional, radio supervision
management, 16 digits alphanumerical stripe, Alarms Coding, Switch alarm.
Events memory • n° 1000 events can be memorised with date and time and outcome of the calls
Alarm outputs • n° 1 alarm relay programmable with 2-ways and output. Connect only circuits working with SELV
voltage to these outputs.
• n° 8 transistorised outputs (50 mA-OpenCollector) on terminal boards for connection with relay
electronic boards upon request. Configurable in various modalities.
• n° 1 transistorised outputs 100 mA on terminal board dedicated to Tamper line
• n° 1 output (50 mA - O.C.) on quality terminal board of the control panel
Armings • n° 4 automatic arming modality
• From display keypad or from outdoor activations in it ON, HOME, AREA and PERIMETRO
modality
Codes • n° 64 user codes available from 4 to 6 digits
• n° 8 programmable user profiles
• n° 64 automatic Emergency codes (with more than 1.000.000 combinations)
Timer • 32 daily operations for all sectors
• armings/disarmings of sectors and OC activation
• "copy copy from Monday to Friday" and "copy from Monday to Sunday" functionca
• 20 programmable holiday periods
• automatic summer time-standard time and standard time-summer time change
• duration Inclusion Warning/Extraordinary management
• inhibition of the codes with Timer armed
Telephone • n° 16 telephone numbers on PSTN/GSM line
• n° 40 customisable vocal messages as well as extended vocabulary
• GSM telephone dialler optionall
Check on power supplies • signal on display of the control panel functioning anomalies or supervised additional supply units

Programming • from display keypad with simplified guided menu

• from PC in direct connection with software Xwin and USB cable
• from PC connected via telephone with software Xwin and universal modem
Voltage • stabilised power supply nominal voltage: 13.8 V =
Sizes • ICE keyboard: 129,5 x 92 x 15,5 mm
• A600 - A600 Plus - A600 EVO - A600 EVO Plus keyboard: (LxHxP) 153 x 120 x 35 mm
• A500 - A500 Plus keyboard: (LxHxP) 135 x 114 x 35 mm
• A300 - A300 Plus keyboard: (LxHxP): 120 x 90 x 15 mm
• housing (LxHxP): 330 x 420 x 107 mm
Environmental conditions • -10 °C / + 40 °C - Humidity 95 %
Environmental class • Class II
Weight without battery • 5 Kg
• 1,3A / 115 V ~
Max. current absorbed
• 0,8A / 230 V ~
Max. current absorbed on only 250 mA control panel electronic board with PSTN telephone dialler activated
•
13.8V =
Placeable battery • maximum 18Ah
IMQ Performances • EN 50131 - 1 Grado 2 • EN50136-2
• EN 50131 - 3 Grado 2
• EN 50131 - 6 Grado 2

-7-
XTREAM 64 - Technical features
Microprocessor control panel that manages all functions typical of a safety and protection system, in that it is able to discriminate
the signals coming from burglar proof , fire protection, anti-robbery, medical assistance, etc detectors.
The system is made of a control panel and of at least one keypad of (mod. A 600-A600Plus-A300-A300Plus) type and it can be
completed with extension satellite electronic boards of type, with RS485 HP and with GSM dialler and the vocal synthesizer; the
PSTN dialler is already included in the control panel electronic board.

Keypads • maximum n. 8 with display, on 600 total meters of cable with 4 wires per serial
Satellites • maximum n. 8 satellites - mod.XSAT2, XSAT8,SAT03, SAT04 ,XSAT36 , XSATPW 3,
XSATPW 5, SAT WS, XSAT WS,XSAT WS 2, XSAT WS 4, XSATWS 4 VIDEO, XSATMINI,
XSATHP, XSATHP Mini e XSATHP Virtuale)
- on 600 total meters of cable with 4 wires per serial
Serial keys • n. 16 serial readers - on 600 total meters of cable with 4 wires per serial
Input zones • n° 6 + 6 expandable at 64, programmable with automatic detection of the state of alarm and of
tamper proof, individually manageable
• n° 1 input dedicated to tamper proof, balanced and cannot be excluded.
Sectors • n° 8 (separate sectors)
Zones configuration • Immediate, Conditional, Immediate with permanent exclusion, Immediate with temporary
exclusion, Immediate with pre-alarm 1-2-3-4, Timed 1-2-3, Timed with temporary exclusion 1-2-
3, Timed with permanent exclusion 1-2-3, Arming ON, HOME, ZONE, PERIMETER, 24 hour
line, Timed 24 hour line 1-2-3, 24 Hour line with pre-alarm 1-2-3-4, Tamper line, not used
Zone options • Impulses, alarm memory and reset, tamper signal, chime function, door, zones under test, buzzer
(zone double profile) in alarm, activates O.C. outputs, AND zones and AND directional, radio supervision
management, 16 digits alphanumerical stripe, Alarms Coding, Switch alarm.
Events memory • n° 1000 events can be memorised with date and time and outcome of the calls
Alarm outputs • n° 1 (max 9) alarm relay programmable with 2-ways and output. Connect only circuits working
with SELV voltage to these outputs.
• n° 8 (max 72) transistorised outputs (50 mA-OpenCollector) on terminal boards for connection
with relay electronic boards upon request. Configurable in various modalities.
• n° 1 transistorised outputs 100 mA on terminal board dedicated to Tamper line
• n° 1 output (50 mA - O.C.) on quality terminal board of the control panel
Armings • n° 4 automatic arming modality
• From display keypad or from outdoor activations in it ON, HOME, AREA and PERIMETRO
modality
Codes • n° 64 user codes available from 4 to 6 digits
• n° 8 programmable user profiles
• n° 64 automatic Emergency codes (with more than 1.000.000 combinations)
Timer • 32 daily operations for all sectors
• armings/disarmings of sectors and OC activation
• "copy copy from Monday to Friday" and "copy from Monday to Sunday" functionca
• 20 programmable holiday periods
• automatic summer time-standard time and standard time-summer time change
• duration Inclusion Warning/Extraordinary management
• inhibition of the codes with Timer armed
Telephone • n°16 telephone numbers on PSTN/GSM line
• n°40 customisable vocal messages as well as extended vocabulary
• GSM telephone dialler optional
Check on power supplies • signal on display of the control panel functioning anomalies or supervised additional supply units

Programming • from display keypad with simplified guided menu

• from PC in direct connection with software Xwin and USB cable
• from PC connected via telephone with software Xwin and universal modem
Voltage • stabilised power supply nominal voltage: 13.8 V
Sizes • ICE keyboard: 129,5 x 92 x 15,5 mm
• A600 - A600 Plus - A600 EVO - A600 EVO Plus keyboard: (LxHxP) 153 x 120 x 35 mm
• A500 - A500 Plus keyboard: (LxHxP) 135 x 114 x 35 mm
• A300 - A300 Plus keyboard: (LxHxP): 120 x 90 x 15 mm
• housing (LxHxP): 321 x 279 x 83 mm
Environmental conditions • +5 °C / + 40 °C
• 0.7A / 115 V ~
Max. current absorbed
• 0.4A / 230 V ~
Max. current absorbed on
• only 250 mA control panel electronic board with PSTN telephone dialler activated
13.8 V =
Placeable battery • maximum 7Ah

-8-
XTREAM 32 B - Technical features
Microprocessor control panel that manages all functions typical of a safety and protection system, in that it is able to discriminate
the signals coming from burglar proof , fire protection, anti-robbery, medical assistance, etc detectors.
The system is made of a control panel and of at least one keypad of (mod. A 600-A600Plus-A300-A300Plus) type and it can be
completed with extension satellite electronic boards of type, with RS485 HP and with GSM dialler and the vocal synthesizer; the
PSTN dialler is already included in the control panel electronic board.

Keypads • maximum n. 8 w ith display, on 600 total meters of cable with 4 wires per serial
Satellites • maximu m n. 8 satellites - mo d.X S AT2, X S AT8,S AT03, S AT 04 ,X S AT 36 , X S AT P W 3,
XSATPW 5, SAT WS, XSAT WS,XSAT WS 2, XSAT WS 4, XSATWS 4 VIDEO, XSATMINI,
XSATHP, XSATHP Mini e XSATHP Virtuale)
- on 600 total meters of cable with 4 wires per serial
Serial keys • n. 16 serial readers - on 600 total meters of cable with 4 wires per serial
Input zones • n° 6 + 6 expandable at 32, programmable with automatic detection of the state of alarm and of
tamper proof, individually manageable
• n° 1 input dedicated to tamper proof, balanced and cannot be excluded.
Sectors • n° 8 (separate sectors)
Zones configuration • Immediate, Conditional, Immediate with permanent exclusion, Immediate with temporary
exclusion, Immediate with pre-alarm 1-2-3-4, Timed 1-2-3, Timed with temporary exclusion 1-2-
3, Timed with permanent exclusion 1-2-3, Arming ON, HOME, ZONE, PERIMETER, 24 hour
line, Timed 24 hour line 1-2-3, 24 Hour line with pre-alarm 1-2-3-4, Tamper line, not used
Zone options • Impulses, alarm memory and reset, tamper signal, chime function, door, zones under test, buzzer
(zone double profile) i n a la rm , a c ti va te s O .C . o utp uts , A ND zo ne s a nd A ND d i re c ti o na l, ra d i o s up e rvi s i o n
management, 16 digits alphanumerical stripe, Alarms Coding, Switch alarm.
Events memory • n° 1000 events can be memorised with date and time and outcome of the calls
Alarm outputs • n° 1 alarm relay programmable with 2-ways and output. Connect only circuits working with SELV
voltage to these outputs.
• n° 8 transistorised outputs (50 mA-OpenCollector) on terminal boards for connection with relay
electronic boards upon request. Configurable in various modalities.
• n° 1 transistorised outputs 100 mA on terminal board dedicated to Tamper line
• n° 1 output (50 mA - O.C.) on quality terminal board of the control panel
Armings • n° 4 automatic arming modality
• From display keypad or from outdoor activations in it ON, HOME, AREA and PERIMETRO
modality
Codes • n° 64 user codes available from 4 to 6 digits
• n° 8 programmable user profiles
• n° 64 automatic Emergency codes (w ith more than 1.000.000 combinations)
Timer • 32 daily operations for all sectors
• armings/disarmings of sectors and OC activation
• "copy copy from Monday to Friday" and "copy from Monday to Sunday" functionca
• 20 programmable holiday periods
• automatic summer time-standard time and standard time-summer time change
• duration Inclusion Warning/Extraordinary management
• inhibition of the codes with Timer armed
Telephone • n° 16 telephone numbers on PSTN/GSM line
• n° 40 customisable vocal messages as well as extended vocabulary
• GSM telephone dialler optionall
Check on power supplies • signal on display of the control panel functioning anomalies or supervised additional supply units

Programming • from display keypad with simplified guided menu

• from PC in direct connection with software Xwin and USB cable
• from PC connected via telephone with software Xw in and universal modem
Voltage • stabilised power supply nominal voltage: 13.8 V =
Sizes • ICE keyboard: 129,5 x 92 x 15,5 mm
• A600 - A600 Plus - A600 EVO - A600 EVO Plus keyboard: (LxHxP) 153 x 120 x 35 mm
• A500 - A500 Plus keyboard: (LxHxP) 135 x 114 x 35 mm
• A300 - A300 Plus keyboard: (LxHxP): 120 x 90 x 15 mm
• housing (LxHxP): 330 x 420 x 107 mm
Environmental conditions • -10 °C / + 40 °C - Humidity 95 %
Environmental class • Class II
Weight without battery • 5 Kg
• 1,3 A / 115 V ~
Max. current absorbed
• 0,8 A / 230 V ~
Max. current absorbed on only 250 mA control panel electronic board with PSTN telephone dialler activated
•
13.8V =
Placeable battery • maximum 18Ah
IMQ Performances • EN 50131 - 1 Grado 2 • EN50136-2
• EN 50131 - 3 Grado 2
• EN 50131 - 6 Grado 2

-9-
XTREAM 32- Technical features
Microprocessor control panel that manages all functions typical of a safety and protection system, in that it is able to discriminate
the signals coming from burglar proof , fire protection, anti-robbery, medical assistance, etc detectors.
The system is made of a control panel and of at least one keypad of (mod. A 600-A600Plus-A300-A300Plus) type and it can be
completed with extension satellite electronic boards of type, with RS485 HP and with GSM dialler and the vocal synthesizer; the
PSTN dialler is already included in the control panel electronic board.

Keypads • maximum n. 8 with display, on 600 total meters of cable with 4 wires per serial
Satellites • maximum n. 8 satellites - mod.XSAT2, XSAT8,SAT03, SAT04 ,XSAT36 , XSATPW 3,
XSATPW 5, SAT WS, XSAT WS,XSAT WS 2, XSAT WS 4, XSATWS 4 VIDEO, XSATMINI,
XSATHP, XSATHP Mini e XSATHP Virtuale)
- on 600 total meters of cable with 4 wires per serial
Serial keys • n. 16 serial readers (mod. RS) - on 600 total meters of cable with 4 wires per serial
Input zones • n° 6 + 6 expandable at 32, programmable with automatic detection of the state of alarm and of
tamper proof, individually manageable
• n° 1 input dedicated to tamper proof, balanced and cannot be excluded.
Sectors • n° 8 (separate sectors)
Zones configuration • Immediate, Conditional, Immediate with permanent exclusion, Immediate with temporary
exclusion, Immediate with pre-alarm 1-2-3-4, Timed 1-2-3, Timed with temporary exclusion 1-2-
3, Timed with permanent exclusion 1-2-3, Arming ON, HOME, ZONE, PERIMETER, 24 hour
line, Timed 24 hour line 1-2-3, 24 Hour line with pre-alarm 1-2-3-4, Tamper line, not used
Zone options • Impulses, alarm memory and reset, tamper signal, chime function, door, zones under test, buzzer
(zone double profile) in alarm, activates O.C. outputs, AND zones and AND directional, radio supervision
management, 16 digits alphanumerical stripe, Alarms Coding, Switch alarm.
Events memory • n° 1000 events can be memorised with date and time and outcome of the calls
Alarm outputs • n° 1 (max 9) alarm relay programmable with 2-ways and output. Connect only circuits working
with SELV voltage to these outputs.
• n° 8 (max 72) transistorised outputs (50 mA-OpenCollector) on terminal boards for connection
with relay electronic boards upon request. Configurable in various modalities.
• n° 1 transistorised outputs 100 mA on terminal board dedicated to Tamper line
• n° 1 output (50 mA - O.C.) on quality terminal board of the control panel
Armings • n° 4 automatic arming modality
• From display keypad or from outdoor activations in it ON, HOME, AREA and PERIMETRO
modality
Codes • n° 64 user codes available from 4 to 6 digits
• n° 8 programmable user profiles
• n° 64 automatic Emergency codes (with more than 1.000.000 combinations)
Timer • 32 daily operations for all sectors
• armings/disarmings of sectors and OC activation
• "copy copy from Monday to Friday" and "copy from Monday to Sunday" functionca
• 20 programmable holiday periods
• automatic summer time-standard time and standard time-summer time change
• duration Inclusion Warning/Extraordinary management
• inhibition of the codes with Timer armed
Telephone • n°16 telephone numbers on PSTN/GSM line
• n°40 customisable vocal messages as well as extended vocabulary
• GSM telephone dialler optional
Check on power supplies • signal on display of the control panel functioning anomalies or supervised additional supply units
Programming • from display keypad with simplified guided menu
• from PC in direct connection with software Xwin and USB cable
• from PC connected via telephone with software Xwin and universal modem
Voltage • stabilised power supply nominal voltage: 13.8 V
Sizes • ICE keyboard: 129,5 x 92 x 15,5 mm
• A600 - A600 Plus - A600 EVO - A600 EVO Plus keyboard: (LxHxP) 153 x 120 x 35 mm
• A500 - A500 Plus keyboard: (LxHxP) 135 x 114 x 35 mm
• A300 - A300 Plus keyboard: (LxHxP): 120 x 90 x 15 mm
• housing (LxHxP): 275 x 275 x 99.5 mm
Environmental conditions • +5 °C / + 40 °C
• 0.7A / 115 V ~
Max. current absorbed
• 0.4A / 230 V ~
Max. current absorbed on
• only 250 mA control panel electronic board with PSTN telephone dialler activated
13.8 V =
Placeable battery • maximum 7Ah

- 10 -
XTREAM 6B - Technical features
Microprocessor control panel that manages all functions typical of a safety and protection system, in that it is able to discriminate
the signals coming from burglar proof , fire protection, anti-robbery, medical assistance, etc detectors.
The system is made of a control panel and of at least one keypad of (mod. A 600-A600Plus-A300-A300Plus) type and it can be
completed with extension satellite electronic boards of type, with RS485 HP and with GSM dialler and the vocal synthesizer; the
PSTN dialler is already included in the control panel electronic board.

Keypads • maximum n. 8 w ith display, on 600 total meters of cable with 4 wires per serial
Satellites • maximu m n. 8 satellites - mod.XSAT2, XSAT8,SAT03, SAT04 ,XSAT36 , XS ATP W 3,
XSATPW 5, SAT WS, XSAT WS,XSAT WS 2, XSAT WS 4, XSATWS 4 VIDEO, XSATMINI,
XSATHP, XSATHP Mini e XSATHP Virtuale)
- on 600 total meters of cable with 4 wires per serial
Serial keys • n. 16 serial readers (mod. RS) - on 600 total meters of cable with 4 wires per serial
Input zones • n° 6 + 6 expandable at 10, programmable with automatic detection of the state of alarm and of
tamper proof, individually manageable
• n° 1 input dedicated to tamper proof, balanced and cannot be exclude
Sectors • n° 8 (separate sectors)
Zones configuration • Immediate, Conditional, Immediate with permanent exclusion, Immediate with temporary
exclusion, Immediate with pre-alarm 1-2-3-4, Timed 1-2-3, Timed with temporary exclusion 1-2-
3, Timed with permanent exclusion 1-2-3, Arming ON, HOME, ZONE, PERIMETER, 24 hour
line, Timed 24 hour line 1-2-3, 24 Hour line with pre-alarm 1-2-3-4, Tamper line, not used
Zone options • Impulses, alarm memory and reset, tamper signal, chime function, door, zones under test, buzzer
(zone double profile) i n a la rm , a c ti va te s O .C . o utp uts , A ND zo ne s a nd A ND d i re c tio na l, ra d io s up e rvi s i o n
management, 16 digits alphanumerical stripe, Alarms Coding, Switch alarm.
Events memory • n° 1000 events can be memorised with date and time and outcome of the calls
Alarm outputs • n° 1 alarm relay programmable with 2-ways and output. Connect only circuits working with SELV
voltage to these outputs.
• n° 8 transistorised outputs (50 mA-OpenCollector) on terminal boards for connection with relay
electronic boards upon request. Configurable in various modalities.
• n° 1 transistorised outputs 100 mA on terminal board dedicated to Tamper line
• n° 1 output (50 mA - O.C.) on quality terminal board of the control panel
Armings • n° 4 automatic arming modality
• From display keypad or from outdoor activations in it ON, HOME, AREA and PERIMETRO
modality
Codes • n° 64 user codes available from 4 to 6 digits
• n° 8 programmable user profiles
• n° 64 automatic Emergency codes (w ith more than 1.000.000 combinations)
Timer • 32 daily operations for all sectors
• armings/disarmings of sectors and OC activation
• "copy copy from Monday to Friday" and "copy from Monday to Sunday" functionca
• 20 programmable holiday periods
• automatic summer time-standard time and standard time-summer time change
• duration Inclusion Warning/Extraordinary management
• inhibition of the codes with Timer armed
Telephone • n° 16 telephone numbers on PSTN/GSM line
• n° 40 customisable vocal messages as well as extended vocabulary
• GSM telephone dialler optional
Check on power supplies • signal on display of the control panel functioning anomalies or supervised additional supply units
Programming • from display keypad with simplified guided menu
• from PC in direct connection with software Xwin and USB cable
• from PC connected via telephone with software Xw in and universal modem
Voltage • stabilised power supply nominal voltage: 13.8 V =
Sizes • ICE keyboard: 129,5 x 92 x 15,5 mm
• A600 - A600 Plus - A600 EVO - A600 EVO Plus keyboard: (LxHxP) 153 x 120 x 35 mm
• A500 - A500 Plus keyboard: (LxHxP) 135 x 114 x 35 mm
• A300 - A300 Plus keyboard: (LxHxP): 120 x 90 x 15 mm
• housing (LxHxP): 330 x 420 x 107 mm
Environmental conditions • -10 °C / + 40 °C - Humidity 95 %
Environmental class • Class II
Weight without battery • 5 Kg
• 1,3 A / 115 V ~
Max. current absorbed
• 0,8 A / 230 V ~
Max. current absorbed on only 250 mA control panel electronic board with PSTN telephone dialler activated
•
13.8V =
Placeable battery • maximum 18Ah
IMQ Performances • EN 50131 - 1 Grado 2 • EN50136-2
• EN 50131 - 3 Grado 2
• EN 50131 - 6 Grado 2

- 11 -
XTREAM 6 - Technical features
Microprocessor control panel that manages all functions typical of a safety and protection system, in that it is able to discriminate
the signals coming from burglar proof , fire protection, anti-robbery, medical assistance, etc detectors.
The system is made of a control panel and of at least one keypad of (mod. A 600-A600Plus-A300-A300Plus) type and it can be
completed with extension satellite electronic boards of type, with RS485 HP and with GSM dialler and the vocal synthesizer; the
PSTN dialler is already included in the control panel electronic board.

Keypads • maximum n. 8 with display, on 600 total meters of cable with 4 wires per serial
Satellites • maximum n. 1 - mod.XSAT2, XSAT8,SAT03, SAT04 ,XSAT36 , XSATPW 3, XSATPW 5, SAT
WS, XSAT WS,XSAT WS 2, XSAT WS 4, XSATWS 4 VIDEO, XSATMINI, XSATHP, XSATHP
Mini e XSATHP Virtuale)
- on 600 total meters of cable with 4 wires per serial
Serial keys • n. 16 serial readers (mod. RS)- on 600 total meters of cable with 4 wires per serial
Input zones • n° 6 + 6 expandable at 10, programmable with automatic detection of the state of alarm and of
tamper proof, individually manageable
• n° 1 input dedicated to tamper proof, balanced and cannot be excluded.
Sectors • n° 8 (separate sectors)
Zones configuration • Immediate, Conditional, Immediate with permanent exclusion, Immediate with temporary
exclusion, Immediate with pre-alarm 1-2-3-4, Timed 1-2-3, Timed with temporary exclusion 1-2-
3, Timed with permanent exclusion 1-2-3, Arming ON, HOME, ZONE, PERIMETER, 24 hour
line, Timed 24 hour line 1-2-3, 24 Hour line with pre-alarm 1-2-3-4, Tamper line, not used
Zone options • Impulses, alarm memory and reset, tamper signal, chime function, door, zones under test, buzzer
(zone double profile) i n alarm, acti vates O.C . outputs, AND zones and AND di rectional, radio supervision
management, 16 digits alphanumerical stripe, Alarms Coding, Switch alarm.
Events memory • n° 1000 events can be memorised with date and time and outcome of the calls
Alarm outputs • n° 1 alarm relay programmable with 2-ways and output. Connect only circuits working with SELV
voltage to these outputs.
• n° 8 transistorised outputs (50 mA-OpenCollector) on terminal boards for connection with relay
electronic boards upon request. Configurable in various modalities.
• n° 1 transistorised outputs 100 mA on terminal board dedicated to Tamper line
• n° 1 output (50 mA - O.C.) on quality terminal board of the control panel
Armings • n° 4 automatic arming modality
• From display keypad or from outdoor activations in it ON, HOME, AREA and PERIMETRO
modality
Codes • n° 64 user codes available from 4 to 6 digits
• n° 8 programmable user profiles
• n° 64 automatic Emergency codes (with more than 1.000.000 combinations)
Timer • 32 daily operations for all sectors
• armings/disarmings of sectors and OC activation
• "copy copy from Monday to Friday" and "copy from Monday to Sunday" functionca
• 20 programmable holiday periods
• automatic summer time-standard time and standard time-summer time change
• duration Inclusion Warning/Extraordinary management
• inhibition of the codes with Timer armed
Telephone • n°16 telephone numbers on PSTN/GSM line
• n°40 customisable vocal messages as well as extended vocabulary
• GSM telephone dialler optional
Check on power supplies • signal on display of the control panel functioning anomalies or supervised additional supply units
Programming • from display keypad with simplified guided menu
• from PC in direct connection with software Xwin and USB cable
• from PC connected via telephone with software Xwin and universal modem
Voltage • stabilised power supply nominal voltage: 13.8 V
Sizes • ICE keyboard: 129,5 x 92 x 15,5 mm
• A600 - A600 Plus - A600 EVO - A600 EVO Plus keyboard: (LxHxP) 153 x 120 x 35 mm
• A500 - A500 Plus keyboard: (LxHxP) 135 x 114 x 35 mm
• A300 - A300 Plus keyboard: (LxHxP): 120 x 90 x 15 mm
• housing (LxHxP): 275 x 275 x 99.5 mm
Environmental conditions • +5 °C / + 40 °C
• 0.35A / 115 V ~
Max. current absorbed
• 0.25A / 230 V ~
Max. current absorbed on
• only 250 mA control panel electronic board with PSTN telephone dialler activated
13.8 V =
Placeable battery • maximum 7Ah

- 12 -
DISTRIBUTION OF THE ZONES
The zones available to the control panel are a maximum of 640. The zones are split into two families, "physical zones" and "Software zones".
• XTREAM640 - maximum 640 software zones out of a maximum 1220 physically available zones
• XTREAM64B and XTREAM64 - maximum 64 software zones out of a maximum 324 physically available zones
• XTREAM32B and XTREAM32 - maximum 32 software zones out of a maximum 308 physically available zones
• XTREAM6B and XTREAM6 - maximum 10 software zones

PHYSICAL ZONES - SOFTWARE ZONES ASSOCIATION

SOFTWARE ZONE: this a zone which can be programmed. There are a maximum number of 640 for Xtream 640, 64 for Xtream 64B and
Xtream 64, 32 for Xtream 32B and Xtream 32, and 10 for Xtream6B and Xtream 6.
PHYSICAL ZONE: these are the inputs (clamps) located on the various electronic boards, whether of control panel, extension, etc. Every
electronic board corresponds to a "physical zone" to which "software zones" of the system must be associated.
The numbering shown in the table is the default numbering of the control panel.
To every "software zone" a "physical zone" in sequential order is associated, starting from the control panel clamps to the last satellite of the
second serial; should these associations be varied for installation purposes, we recommend indicating so in the table.
EXAMPLE:
CONTROL PANEL ZONES: software zone 1 linked to clamp 1 of the control panel basic electronic board - software zone 10 linked to clamp
10 of the control panel basic electronic board - software zone 11 is linked to extension clamp 1 - software zone 18 linked to extension clamp
8.
SATELLITE ZONES: software zone 19 linked to clamp 1 of the satellite basic electronic board - software zone 26 linked to clamp 8 of the
satellite basic electronic board - software zone 27 linked to extension clamp 1 - software zone 34 linked to extension clamp 8.
And so on.
The physical outputs with connection defined as "double zones with tamper signal", are not pre-associated by default.
To manage the "double zones with tamper signal" review the pre-associations by default.
The physical zones are associated to the software zones taking into account whether this input is on control panel/satellite, on basic/extension
electronic board and defining the type of connection.
Key:
SATELLITE TYPE A = SAT03 - SAT03 V2.0 - SAT04 - XSAT36 - XSAT PW - XSAT 8 - XSAT 2
SATELLITE TYPE B = SAT WS - XSAT WS - XSATHP - XSATHP VIRTUAL
CON = CONTROL PANEL
PAD = KEYPAD
SAT xx = SATELLITE n. xx
BA.C = BASIC ELECTRONIC BOARD CLAMP
EX.C = EXTENSION ELECTRONIC BOARD CLAMPS
MD = Home Automation Module
S = SINGLE ZONE, "BALANCED ZONES/BALANCED ZONES WITH TAMPER SIGNAL" CONNECTION
D = DOUBLE ZONE, "DOUBLE ZONE WITH TAMPER SIGNAL" CONNECTION
Note: the distribution shown below is merely indicative and can be varied during programming.

COMPARATIVE TABLES

CONTROL PANEL ONLY XTREAM 640

SINGLE Inputs BASIC physical inputs [CON BA.C:xx S] EXTENSION physical inputs [CON EX.C:xx S]
Clamp 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

pre-associated
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
SOFTWARE ZONE
VARIED
software zone .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
INPUTS NOT PRE-ASSOCIATED
"DOUBLE ZONES WITH TAMPER SIGNAL" CONNECTION (WITH R2 10k)
DOUBLE Inputs BASIC physical inputs [CON BA.C:xx D] EXTENSION physical inputs [CON CLAMP:xx D]
Clamp 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
associated
SOFTWARE ZONE .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
C O N TR O L PAN E L N O X TR E AM 640
B A S I C p h y s ic a l in p u ts [C O N
S I N G L E I n p u ts E X T E N S I O N p h y s ic a l in p u ts [C O N E X .C :x x S]
B A .C :x x S ]
C la m p 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
p r e -a s s o c ia te d
1 2 3 4 5 6 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
S O F T W A R E ZO N E
V A R IE D
s o ftwa re zo n e .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
IN P U T S N O T P R E -A S S O C IA T E D
" D O U B L E Z O N E S W IT H T A M P E R S IG N A L " C O N N E C T IO N (W IT H R 2 1 0 k )
B A S I C p h y s ic a l in p u ts [C O N
D O U B L E I n p u ts E X T E N S I O N p h y s ic a l in p u ts [C O N C L A M P :x x D]
B A .C :x x D ]
C la m p 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
a s s o c ia te d
SOFTWA RE ZONE .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

XTREAM 64B - XTREAM 64

KEYPAD 01- 08 XTREAM 32B - XTREAM 32
XTREAM 6B - XTREAM 6
KEYPAD 01 - 08 [TAS 01..08]
KEYPAD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ASSOCIATED
SOFTWARE ZONE 7 8 9 10 .... .... .... ....

- 13 -
 SATELLITE 01 SERIAL 01
SINGLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01 .BA:xx S] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx S]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SAT Type B DETECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
pre-associated
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
SOFTWARE ZONE
VARIED
software zone .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
INPUTS NOT PRE-ASSOCIATED
"DOUBLE ZONES WITH TAMPER SIGNAL" CONNECTION (WITH R2 10k)
DOUBLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01BA.C.:xx D] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx D]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NO Sat 03 / 04
SAT Type B DETECTOR 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
associated
SOFTWARE ZONE .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

SATELLITE 02 SERIAL 01 NO XTREAM 6 E XTREAM 6B

SINGLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01 .BA:xx S] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx S]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SAT Type B DETECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
pre-associated
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
SOFTWARE ZONE
VARIED
software zone .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
INPUTS NOT PRE-ASSOCIATED
"DOUBLE ZONES WITH TAMPER SIGNAL" CONNECTION (WITH R2 10k)
DOUBLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01BA.C.:xx D] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx D]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NO Sat 03 / 04
SAT Type B DETECTOR 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
associated
SOFTWARE ZONE .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

SATELLITE 03 SERIAL 01 NO XTREAM 6 E XTREAM 6B

SINGLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01 .BA:xx S] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx S]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SAT Type B DETECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
pre-associated
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66
SOFTWARE ZONE
VARIED
software zone .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
INPUTS NOT PRE-ASSOCIATED
"DOUBLE ZONES WITH TAMPER SIGNAL" CONNECTION (WITH R2 10k)
DOUBLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01BA.C.:xx D] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx D]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NO Sat 03 / 04
SAT Type B DETECTOR 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
associated
SOFTWARE ZONE .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

SATELLITE 04 SERIAL 01 NO XTREAM 6 E XTREAM 6B

SINGLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01 .BA:xx S] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx S]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SAT Type B DETECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
pre-associated
67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82
SOFTWARE ZONE
VARIED
software zone .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
INPUTS NOT PRE-ASSOCIATED
"DOUBLE ZONES WITH TAMPER SIGNAL" CONNECTION (WITH R2 10k)
DOUBLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01BA.C.:xx D] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx D]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NO Sat 03 / 04
SAT Type B DETECTOR 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
associated
SOFTWARE ZONE .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

- 14 -
 SATELLITE 05 SERIAL 01 NO XTREAM 6 E XTREAM 6B
SINGLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01 .BA:xx S] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx S]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SAT Type B DETECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
pre-associated
83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98
SOFTWARE ZONE
VARIED
software zone .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
INPUTS NOT PRE-ASSOCIATED
"DOUBLE ZONES WITH TAMPER SIGNAL" CONNECTION (WITH R2 10k)
DOUBLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01BA.C.:xx D] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx D]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NO Sat 03 / 04
SAT Type B DETECTOR 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
associated
SOFTWARE ZONE .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

SATELLITE 06 SERIAL 01 NO XTREAM 6 E XTREAM 6B

SINGLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01 .BA:xx S] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx S]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SAT Type B DETECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
pre-associated
99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114
SOFTWARE ZONE
VARIED
software zone .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
INPUTS NOT PRE-ASSOCIATED
"DOUBLE ZONES WITH TAMPER SIGNAL" CONNECTION (WITH R2 10k)
DOUBLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01BA.C.:xx D] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx D]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NO Sat 03 / 04
SAT Type B DETECTOR 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
associated
SOFTWARE ZONE .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

SATELLITE 07 SERIAL 01 NO XTREAM 6 E XTREAM 6B

SINGLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01 .BA:xx S] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx S]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SAT Type B DETECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
pre-associated
115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130
SOFTWARE ZONE
VARIED
software zone .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
INPUTS NOT PRE-ASSOCIATED
"DOUBLE ZONES WITH TAMPER SIGNAL" CONNECTION (WITH R2 10k)
DOUBLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01BA.C.:xx D] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx D]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NO Sat 03 / 04
SAT Type B DETECTOR 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
associated
SOFTWARE ZONE .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

SATELLITE 08 SERIAL 01 NO XTREAM 6 E XTREAM 6B

SINGLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01 .BA:xx S] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx S]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SAT Type B DETECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
pre-associated
131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146
SOFTWARE ZONE
VARIED
software zone .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
INPUTS NOT PRE-ASSOCIATED
"DOUBLE ZONES WITH TAMPER SIGNAL" CONNECTION (WITH R2 10k)
DOUBLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01BA.C.:xx D] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx D]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NO Sat 03 / 04
SAT Type B DETECTOR 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
associated
SOFTWARE ZONE .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

- 15 -
 SATELLITE 09 SERIAL 01 ONLY XTREAM 640
SINGLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01 .BA:xx S] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx S]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SAT Type B DETECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
pre-associated
147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162
SOFTWARE ZONE
VARIED
software zone .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
INPUTS NOT PRE-ASSOCIATED
"DOUBLE ZONES WITH TAMPER SIGNAL" CONNECTION (WITH R2 10k)
DOUBLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01BA.C.:xx D] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx D]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NO Sat 03 / 04
SAT Type B DETECTOR 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
associated
SOFTWARE ZONE .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

SATELLITE 10 SERIAL 01 ONLY XTREAM 640

SINGLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01 .BA:xx S] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx S]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SAT Type B DETECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
pre-associated
163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178
SOFTWARE ZONE
VARIED
software zone .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
INPUTS NOT PRE-ASSOCIATED
"DOUBLE ZONES WITH TAMPER SIGNAL" CONNECTION (WITH R2 10k)
DOUBLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01BA.C.:xx D] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx D]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NO Sat 03 / 04
SAT Type B DETECTOR 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
associated
SOFTWARE ZONE .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

SATELLITE 11 SERIAL 01 NO XTREAM 6 E XTREAM 6B

SINGLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01 .BA:xx S] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx S]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SAT Type B DETECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
pre-associated
179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194
SOFTWARE ZONE
VARIED
software zone .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
INPUTS NOT PRE-ASSOCIATED
"DOUBLE ZONES WITH TAMPER SIGNAL" CONNECTION (WITH R2 10k)
DOUBLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01BA.C.:xx D] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx D]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NO Sat 03 / 04
SAT Type B DETECTOR 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
associated
SOFTWARE ZONE .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

SATELLITE 12 SERIAL 01 NO XTREAM 6 E XTREAM 6B

SINGLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01 .BA:xx S] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx S]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SAT Type B DETECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
pre-associated
195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210
SOFTWARE ZONE
VARIED
software zone .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
INPUTS NOT PRE-ASSOCIATED
"DOUBLE ZONES WITH TAMPER SIGNAL" CONNECTION (WITH R2 10k)
DOUBLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01BA.C.:xx D] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx D]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NO Sat 03 / 04
SAT Type B DETECTOR 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
associated
SOFTWARE ZONE .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

- 16 -
 SATELLITE 13 SERIAL 01 NO XTREAM 6 E XTREAM 6B
SINGLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01 .BA:xx S] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx S]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SAT Type B DETECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
pre-associated
211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226
SOFTWARE ZONE
VARIED
software zone .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
INPUTS NOT PRE-ASSOCIATED
"DOUBLE ZONES WITH TAMPER SIGNAL" CONNECTION (WITH R2 10k)
DOUBLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01BA.C.:xx D] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx D]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NO Sat 03 / 04
SAT Type B DETECTOR 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
associated
SOFTWARE ZONE .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

SATELLITE 14 SERIAL 01 NO XTREAM 6 E XTREAM 6B

SINGLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01 .BA:xx S] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx S]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SAT Type B DETECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
pre-associated
227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242
SOFTWARE ZONE
VARIED
software zone .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
INPUTS NOT PRE-ASSOCIATED
"DOUBLE ZONES WITH TAMPER SIGNAL" CONNECTION (WITH R2 10k)
DOUBLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01BA.C.:xx D] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx D]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NO Sat 03 / 04
SAT Type B DETECTOR 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
associated
SOFTWARE ZONE .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

SATELLITE 15 SERIAL 01 NO XTREAM 6 E XTREAM 6B

SINGLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01 .BA:xx S] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx S]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SAT Type B DETECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
pre-associated
243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258
SOFTWARE ZONE
VARIED
software zone .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
INPUTS NOT PRE-ASSOCIATED
"DOUBLE ZONES WITH TAMPER SIGNAL" CONNECTION (WITH R2 10k)
DOUBLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01BA.C.:xx D] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx D]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NO Sat 03 / 04
SAT Type B DETECTOR 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
associated
SOFTWARE ZONE .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

SATELLITE 16 SERIAL 01 NO XTREAM 6 E XTREAM 6B

SINGLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01 .BA:xx S] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx S]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SAT Type B DETECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
pre-associated
259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274
SOFTWARE ZONE
VARIED
software zone .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
INPUTS NOT PRE-ASSOCIATED
"DOUBLE ZONES WITH TAMPER SIGNAL" CONNECTION (WITH R2 10k)
DOUBLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01BA.C.:xx D] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx D]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NO Sat 03 / 04
SAT Type B DETECTOR 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
associated
SOFTWARE ZONE .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

- 17 -
 SATELLITE 17 SERIAL 02 ONLY XTREAM 640
SINGLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01 .BA:xx S] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx S]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SAT Type B DETECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
pre-associated
275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290
SOFTWARE ZONE
VARIED
software zone .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
INPUTS NOT PRE-ASSOCIATED
"DOUBLE ZONES WITH TAMPER SIGNAL" CONNECTION (WITH R2 10k)
DOUBLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01BA.C.:xx D] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx D]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NO Sat 03 / 04
SAT Type B DETECTOR 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
associated
SOFTWARE ZONE .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

SATELLITE 18 SERIAL 02 ONLY XTREAM 640

SINGLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01 .BA:xx S] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx S]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SAT Type B DETECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
pre-associated
291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306
SOFTWARE ZONE
VARIED
software zone .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
INPUTS NOT PRE-ASSOCIATED
"DOUBLE ZONES WITH TAMPER SIGNAL" CONNECTION (WITH R2 10k)
DOUBLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01BA.C.:xx D] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx D]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NO Sat 03 / 04
SAT Type B DETECTOR 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
associated
SOFTWARE ZONE .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

SATELLITE 19 SERIAL 02 ONLY XTREAM 640

SINGLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01 .BA:xx S] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx S]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SAT Type B DETECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
pre-associated
307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322
SOFTWARE ZONE
VARIED
software zone .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
INPUTS NOT PRE-ASSOCIATED
"DOUBLE ZONES WITH TAMPER SIGNAL" CONNECTION (WITH R2 10k)
DOUBLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01BA.C.:xx D] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx D]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NO Sat 03 / 04
SAT Type B DETECTOR 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
associated
SOFTWARE ZONE .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

SATELLITE 20 SERIAL 02 ONLY XTREAM 640

SINGLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01 .BA:xx S] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx S]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SAT Type B DETECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
pre-associated
323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338
SOFTWARE ZONE
VARIED
software zone .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
INPUTS NOT PRE-ASSOCIATED
"DOUBLE ZONES WITH TAMPER SIGNAL" CONNECTION (WITH R2 10k)
DOUBLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01BA.C.:xx D] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx D]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NO Sat 03 / 04
SAT Type B DETECTOR 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
associated
SOFTWARE ZONE .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

- 18 -
 SATELLITE 21 SERIAL 02 ONLY XTREAM 640
SINGLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01 .BA:xx S] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx S]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SAT Type B DETECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
pre-associated
339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354
SOFTWARE ZONE
VARIED
software zone .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
INPUTS NOT PRE-ASSOCIATED
"DOUBLE ZONES WITH TAMPER SIGNAL" CONNECTION (WITH R2 10k)
DOUBLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01BA.C.:xx D] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx D]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NO Sat 03 / 04
SAT Type B DETECTOR 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
associated
SOFTWARE ZONE .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

SATELLITE 22 SERIAL 02 ONLY XTREAM 640

SINGLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01 .BA:xx S] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx S]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SAT Type B DETECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
pre-associated
355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370
SOFTWARE ZONE
VARIED
software zone .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
INPUTS NOT PRE-ASSOCIATED
"DOUBLE ZONES WITH TAMPER SIGNAL" CONNECTION (WITH R2 10k)
DOUBLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01BA.C.:xx D] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx D]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NO Sat 03 / 04
SAT Type B DETECTOR 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
associated
SOFTWARE ZONE .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

SATELLITE 23 SERIAL 02 ONLY XTREAM 640

SINGLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01 .BA:xx S] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx S]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SAT Type B DETECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
pre-associated
371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386
SOFTWARE ZONE
VARIED
software zone .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
INPUTS NOT PRE-ASSOCIATED
"DOUBLE ZONES WITH TAMPER SIGNAL" CONNECTION (WITH R2 10k)
DOUBLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01BA.C.:xx D] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx D]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NO Sat 03 / 04
SAT Type B DETECTOR 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
associated
SOFTWARE ZONE .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

SATELLITE 24 SERIAL 02 ONLY XTREAM 640

SINGLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01 .BA:xx S] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx S]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SAT Type B DETECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
pre-associated
387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402
SOFTWARE ZONE
VARIED
software zone .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
INPUTS NOT PRE-ASSOCIATED
"DOUBLE ZONES WITH TAMPER SIGNAL" CONNECTION (WITH R2 10k)
DOUBLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01BA.C.:xx D] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx D]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NO Sat 03 / 04
SAT Type B DETECTOR 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
associated
SOFTWARE ZONE .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

- 19 -
 SATELLITE 25 SERIAL 02 ONLY XTREAM 640
SINGLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01 .BA:xx S] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx S]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SAT Type B DETECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
pre-associated
403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418
SOFTWARE ZONE
VARIED
software zone .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
INPUTS NOT PRE-ASSOCIATED
"DOUBLE ZONES WITH TAMPER SIGNAL" CONNECTION (WITH R2 10k)
DOUBLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01BA.C.:xx D] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx D]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NO Sat 03 / 04
SAT Type B DETECTOR 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
associated
SOFTWARE ZONE .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

SATELLITE 26 SERIAL 02 ONLY XTREAM 640

SINGLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01 .BA:xx S] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx S]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SAT Type B DETECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
pre-associated
419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434
SOFTWARE ZONE
VARIED
software zone .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
INPUTS NOT PRE-ASSOCIATED
"DOUBLE ZONES WITH TAMPER SIGNAL" CONNECTION (WITH R2 10k)
DOUBLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01BA.C.:xx D] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx D]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NO Sat 03 / 04
SAT Type B DETECTOR 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
associated
SOFTWARE ZONE .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

SATELLITE 27 SERIAL 02 ONLY XTREAM 640

SINGLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01 .BA:xx S] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx S]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SAT Type B DETECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
pre-associated
435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450
SOFTWARE ZONE
VARIED
software zone .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
INPUTS NOT PRE-ASSOCIATED
"DOUBLE ZONES WITH TAMPER SIGNAL" CONNECTION (WITH R2 10k)
DOUBLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01BA.C.:xx D] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx D]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NO Sat 03 / 04
SAT Type B DETECTOR 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
associated
SOFTWARE ZONE .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

SATELLITE 28 SERIAL 02 ONLY XTREAM 640

SINGLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01 .BA:xx S] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx S]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SAT Type B DETECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
pre-associated
451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466
SOFTWARE ZONE
VARIED
software zone .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
INPUTS NOT PRE-ASSOCIATED
"DOUBLE ZONES WITH TAMPER SIGNAL" CONNECTION (WITH R2 10k)
DOUBLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01BA.C.:xx D] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx D]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NO Sat 03 / 04
SAT Type B DETECTOR 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
associated
SOFTWARE ZONE .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

- 20 -
 SATELLITE 29 SERIAL 02 ONLY XTREAM 640
SINGLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01 .BA:xx S] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx S]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SAT Type B DETECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
pre-associated
467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482
SOFTWARE ZONE
VARIED
software zone .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
INPUTS NOT PRE-ASSOCIATED
"DOUBLE ZONES WITH TAMPER SIGNAL" CONNECTION (WITH R2 10k)
DOUBLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01BA.C.:xx D] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx D]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NO Sat 03 / 04
SAT Type B DETECTOR 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
associated
SOFTWARE ZONE .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

SATELLITE 30 SERIAL 02 ONLY XTREAM 640

SINGLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01 .BA:xx S] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx S]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SAT Type B DETECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
pre-associated
483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498
SOFTWARE ZONE
VARIED
software zone .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
INPUTS NOT PRE-ASSOCIATED
"DOUBLE ZONES WITH TAMPER SIGNAL" CONNECTION (WITH R2 10k)
DOUBLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01BA.C.:xx D] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx D]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NO Sat 03 / 04
SAT Type B DETECTOR 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
associated
SOFTWARE ZONE .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

SATELLITE 31 SERIAL 02 ONLY XTREAM 640

SINGLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01 .BA:xx S] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx S]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SAT Type B DETECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
pre-associated
499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514
SOFTWARE ZONE
VARIED
software zone .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
INPUTS NOT PRE-ASSOCIATED
"DOUBLE ZONES WITH TAMPER SIGNAL" CONNECTION (WITH R2 10k)
DOUBLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01BA.C.:xx D] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx D]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NO Sat 03 / 04
SAT Type B DETECTOR 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
associated
SOFTWARE ZONE .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

SATELLITE 32 SERIAL 02 ONLY XTREAM 640

SINGLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01 .BA:xx S] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx S]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SAT Type B DETECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
pre-associated
515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530
SOFTWARE ZONE
VARIED
software zone .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
INPUTS NOT PRE-ASSOCIATED
"DOUBLE ZONES WITH TAMPER SIGNAL" CONNECTION (WITH R2 10k)
DOUBLE Inputs BASIC Inputs [SAT: 01BA.C.:xx D] EXTENSION Inputs [SAT: 01 EX.C:xx D]
SAT Type A CLAMP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NO Sat 03 / 04
SAT Type B DETECTOR 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
associated
SOFTWARE ZONE .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

- 21 -
 KEYPAD 01-16 SERIAL 01
ALL CONTROL PANEL ONLY XTREAM 640
KEYPAD NUMBER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
KEYPAD ADDRESS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
pre-associate
SOFTWARE ZONE .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

KEYPAD 17 - 32 SERIAL 02 03
ONLY XTREAM 640
KEYPAD NUMBER 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
KEYPAD ADDRESS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
pre-associated
SOFTWARE ZONE .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

OPEN COLLECTOR OUTPUTS - EXTENSIONS LINK

The Open Collector outputs have a direct link with the electronic board on which they are installed.
Extensions on serial 1
NO XTREAM 6 AND XTREAM 6B ONLY XTREAM 640
CONTROL EXT EXT EXT EXT EXT EXT EXT EXT EXT EXT EXT EXT EXT EXT EXT EXT
OUTPUTS PANEL 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
S
1 1 9 17 25 33 41 49 57 65 73 81 89 97 105 113 121 129
E
2 2 10 18 26 34 42 50 58 66 74 82 90 98 106 114 122 130
R
3 3
I 11 19 27 35 43 51 59 67 75 83 91 99 107 115 123 131
4 4 A 12 20 28 36 44 52 60 68 76 84 92 100 108 116 124 132
5 5 L 13 21 29 37 45 53 61 69 77 85 93 101 109 117 125 133
6 6 14 22 30 38 46 54 62 70 78 86 94 102 110 118 126 134
7 7 1 15 23 31 39 47 55 63 71 79 87 95 103 111 119 127 135
8 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 104 112 120 128 136

Extensions on serial 2

ONLY XTREAM 640

CONTROL EXT EXT EXT EXT EXT EXT EXT EXT EXT EXT EXT EXT EXT EXT EXT
OUTPUTS PANEL 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
S
1 1 137 145 153 161 169 177 185 193 201 209 217 225 233 241 249
E
2 2 138 146 154 162 170 178 186 194 202 210 218 226 234 242 250
R
3 3
I 139 147 155 163 171 179 187 195 203 211 219 227 235 243
4 4 A 140 148 156 164 172 180 188 196 204 212 220 228 236 244
5 5 L 141 149 157 165 173 181 189 197 205 213 221 229 237 245
6 6 142 150 158 166 174 182 190 198 206 214 222 230 238 246
7 7 2 143 151 159 167 175 183 191 199 207 215 223 231 239 247
8 8 144 152 160 168 176 184 192 200 208 216 224 232 240 248

- 22 -
Type of connections
Balanced zones
The XTREAM control panel has a basic configuration of ten balanced inputs, with a terminal resistance
of 4.700 ohm.
The opening or a short circuit of a zone causes an alarm signal. The equipment must be protected by
using the TAMPER dedicated line or a different input zone of the control panel, programmed in TAMPER
modality.

Balancing resistance
The colours of R1 terminal resistance are:
R1 4.700 ohm
1) Yellow Value: 4
2) Purple Value: 7
3) Red Number of zeros 2
4) Gold Tolerance: 5%
Tamper Line

The Tamper dedicated line must be balanced with a single terminating resistance.

Balanced zones with inertial contacts

The XTREAM control panel enables the connection of inertial contacts or SW

with a 4.700 ohm terminal resistance.
To use this function the specific step must be enabled within the programming
of the single zone and the sensitivity using the "Number of Impulses" step must
be adjusted.
The equipment must be protected by using the TAMPER dedicated line or a
different input zone of the control panel, programmed in TAMPER modality.
Detectors input
Note: it is not possible to use the "double zones" function with this type
Balancing resistance of connection.
The colours of R1 terminal resistance are: Moreover, this type of connection cannot be used with the A300, A600
R1 4.700 ohm and A600 Plus keyboards and with the SAT03, SAT04, XSAT MINI and
1) Yellow Value: 4 XSAT HP expansions.
2) Purple Value: 7
3) Red Number of zeros 2
4) Gold Tolerance: 5%
Balanced zones with tamper signal

This configuration enables the control panel to recognise both the alarm state and the tamper state,
using the same zone circuit.
The programmed zones of this modality must be terminated with two 4.700 ohm terminal resistances.
The first resistance identifies the zone alarm whereas the second the tamper alarm.
With reference to the illustration at the side, by opening the contact, the control panel detects the main
alarm state of the detector, whereas the short circuit or the cut of the same zone, causes a tamper
alarm, even with the system disarmed.
The modality Zone with Tamper Signal can be selected zone by zone.

The Tamper dedicated line is always balanced with a single terminating resistance.

THE UNENGAGED ZONES MUST BE BALANCED

Example:
Shown as example is the connection of two general detectors to two input zones,
with double balancing.
The opening of the contact n.c. ALARM causes a state of alarm.
The opening of the contact n.c. TAMPER or a short circuit, causes the tamper
alarm of the corresponding input zone.

Balancing resistance
The colours of R1 terminal resistance are:
R1 4.700 ohm
1) Yellow Value: 4
2) Purple Value: 7
DETECTOR 1 DETECTOR 2
3) Red Number of zeros 2
4) Gold Tolerance: 5%

- 23 -
 Double zones with tamper signal

The XTREAM control panel allows doubling the number of supervised

zones, passing from 10 to 20 inputs on the basic electronic board, without
the addition of outdoor modules.
This option is also present for all electronic boards that can manage this
type of connection. Refer to the specific instructions of the individual
electronic board to verify its feasibility.

With this functioning modality, every individual line present on the terminal
board of the control panel and of the electronic boards allowing it, splits,
enabling the detection of two separate zones.
All zones are fully independent between them, as if they were separate.
Single BAsic Clamp 1 Double BAsic Clamp 1

• The configuration Double zones with tamper signal always requires a balancing with three terminating resistances, as shown in the
illustration.

Balancing resistances
The colours of the R1 4.700 ohm (4K7) and R2 10.000 ohm (10K) terminal resistances are:

R1 4.700 ohm R2 10.000 ohm

1) Yellow Value: 4 1) Brown Value: 1
2) Purple Value: 7 2) Black Value: 0
3) Red Number of zeros 2 3) Orange Number of zeros 3
4) Gold Tolerance: 5% 4) Gold Tolerance: 5%

In the 1st detector, if contact (C-NC) is opened in parallel with resistance R1, the "Alarm Zone xx" signal is obtained.
In the 2nd detector, if contact (C-NC) is opened in parallel with resistance R2, the "Alarm Zone xx" signal is obtained.
If both are opened, both alarm signals will be obtained.
Where xx = software zone associated during programming

The Tamper Signal can be independently enabled, for any of the zones.

Example

If the zone is short circuited or opened, the TAMPER alarm signal for both
zones associated to the input will be obtained, as long as the Tamper Signal
has been enabled for both, otherwise the TAMPER alarm will only be
obtained for the zone enabled for Tamper Signal .

The use of the Double zones with tamper signal increases the detection
sensitivity of each individual input.

1st detector 2nd detector

- 24 -
Control panel electronic board XTREAM 640

OC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TA FA
J3
S1 S2
USB

J5
S3

F5A F3.15A

RESET J6
BATT. POWER
ALIM.
SUPPLY

S4
BATT.

J7
F1

F2

F3.15A F2A
F3.15A F3.15A F3.15A

J8
S6
S5

S7
F3

F4

F5

F6

F7
DA DB DA DB +SA +S C NC NO OUT IN
RS485 2 RS485 1 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 T VLINES
VLINEE VLINES
VLINEE VPOW
VPOT ALARM SPK MIC A B A" B"

RS485 - 1: Serial connection that corresponds to serial "B1" during programming of the control panel.
It is possible to connect a maximum number of:
- 16 keypads addressed from 1 to 16
- 16 serial extensions addressed from 1 to 16
- 16 serial readers addressed from 1 to 16 it is possible to connect a maximum of 32
peripherals in each of the three serials
RS485 - 2 - RS485 - 3:
Serial connection that corresponds to serial "B2/3" during programming of the control panel. These serials are
electrically insulated between them, but there is no difference between them with regard to software.
It is possible to connect a maximum number of:
- 16 keypad addressed from 1 to 16 and freely distributed between the two.
- 16 serial extensions addressed from 1 to 16 and freely distributed between the two.
- 16 serial readers addressed from 1 to 16 and freely distributed between the two.
NOTE: do not direct two or more keypads with the same address even if connected on separate serials.
do not direct two or more extensions with the same address even if connected on separate serials.
do not direct two or more readers with the same address even if connected on separate serials.

ALARM OUTPUTS
The control panel controls an output relay with two exchanges, of which one is completely free from voltages.
The outputs marked with ALARM are controlled by an output relay, with a capacity of 2A at 12Volt; this is normally active
when the control panel is in quiet state. Connect only circuits working with SELV voltage to these outputs.

O.C. ACTIVE OUTPUTS

The control panel has Module MR8 Module MR4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
eight transistorised AT J2 MR8 MA00320V1/0
TERMINAL
active outputs, just like J1
OF THE ACTIVE OUTPUTS

ACTIVE OUTPUTS

BOARD OF
AT TERMINAL BOARD

SAT03; they supply a THE ACTIVE

transistorised OUTPUTS
negative, for
connection with
RELAY 4 RELAY 3 RELAY 2 RELAY 1
optional module (mod. 1 S1 2 1 S2 2 1 S3 2 1 S4 2 1 S5 2 1 S6 2 1 S7 2 1 S8 2
POWER
MR4), when the SUPPLY
associated event INPUT POWER SUPPLY
X1 C1 X2 C2 X3 C3 X4 C4 X5 C5 X6 C6 X7 C7 X8 C8
verifies. INPUT

- 25 -
Terminal board XTREAM 640
CLAMPS ON LEFT SIDE OF ELECTRONIC BOARD
SUPPLY
Power supply input 14.5V from supply unit
+/-
BATT
Output for battery connection
+/-
CLAMPS ON LOWER SIDE OF ELECTRONIC BOARD
+ DA DB - serial number 3 (B2/3) for connection with keypads and serial satellites; the peripherals connected on this
RS485 - 3 serial will have software numbering from 17 to 32.
+ DA DB - serial number 2 (B2/3) for connection with keypads and serial satellites; the peripherals connected on this
RS485 - 2 serial will have software numbering from 17 to 32.
+ DA DB - serial number 1 (B1) for connection with keypads and serial satellites; the peripherals connected on this
RS485 - 1 serial will have software numbering from 1 to 16.
L1 <---> L5 input lines
- input lines negative reference
L6 <---> L10 linput lines
T tamper proof input, normally balanced with 4.700ohm resistance
+/-
output for lines protected by 3.15A L 250V - F6 fuse. Supplies power to the sensor unit
VLINES
+/-
output for lines protected by 3.15A L 250V - F6 fuse. Supplies power to the sensor unit
VLINES
+/- power output protected by 2.0A L 250V - F7 fuse. Supplies power for the battery charge of the self-supplied
VPOW siren.
output protected by 2.0A L 250V - F7 fuse. It is the alarm command for the self-supplied siren and
+ S.A.
constantly supplies an output that goes missing when the control panel is in alarm state.
output protected by 2.0A L 250V - F7 fuse. It is the alarm command for the non self-supplied at 12Volt.
+S
internal siren and supplies an output when the control panel is in alarm state.
auxiliary output with exchange free from voltages (output) (C) common exchange (NC) normally closed
[C] [NC] [NO]
exchange (NO) normally open exchange
OUT
speakers output for the connection of the audio part of A600Plus keypad
SPK
- negative reference
IN
microphone input
MIC
AB Main telephone line input
A' B' Telephone line output for connection of the derived internal telephone service
CLAMPS ON UPPER SIDE OF ELECTRONIC BOARD
OC
50mA transistorised outputs supplying a negative following the set programming
1 < ---> 8
(Tamper) it is an output(100mA) and, therefore, constantly supplies a transistorised negative that goes
TA missing when an alarm of the input dedicated to the tamper proof of the control panel verifies or when a
tamper proof alarm of the lines programmed to signal the tamper verifies.
FA (Fail) Supplies a transistorized negative (50mA) which only fails when the microprocessor is blocked
+/- output protected by 3.15A L 250V - F2 fuse. Supplies power to the Open Collector outputs
OTHER ELEMENTS
RESET Resets all alarms and calls in progress, maintaining the arming state unvaried.
J7
Output for direct connection (not used - for future uses)
PLUG - RS485
J3
Output for direct connection with PC through USB
PLUG - USB
J5 Connector for outdoor accessories (optional)
J6 Connector for outdoor accessories (optional)
J8 Connector for inputs extension electronic board XEXP8 (optional)
S3 Bridge for the activation of the system only with battery without network
S4 Bridge for reset procedure
FUSES
F1 - F5A 250V Battery power supply output protection
F2 - F3.15A 250V Open Collector outputs power supply output protection
F3 - F3.15A 250V Number 3 (RS485) serial power supply output protection
F4 - F3.15A 250V Number 2 (RS485) serial power supply output protection
F5 - F3.15A 250V Number 1 (RS485) serial power supply output protection
F6 - F3.15A 250V Detectors (VLINES) power supply output protection
F7 - F2A 250V Siren (VPOW) power supply output protection

- 26 -
Control panel board XTREAM 64B - XTREAM 64 - XTREAM 32B - XTREAM32 - XTREAM 6B - XTREAM 6

OC USB
1
J3 J1 J2

J4

RESET

J5

S1

F3.15A F2 F3
T 0.63A F 2A

J6
S2
F1

F6

RS485 - 1: Serial connection that corresponds to serial "B1" during programming of the control panel. F7
It is possible to connect a maximum number of:
- 8 keypads addressed from 1 to 8
- 8 serial extensions addressed from 1 to 8
- 16 serial readers addressed from 1 to 16

ALARM OUTPUTS
The control panel controls an output relay with two exchanges, of which one is completely free from voltages.
The outputs marked with ALARM are controlled by an output relay, with a capacity of 2A at 12Volt; this is normally active
when the control panel is in quiet state. Connect only circuits working with SELV voltage to these outputs.

O.C. ACTIVE OUTPUTS

The control panel has Module MR8 Module MR4

AT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
eight transistorised TERMINAL
J2 MR8 MA00320V1/0
active outputs, just like BOARD OF J1
OF THE ACTIVE OUTPUTS

ACTIVE OUTPUTS
AT TERMINAL BOARD

SAT03; they supply a THE ACTIVE

OUTPUTS
transistorised
negative, for
connection with RELAY 4 RELAY 3 RELAY 2 RELAY 1
optional module (mod. POWER
1 S1 2 1 S2 2 1 S3 2 1 S4 2 1 S5 2 1 S6 2 1 S7 2 1 S8 2

MR4), when the SUPPLY

associated event INPUT POWER SUPPLY
X1 C1 X2 C2 X3 C3 X4 C4 X5 C5 X6 C6 X7 C7 X8 C8
verifies. INPUT

Fixing the electronic board - XTREAM 64B - XTREAM 64 - XTREAM 32B - XTREAM32 - XTREAM 6B - XTREAM 6

The electronic board is fixed on the box, thanks the plastic holder nuts and
the included screws.
- With a slight pressure, place the holder nut in the indicated position in the drawing
as “electronic board fixing point”
- Place the electronic board on the holder nuts in front of the holes.
- Tighten the screws, but be careful not to touch the electronic components on
the board.

- 27 -
Terminal board XTREAM 64B - XTREAM 64 - XTREAM 32B - XTREAM32 - XTREAM 6B - XTREAM 6

CLAMPS ON UPPER SIDE OF ELECTRONIC BOARD

J1 Connector for outdoor accessories (optional) - vocal board - Mod. XSINT
CLAMPS ON LOWER SIDE OF ELECTRONIC BOARD
BATT
Output for battery connection
+/-
SUPPLY
Power supply input 14.5V from supply unit
+/-
+ DA DB - serial number 1 (B1) for connection with keypads and serial satellites; the peripherals connected on this
RS485 - 1 serial will have software numbering from 1 to 16.
L1 <---> L3 input lines
+/-
output for lines protected by T0.63A L 250V - F2 fuse. Supplies power to the sensor unit
VLINES
L4 <---> L6 linput lines
T tamper proof input, normally balanced with 4.700ohm resistance
(Tamper) it is an output(100mA) and, therefore, constantly supplies a transistorised negative that goes
TA missing when an alarm of the input dedicated to the tamper proof of the control panel verifies or when a
tamper proof alarm of the lines programmed to signal the tamper verifies.
(Fail) Supplies a transistorised negative (50mA) that goes missing when a fault with locking of the
FA
microprocessor verifies
+/-
output for lines protected by T0.63A L 250V - F2 fuse. Supplies power to the sensor unit
VLINES
+/- power output protected by 2.0A L 250V - F3 fuse. Supplies power for the battery charge of the self-supplied
VPOW siren.
output protected by 2.0A L 250V - F3 fuse. It is the alarm command for the self-supplied siren and
+ S.A.
constantly supplies an output that goes missing when the control panel is in alarm state.
output protected by 2.0A L 250V - F3 fuse. It is the alarm command for the non self-supplied at 12Volt.
+S
internal siren and supplies an output when the control panel is in alarm state.
auxiliary output with exchange free from voltages (output) (C) common exchange (NC) normally closed
[C] [NC] [NO]
exchange (NO) normally open exchange
AB Main telephone line input
A' B' Telephone line output for connection of the derived internal telephone service
CLAMPS ON LEFT SIDE OF ELECTRONIC BOARD
OC J3
50mA transistorised outputs supplying a negative following the set programming
1 < ---> 8
OTHER ELEMENTS
RESET Resets all alarms and calls in progress, maintaining the arming state unvaried.
J2
Output for direct connection with PC through USB
PLUG - USB
J4 Connector for outdoor accessories (optional)
J5 Connector for outdoor accessories (optional)
J6 Connector for inputs extension electronic board XEXP8 (optional)
S1 Bridge for reset procedure
S2 Bridge NOT USED
FUSES
F1 - F1,5A 250V Battery power supply output protection
F2 - F3,15A 250V (RS485) serial power supply output protection and detector output (VLINES)
F3 - F2A 250V Siren (VPOW) power supply output protection

- 28 -
Supply unit section XTREAM 640
The supply unit is 50W switching with an output voltage of 14.5V = and a maximum current of 3.4A.
The control panel is able to intelligently distribute the current between the different utilities, dynamically managing both the
charging of the internal battery and of the siren battery.
Table
N e tw o rk p o w e r s up p ly 1 0 0 -2 4 0 V ~ (+ /-1 0 % ) 5 0 /6 0 H z
V o lta g e p o w e r s up p ly no m ina l vo lta g e 1 3 ,8 V =
1 .3 A /11 5 V ~
M a x. c urre nt a b s o rb e d b y the ne tw o rk
0 .8 A /2 3 0 V ~
M a xim um c urre nt a va ila b le s up p ly unit 3 .4 A
O U TP U TS :
M a xim um c urre nt a va ila b le - E xc lud e d c o ns um p tio n o f c o ntro l
(R S 4 8 5 - 1 ) - (R S 4 8 5 - 2 ) - (R S 4 8 5 - 1 .9 5 A
p a ne l e le c tro nic b o a rd (2 5 0 m A )
3 ) (V L IN E S ) - (V O C )
M a xim um c urre nt a va ila b le V P O W o utp ut 850mA
B ATTE R Y C HA R G E R o utp ut
M a xim um c urre nt a va ila b le 600mA
(d im e ns io ne d up to 1 7 A h b a tte rie s
e m p ty 1 3 ,8 V =
O utp ut vo lta g e a t 11 0 -2 3 0 V ~ -1 0 %
w ith m a xim um c ha rg e 1 3 ,6 V =
e m p ty 1 3 ,8 V =
O utp ut vo lta g e a t 11 0 -2 3 0 V ~ + 1 0 %
w ith m a xim um c ha rg e 1 3 ,6 V =
w ith d is a rm e d d is p la y 40 mA
K e yp a d a b s o rp tio n w ith d is p la y A 3 0 0 - A 3 0 0 P lus
w ith a rm e d d is p la y 70 mA
w ith d is a rm e d d is p la y 7 0 m A - P lus 7 0 m A
K e yp a d a b s o rp tio n w ith d is p la y A 5 0 0 - A 6 5 0 P lus w ith a rm e d d is p la y 9 0 m A - P lus 9 0 m A
M a xim um 1 0 0 m A - P lus 2 2 0 m A
w ith d is a rm e d d is p la y 6 5 m A - P lus 6 5 m A
K e yp a d a b s o rp tio n w ith d is p la y A 6 0 0 - A 6 0 0 P lus w ith a rm e d d is p la y 1 7 0 m A - P lus 1 7 0 m A
M a xim um 1 9 5 m A - P lus 2 5 0 m A
w ith d is a rm e d d is p la y 4 7 m A - P lus 8 5 m A
K e yp a d a b s o rp tio n w ith d is p la y A 6 0 0 E V O - A 6 0 0 P E V O P lus w ith a rm e d d is p la y 9 5 m A - P lus 1 3 5 m A
M a xim um 1 2 0 m A - P lus 2 5 0 m A
w ith d is a rm e d d is p la y 90 mA
K e yp a d a b s o rp tio n w ith d is p la y IC E w ith a rm e d d is p la y 150 mA
M a xim um 270 mA
S e ria l re a d e r (R S ) a b s o rp tio n m a xim um 30 mA

Outdoor connections
Insert a16 A Curve C omnipolar mains switch, with a minimum distance of at least 3 mm between the contacts
in the electrical installation of the building
Place an eyelet terminal on earth wire and fix it to the threaded turret marked with the earth reference.
The control panel electronic board is earth connected through the metal turrets of the housing.
For electric network power supply input, use double insulation cables.

System activation without the presence of electric network

- connect the battery to the control panel
- impulsively bridge S3
- the control panel will work until the reaching of the minimum voltage threshold, then the power supply will deactivate.
The programmed interruption of the power supplies is very useful when there is a prolonged lacking of the network and the
batteries fully discharge; in this case, all peripherals will disconnect, avoiding fluctuating power supply situations.

Supply unit
+V -V N L The supply unit must be connected as follows:

(L) Phase 230V~

(N) Neutral 230V~
Earth clamp
(V-) Output 14.5V =
(V+) Output 14.5V =
(VADJ) Voltage Adjustment Trimmer - regulated by default

- fix the supply unit to the control panel housing using the screws
provided before placing the control panel on the wall, without
fastening the screws too much; this enables the subsequent
removal of the supply unit.

!!! USE THE SCREWS PROVIDED !!!

- fix the cable sheath 230V~ with appropriate strip.

- Connect the earth clamp of the supply unit to the control panel
housing using the appropriate turret

- 29 -
Power section for central control units certified by IMQ - Grade 2
The power feeder is switching from 50W with an output voltage of 14.5V = and a maximum current of 3.4A.
when used with central control units certified by IMQ - Security Systems, compliant with EN 50131-1, EN 50131-3:2009, EN
50131-6:2008 and CEB T014, Grade 2, is subject to restrictions regarding the currents available in the various power outputs
indicated on the board of the control unit.
Table

Power feeder Type A

230V~ (+10 -15 %)
Mains power supply
50/60Hz
Voltage Standard power supply voltage 13,8 V =
Max. current absorbed by the network 0.8A - 230 V~
Maximum current available in observance of EN50131-6:2008 Power feeder 2,1A
Maximum current available in observance of Technical Note T031 Power feeder 750 mA
RStandard working range da 9 V = 15 V =
Ripple max 25 mV
Maximum current deliverable in observance of EN50131-6:2008 USCITE: (RS485 - 1) - (RS485 - 2) -
1.25A
Excluding consumption of central board (250mA) (RS485 - 3) (VLINEE) - (VOC) (VPOT)
Maximum current deliverable in observance of Technical Note T031 USCITE: (RS485 - 1) - (RS485 - 2) -
750mA
Including consumption of central board (250mA) (RS485 - 3) (VLINEE) - (VOC) (VPOT)
BATTERY RECHARGE output
Maximum current available in observance of Technical Note T031 600mA
(sized for 12V - 18Ah batteries)
Empty 13,8 V =
Output voltage at 110-230V~ - 10%
Maximum charge 13,6 V =
Empty 13,8 V =
Output voltage at 110-230V~ + 10%
Maximum charge 13,6 V =

With display off 40 mA

A300 - A 300 Plus display keyboard absorption
With display on 70 mA
With display off 70 mA - Plus 70 mA
A500 - A500Plus display keyboard absorption With display on 90 mA - Plus 90 mA
Maximum 100 mA - Plus 220 mA
With display off 65 mA - Plus 65 mA
A600 - A 600 Plus display keyboard absorption With display on 170 mA - Plus 170 mA
Maximum Plus 250 mA
With display off 47 mA - Plus 85 mA
A600 EVO - A600 EVO Plus display keyboard absorption With display on 95 mA - Plus 135 mA
Maximum 120 mA - Plus 250 mA
With display off 90 mA
ICE display keyboard absorption With display on 150 mA
Maximum 270 mA
Serial reader absorption (SR) maximum 30 mA
Battery allocable to guarantee system autonomy for at least 12 hours
Lead - flammability class UL94- V0 12 V - 18Ah
with no mains power
Low battery 10,5 V =
Battery signals
Recharge low battery 13,2 V =
Weight of appliance without battery 5 Kg
Power supply unit section for control panels certified by IMQ – Grade 3
When the power supply unit, 50W switching with an output voltage of 14.5V = and a maximum current of 3.4A, is used with
control panels certified by IMQ - Security Systems, compliant with EN 50131-1, EN 50131-3:2009, EN 50131-6:2008 and CEB
T014, Grade 3, it is subject to the restrictions shown in the table below, as well as those concerning EN 50131-1, EN 50131-
3:2009, EN 50131-6:2008 and CEB T014, Grade 2 .

Table

Current for self-consumption CPU board 250 mA

OUTPUTS: (RS485 - 1) - (RS485 - 2) - (RS485 - 3)
Current for external devices 50 mA
(VLINEE) - (VOC) (VPOT)
BATTERY RECHARGE output
Current for battery recharge 600 mA
(sized for 12V - 18Ah batteries)
Voltage at any output below which the ""Supply output faulty"" OUTPUTS: (RS485 - 1) - (RS485 - 2) - (RS485 - 3)
11 V -
signal is generated (VLINEE) - (VOC) (VPOT)
B a tte ry vo lta g e b e lo w whi ch the " " D e e p d i sc ha rg e 8,9 V -
protection"" function cuts in
Overvoltage protection cut-in voltage 17,5 V -

- 30 -
Supply unit section - XTREAM 64 - XTREAM 32
The supply unit is 25W switching with an output voltage of 14.5V = and a maximum current of 1.7A.
The control panel is able to intelligently distribute the current between the different utilities, dynamically managing both the
charging of the internal battery and of the siren battery.
Table
1 0 0 -2 4 0 V ~ (+ /-1 0 % )
N e tw o rk p o w e r s up p ly
5 0 /6 0 H z
V o lta g e p o w e r s u p p ly no m i na l vo lta g e 1 3 ,8 V =
0 .7 A /11 5 V ~
M a x. c urre nt a b s o rb e d b y the ne tw o rk
0 .4 A /2 3 0 V ~
M a xi m u m c u rre nt a va ila b le s up p ly un it 1 .7 A
e xte rna l us e 500 m A
M a xi m u m c u rre nt a va ila b le - w ith 7 A h b a tte ry
b a tte ry c ha rg e r o utp u t 450 m A
e m p ty 1 3 ,8 V =
O utp ut vo lta g e a t 11 0 -2 3 0 V ~ -1 0 %
w ith m a xi m um c ha rg e 1 3 ,6 V =
e m p ty 1 3 ,8 V =
O utp ut vo lta g e a t 11 0 -2 3 0 V ~ + 1 0 %
w ith m a xi m um c ha rg e 1 3 ,6 V =
w ith d i s a rm e d d is p la y 40 m A
K e yp a d a b s o rp ti o n w i th d i s p la y A 3 0 0 - A 3 0 0 P lus
w ith a rm e d d i s p la y 70 m A
w ith d i s a rm e d d is p la y 7 0 m A - P lus 7 0 m A
K e yp a d a b s o rp ti o n w i th d i s p la y A 5 0 0 - A 5 0 0 P lus w ith a rm e d d i s p la y 9 0 m A - P lus 9 0 m A
M a xi m um A 6 0 0 P lu s 1 0 0 m A - P lus 2 2 0 m A
w ith d i s a rm e d d is p la y 6 5 m A - P lus 6 5 m A
K e yp a d a b s o rp ti o n w i th d i s p la y A 6 0 0 - A 6 0 0 P lus w ith a rm e d d i s p la y 1 7 0 m A - P lus 1 7 0 m A
M a xi m um P lu s 2 5 0 m A
w ith d i s a rm e d d is p la y 4 7 m A - P lus 8 5 m A
K e yp a d a b s o rp ti o n w i th d i s p la y A 6 0 0 E V O - A 6 0 0 E V O P lus w ith a rm e d d i s p la y 9 5 m A - P lus 1 3 5 m A
M a xi m um 1 2 0 m A - P lus 2 5 0 m A
w ith d i s a rm e d d is p la y 90 m A
K e yp a d a b s o rp ti o n w i th d i s p la y IC E w ith a rm e d d i s p la y 150 mA
M a xi m um 270 mA
S e ri a l re a d e r (R S ) a b s o rp tio n m a xi m um 30 m A
Outdoor connections
Insert an omnipolar network switch having a minimum distance between the contacts of at least 3 mm in the electrical installation
of the building.
Place an eyelet terminal on earth wire and fix it to the threaded turret marked with the earth reference.
The control panel electronic board is earth connected through the metal turrets of the housing.
For electric network power supply input, use double insulation cables.

Supply unit The supply unit must be connected as follows:

+V -V N L (L) Phase 230V~

(N) Neutral 230V~
Earth clamp
(V-) Output 14.5V =
(V+) Output 14.5V =
(VADJ) Voltage Adjustment Trimmer - regulated by default

- Fix the power unit to the control panel box with the
screws and the included holder nut

!!! USE THE SCREWS PROVIDED !!!

- fix the cable sheath 230V~ with appropriate strip.

- Connect the earth clamp of the supply unit to the control
panel housing using the appropriate turret
Power unit fixing- XTREAM64

The power unit is fixed to the box, thanks to the plastic holder nuts, the fixing bracket
and the included screws.

- With a slight pressure, place the holder nut in the indicated position in the
drawing as “power unit fixing point”
- Fix the angle bracket on the power unit, thanks to the included screws.
- Fix the fixing bracket to the box

- 31 -
Housing fixing CONTXTREAM
In order for the wall fixing to be compliant with safety Standard
EN 60950-1, it must be suitable for supporting a 40 Kg weight.

The housing is arranged for the assembly of certain extension

electronic boards.
The illustration at the side shows the positions where the
various AVS accessories can be placed.
Also shown are the fixing points and the hole for the anti-
tamper, for the supply unit and the presetting for the fixing of
the housing cables.

Xsat MR8

Cables fixing
points

Xsat Xsat

Hole for
Tamper

Supply unit fixing

points
Fixing points

Housing fixing CONTXTREAMS

In order for the wall fixing to be compliant with safety Standard EN 60950-1, it must be suitable for supporting a 40 Kg weight.

The housing is arranged for the assembly of certain extension

electronic boards.
Xsat The illustration at the side shows the positions where the various
Control panel AVS accessories can be placed.
MR8 fixing points Also shown are the fixing points and the hole for the anti-tamper,
for the supply unit and the presetting for the fixing of the housing
Xsat
cables.

Hole for Tamper

Cables fixing
Supply unit fixing points
Supply unit fixing
points
Fixing points points

Tamper proof
All tamper proofs of the control panel housing must be connected to the Tamper input, being careful to correctly install the anti-tamper
kit provided with the control panel.

Anti-tamper installation

1. Perforate the wall in correspondence with the hole at the bottom of the housing destined for the anti-tamper.
2. Insert the wedge in the hole in the wall and tighten the spacer.
3. From the outside, insert the anti-tamper on the appropriate hole at the bottom of the housing.
Tightly fix the housing on the wall, checking that the spacer screwed on to the wedge, presses against the anti-
tamper button spring.

- 32 -
 Housing XTREAM 32 - XTREAM 6
Anti-tamper
Predisposition for
fixation to wall

Predisposition for
4 cables entry

3 Closing screw

2 Anti-tamper

1 Fixation point of the

supplying cables
1. Drill in correspondence of reference
-1-
2. Detach the spacer -2- Battery location
3. Insert the screw and tighten -3-
4. Rotate the tamper -4- in position -5- Predisposition for
fixation to wall
Note: if the anti-tamper is not
used, go directly to point 4
Fixation of the supply unit

The fixation of the supply unit to the bottom of the housing occurs
as follows:

1. fix the two screws keeping

distance from supply unit at about 3 2
1 mm
2. hang the two screws to the fixation
3
5 ways on the bottom of the housing
3. make the supply unit slip down
towards the bottom until blocked

3 mm

Supply unit section - XTREAM 6

The supply unit is 15W switching with an output voltage of 14.5V = and a maximum current of 1A.
Network power supply 100-240V~ (+/-10%) 50/60Hz
Voltage power supply nominal voltage 13,8 V =
0.35A/115V~
Max. current absorbed by the network
0.25A/230V~
Maximum current available supply unit 1A
external use 300 mA
Maximum current available - with 7 Ah battery
battery charger output 450 mA

empty 13,8 V =
Output voltage at 110-230V~ -10%
with maximum charge 13,6 V =
empty 13,8 V =
Output voltage at 110-230V~ +10%
with maximum charge 13,6 V =
BATTERIA

External Connections
Supply unit has to be connected as follows:
(1) V+
(2) V- -
To connect to the input of 1
the panel board in respect
(3) Ground +of the polarity
2
(4) Neutral 220V ~ N IN ALIM.
3
(5) Mains 220V ~ F
(6) Block the supplying cable at the fixation point pre-set 4
using the an adequate clamp
5
Insert a multi-pole mains switch in the electrical installation of the building.
Connect the mains tension input to terminals marked by L N (AC) and the 6
+ and – of the control panel board to those marked by V+ and V-
Input for mains supplying must be connected
with double-isolation cables
- 33 -
Cables fixing CONXTREAM
In order to guarantee the correct system installation, it is important to lock the cables of the different equipment with the strips
using the appropriate turrets of the housing.

OC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TA FA
J3
S1 S2
USB

J5
S3

F5A F3.15A Fixing points of the

RESET J6 supports for Xgsm
BATT. ALIM.

S4
J7
F1

F2

F3.15A F2A
F3.15A F3.15A F3.15A

J8
S6
S5

S7

F3,15AL 250V
safety fuse
F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

DA DB DA DB

network cable

Telephone
cable
Fixing
strip
Fixing
strip

Anchor the wiring after assembling the power feeder and the
mains terminal block.

• To guarantee electrical safety, the wires must be fastened with

a clip directly on the protective sheath
+V -V N L • The 3 wires for the 230 V ~ mains power supply and the 2 wires
for the 13.8 V = power supply must be securely fastened together
using a proper clip (as shown in the figure) to prevent them
coming into contact with sensitive parts of the central control
unit if they should come loose from the terminal block.

- 34 -
Cables fixing CONTXTREAMS
In order to guarantee the correct system installation, it is important to lock the cables of the different equipment with the strips
using the appropriate turrets of the housing.

OC USB
1
J3 J1 J2

J4

RESET

Fixing points of the

J5 supports for Xgsm

S1

F3.15A F2 F3
T 0.63A F 2A

J6
S2
F1

F6

F7

+V-V N L
Telephone
cable

Fixing
strip

network cable

- 35 -
A300 - A300Plus Keypads

The indications in the following layout must be

complied with for the connections of the keypad,
connecting the clamps of serial output RS485 of the
control panel to the corresponding keypads clamps.

• On the same serial port RS485, up to 16 keypads

TOWARDS OTHER can be connected in parallel.
KEYPADS • We recommend sheathed cables with four wires of
0.5 mm each.
• The total length of the connection cable can be 600
meters and must be subdivided for all connected
electronic boards.
• The supply output of each serial port RS485 is
protected by fuse 3.15A 250V.

The signal against the opening and the tearing of

the keypad from the wall is already connected and
cannot be excluded from programming; therefore,
we recommend correctly arranging the Tamper
pressing on the wall and carefully closing the
L1 + DA DB

keypad.

If upon commissioning the Tamper is not pressed,

the keypad will not start.

If wanting to exclude the tamper proof button

completely, DIP 5 must be positioned at ON in
keypad A300. If the tamper proof button is
excluded, the IMQ approval becomes void.

Addressing
Should installation envision more activation points, the installed keypads must be addressed using
the 5-way dip switch, located on the electronic board of the same keypads.
The numbering of the keypads must be progressive.
For example, if n. 2 keypads had been installed, the first display keypad must have "address 1"
and the second "address 2".
The number of connected LCD keypads must be declared during programming of the control panel.

By simultaneously pressing keys (CLR) and (ESC), it is possible to verify the addressing.

To address the keypads, position the dips according to the table.

Keypads Dip Dip Dip Dip
address 1 2 3 4
Bear in mind that there cannot be more keypads with the same address, otherwise
Keypad 1 Off Off Off Off
they will stop working and the control panel will activate a Tamper alarm.
Keypad 2 On Off Off Off
In this case, to reset functioning:
Keypad 3 Off On Off Off
a) give the keypads the correct addresses;
Keypad 4 On On Off Off
b) remove and give power back to all keypads.
Keypad 5 Off Off On Off
Keypad 6 On Off On Off
Zones connected in keypad A300
Keypad 7 Off On On Off
Keypad 8
Connect the zones to keypad in NC. If the inputs on the keypads
On On On Off
are used, bear in mind that the zone number is linked to the keypad. DB DA + L1
Keypad 9 Off Off Off On
Keypad 10 On Off Off On
Keypad 11 Off On Off On THE UNENGAGED ZONES MUST BE CLOSED
Keypad 12 On On Off On
Keypad 13 Off Off On On THE INPUTS ON THE A 300 AND A300PLUS KEYBOARDS ARE NOT
Keypad 14 On Off On On COMPLIANT WITH EN50131 GRADE 2, INSOFAR AS
Keypad 15 Off On On On THEY DO NOT RECOGNIZE THE ZONE BEING INTERFERED WITH
Keypad 16 On On On On

+ DA DB - serial number 3 (B2/3) for connection with keypads andL’utilizzo

serial satellites; the peripherals
degli ingressi presenti nelle tastiere
TheA300
A600e A300Plus
/A600Plus
RS485 - 3 connected on this serial will have software numbering from 17 to 32.
+ DA DB - serial number 2 (B2/3) for connection with keypads and serialfa scendere
satellites; thel’omologazione
peripherals
keypads with version
IMQ dal 2° al 1° livello. lower
RS485 - 2 connected on this serial will have software numbering from 17 to 32. than V.3.3P0 cannot
+.DA DB - serial number 1 (B1) for connection with keypads and serial satellites; the peripherals manage the addresses
RS485 - 1 connected on this serial will have software numbering from 1 to 16. from 9 onwards.

- 36 -
A500 - A500 Plus Keypads

Default Programming
1 = ADDR (Address): 1, The indications in the following layout must be
2 = Tamper: Enabled complied with for the connections of the keypad,
3 = Mode: Xtream connecting the clamps of serial output RS485 of the
control panel to the corresponding keypads clamps.
Edit parameters
• On the same serial port RS485, up to 16 keypads,
To access the modify menu for these parameters act
also of different models, can be connected in
as follows: a. Press the “CLR” and “ESC” buttons at parallel.
the same time, the display screen will show the • We recommend sheathed cables with four wires of
programmed model, firmware version and address. b. 0.5 mm each.
When pressing the “ENTER” button, the display screen • The total length of the connection cable can be 600
will show “Enter Unlock Code for Config” c. Enter code meters and must be subdivided for all connected
“9698”, the display screen will show” 1=ADDR, electronic boards.
2=TAMPER, 3=MODE” d. Enter the number of the • The supply output of each serial port RS485 is
protected by fuse 3.15A 250V.
parameter to be configured: 1= ADDR: select the
address with the “ON” and “OFF” buttons. Once the
address is selected, press “ENTER” to confirm and The signal against the opening and the tearing
return to the menu 2= TAMPER: press “CLR” to change of the keypad from the wall is already connected
the parameters, press “ENTER” to confirm and return and cannot be excluded from programming;
to the menu. 3= MODE: Do not change the factory-set therefore, we recommend correctly arranging the
parameter. e. Press “ESC” to exit from the menu Tamper pressing on the wall and carefully closing
the keypad.
TOWARDS OTHER
VERSO ALTRE
SPEAKER

KEYPADS
TASTIERE If upon commissioning the Tamper is not
pressed, the keypad will not start.
L8 L9 L10
+

If wanting to exclude the tamper proof button

DA DB

completely, DIP 5 must be positioned at ON in

keypad A300. If the tamper proof button is
T
- -

excluded, the IMQ approval becomes

void.l’omologazione IMQ.
T2
MIC SPK

-
L8 L9

T1

Indirizzamento
Should install ation envision more activation points, the installed keypads must be addressed changing internal parameters of the same
keypads. The numbering of the keypads must be progressive.
For example, if n. 2 keypads had been installed, the first display keypad must have "address 1" and the second "address 2".

The number of connected keypads must be declared during programming of the control panel.

By simultaneously pressing keys (CLR) and (ESC), it is possible to verify the addressing.

+ DA DB - serial number 3 (B2/3) for connection with keypads and serial satellites; the peripherals
RS485 - 3 connected on this serial will have software numbering from 17 to 32.
+ DA DB - serial number 2 (B2/3) for connection with keypads and serial satellites; the peripherals
RS485 - 2 connected on this serial will have software numbering from 17 to 32.
+.DA DB - serial number 1 (B1) for connection with keypads and serial satellites; the peripherals
RS485 - 1 connected on this serial will have software numbering from 1 to 16.
Bear in mind that there cannot be more keypads with the same address, otherwise they will stop working and the control panel
will activate a Tamper alarm.
In this case, to reset functioning:
a) give the keypads the correct addresses;
b) remove and give power back to all keypads.

Zones connected in keypad A300

Connect the zones to keypad in NC. If the inputs on the keypads are used, bear in mind that the zone
number is linked to the keypad.
Use only the zone named T1 . T2 zone is not usable.

THE UNENGAGED ZONES MUST BE CLOSED

- 37 -
A600 - A600 Plus Keypads

The indications in the following layout must be

complied with for the connections of the keypad,
connecting the clamps of serial output RS485 of the
control panel to the corresponding keypads clamps.

• On the same serial port RS485, up to 16 keypads,

TOWARDS OTHER also of different models, can be connected in
KEYPADS parallel.
• We recommend sheathed cables with four wires of
0.5 mm each.
• The total length of the connection cable can be 600
meters and must be subdivided for all connected
electronic boards.
• The supply output of each serial port RS485 is
protected by fuse 3.15A 250V.

The signal against the opening and the tearing

Touch Reader (A600Plus only) of the keypad from the wall is already connected
and cannot be excluded from programming;
therefore, we recommend arranging the Tamper
spring pressing on the wall correctly and carefully
closing the keypad.
If upon commissioning the Tamper is not
pressed, the keypad will not start.

If wanting to exclude the tamper proof button

completely, DIP 5 must be positioned at ON in
keypad. If the tamper proof button is excluded,
the IMQ approval becomes void.

Addressing
Should installation envision more activation points, the installed keypads must be addressed using the 5-way dip switch,
located on the electronic board of the same keypads.
The numbering of the keypads must be progressive.
For example, if n. 2 keypads had been installed, the first display keypad must have "address 1"
and the second "address 2".

The number of connected keypads must be declared during programming of the control panel.

By simultaneously pressing keys (CLR) and (ESC), it is possible to verify the correct addressing.
Keypads Dip Dip Dip Dip
address 1 2 3 4 To address the keypads, position the dips according to the table.
Keypad 1 Off Off Off Off
Bear in mind that there cannot be more keypads with the same address, otherwise
Keypad 2 On Off Off Off
they will stop working and the control panel will activate a Tamper alarm.
Keypad 3 Off On Off Off
In this case, to reset functioning:
Keypad 4 On On Off Off a) give the keypads the correct addresses;
Keypad 5 Off Off On Off b) remove and give power back to all keypads.
Keypad 6 On Off On Off
Keypad 7 Off On On Off
Zones connected in keypad
Keypad 8 On On On Off
Keypad 9
Connect the zones in keypad in single/double balancing with R1
Off Off Off On
4K7 (see "Zones balanced"/"Zones balanced with tamper signal"
Keypad 10 On Off Off On
layout). If the inputs on the keypads are used, bear in mind that the
Keypad 11 Off On Off On
zone number is linked to the keypad.
Keypad 12 On On Off On
Keypad 13 Off Off On On
Keypad 14 On Off On On
Keypad 15 Off On On On THE UNENGAGED ZONES MUST BE BALANCED
Keypad 16 On On On On

+ DA DB - serial number 3 (B2/3) for connection with keypads and serial satellites; the peripherals The A600 /A600Plus
RS485 - 3 connected on this serial will have software numbering from 17 to 32. keypads with version
+ DA DB - serial number 2 (B2/3) for connection with keypads and serial satellites; the peripherals lower than V.3.3P0 cannot
RS485 - 2 connected on this serial will have software numbering from 17 to 32.
manage the addresses
+ DA DB - serial number 1 (B1) for connection with keypads and serial satellites; the peripherals
RS485 - 1 connected on this serial will have software numbering from 1 to 16. from 9 onwards.

- 38 -
Keypad A600 EVO - A600 EVO Plus
Technical Features
16-character, 2-rows display screen
CONNECTIONS Self-updating micro flash
KEYBOARDS 1 T1 input (4K7 resistor with reference to negative) It is
possible to use only the area called T1, the T2 area
cannot be used.
25 Operation keys
Default programming
1= ADDR: 1
2= Tamper: Enabled
Edit parameters
To access the modify menu for these parameters act
as follows:
a. Press the “CLR” and “ESC” buttons at the same
time, the display screen will show the programmed
TOUCH READER (A600 EVO PLUS only) model, firmware version and address.
----- only with open TAMPER button -----
b. When pressing the “ENTER” button, the display
screen will show “Enter Unlock Code for Config”
Enter code “9698”, the display screen will show”
1=ADDR, 2=TAMPER, 3=USB upgrade fw (only A600
EVO PLUS)”
d. Enter the number of the parameter to be configured:
1. 1= ADDR: select the address from 1 to 16 with the
“ON” and “OFF”. Once the address is selected, press
“ENTER” to confirm and return to the menù.
2. 2= TAMPER: press “CLR” to change the
parameters, press “ENTER” to confirm and return to
the menù.
TOY READER (A600 EVO PLUS only) e. Press “ESC” to exit from the menù

The indications in the following layout must be complied with for the connections of the keypad, connecting the clamps of serial output RS485 of
the control panel to the corresponding keypads clamps. On the same serial port RS485, up to 16 keypads can be connected in parallel.
We recommend sheathed cables with four wires of 0.5 mm each. The total length of the connection cable can be 600 meters and must be
subdivided for all connected electronic boards. The signal against the opening and the tearing of the keypad from the wall is already connected
and cannot be excluded from programming; therefore, we recommend arranging the Tamper spring pressing on the wall correctly and carefully
closing the keypad. Wanting to exclude button completely tamper need to change the parameter 2 in keyboard.
Addressing
If installation should require two or more activation points, the installed keyboards should have different addresses, not necessarily
consecutive, and the used keyboards should be enabled based on their addresses in programming.
Example: if 3 keyboards were installed,the first keyboard can have “address 1”, the second “address 2” and the third “address 8”.
Bear in mind that there cannot be more keypads with the same address, otherwise they will stop working and the control
panel will activate a Tamper alarm
Correct addressing can be checked by entering the keyboard programming.
Zones connected in keypad
There is the possibility to connect up to two individually programmable zone and/or open collector inputs in every keyboard (see
the chapter “Types of connection”).
NOTE: If any mode other than Balanced 2R is set, the device no longer complies with EN50131
NOTE: The shield of each cable of zone must be only connected to the negative of Control Panel.
TOUCH reader (A600 EVO PLUS only)
A reader for managing the TOUCH activators is built into the keyboard. For the position, see the TOUCH Key Reader in the
figure.
For operation, it suffices to program the control mode in the central control unit and acquire the TOUCHs to use (see the
chapters “Activators”>>“Keypad” and “Accesses”).
TOY reader (A600 EVO PLUS only)
A reader for managing the TOY activators is built into the keyboard. For the position, see the TOY Key Reader in the figure.
For operation, it suffices to program the control mode in the central control unit and acquire the TOYs to use (see the chapters
“Activators”>>“Keypad” and “Accesses”).
Mini USB port (A600 EVO PLUS only)
The bottom of the keyboard has a Mini USB port to perform the firmware update of the keyboard and the programming of the
control unit
Audio (A600 EVO PLUS only)
An audio device for executing voice communications is built.
To use it, it is necessary to connect the SPK input and enable the various events to communicate in the central control unit
programming (see chapters “Keyboard” and “Audio Keyboard”)

- 39 -
Tastiere ICE
The indications in the following layout must be complied with for the
TOWARDS
VERSO LA VERSO ALTRE
TOWARDS connections of the keypad, connecting the clamps of serial output RS485
CONTROL
CENTRALE KEYPADS of the control panel to the corresponding keypads clamps.
TASTIERE
OTHER
PANEL
• On the same serial port RS485, up to 16 keypads, also of different
models, can be connected in parallel.
• We recommend sheathed cables with four wires of 0.5 mm each.
• The total length of the connection cable can be 600 meters and must
be subdivided for all connected electronic boards.
• The supply output of each serial port RS485 is protected by fuse
3.15A 250V.
The signal against the opening and the tearing of the keypad from the
wall is already connected and cannot be excluded from programming;
therefore, we recommend arranging the Tamper spring pressing on
the wall correctly and carefully closing the keypad.
If upon commissioning the Tamper is not pressed, the keypad will
not start.

If wanting to exclude the tamper proof button completely, DIP 5 must

be positioned at ON in keypad. If the tamper proof button is excluded,
the IMQ approval becomes void.
Mini USB port
The bottom of the keyboard has a Mini USB port to perform the firmware
update of the keyboard and the programming of the control unit
Addressing
Should installation envision more activation points, the installed keypads must be addressed changing internal parameters of
the same keypads. The numbering of the keypads must be progressive

Bear in mind that there cannot be more keypads with the same address, otherwise they will stop working and the control panel
will activate a Tamper alarm.
In this case, to reset functioning:
+ DA DB - serial number 3 (B2/3) for connection with keypads and serial satellites; the peripherals
RS485 - 3 connected on this serial will have software numbering from 17 to 32.
+ DA DB - serial number 2 (B2/3) for connection with keypads and serial satellites; the peripherals
RS485 - 2 connected on this serial will have software numbering from 17 to 32.
+.DA DB - serial number 1 (B1) for connection with keypads and serial satellites; the peripherals
RS485 - 1 connected on this serial will have software numbering from 1 to 16.
a) give the keypads the correct addresses;
b) remove and give power back to all keypads.
For example, if n. 2 keypads had been installed, the first display keypad must have "address 1" and the second "address 2".
The number of connected keypads must be declared during programming of the control panel.
Default programming
1 = ADDR (Address): 1 2 = Tamper: Enabled 3 = Mode: Xtream
Parameter settings
In order to modify the parameters, gain access at the menu as follow:
a. Activate the ICE touching the screen an sliding with the finger from left to right on the logo “>> >> >>”.
b. Acces in mode “keyboard” or “app” touching the icon or
c. Touching the AVS Electronics logo until appear the “ INSERT USER CODE” (almost 10”)
d. Type 9698 and press enter to to access the configuration menu..
e. To change the configuration settings press on “>”
Keryboard: (1-16) Tamper: (YES/NO) Speed: Xtream UPDATE FIRMWARE ICE: (YES/NO)
Keyboard “active visualization” (YES/NO) Modo Quick “active visualization” (YES/NO)
Fire dispatch “active visualization” (YES/NO) Medical dispatch “active visualization” (YES/NO)
Panic dispatch “active visualization” (YES/NO)
- Confirm: to confirm the variations
- Indication arrow: to surf between the different programming pages
- Back: to exit without saving.
Zones connected in keypad A300
Connect the zones to keypad in NC. If the inputs on the keypads are used, bear in mind that the zone
number is linked to the keypad.
Use only the zone named T1 . T2 zone is not usable.

THE UNENGAGED ZONES MUST BE CLOSED

- 40 -
 A600 Plus and ICE Connection

- connect clamp SPK of A600Plus on clamp OUT SPK or connect SPK terminal of ICE on clamp OUT SPK ; for the connection, we recommend
using a separate sheathed cable.

DA DB DA DB +SA +S C NC NO OUT IN
RS485 2 RS485 1 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 T VLINEE VLINEE VPOT ALARM SPK MIC

XTREAM 640
TOWARDS OTHER
KEYPADS

S1

F3.15A F2 F3
T 0.63A F 2A

J6
S2
XTREAM 64B

F1

F6

F7
XTREAM 64
XTREAM 32B
XTREAM 32
XTREAM 6B
XTREAM 6

Audio keypads enabling (user)

The audio enabling of the individual keypads is activated as follows:
- Enter user code with "Master" feature and access menu 1 on the keypad to be enabled
- Scroll the programming steps up to "Keypad Settings" step
- Access the menu and adjust the "Audio Volume" on one of the possible settings (Mute - Low - Medium - High) using the key (CLR).
Note: "Mute" deactivates the audio of the keypad for any communication (events and zone state).

Audio "ZONES STATE" and keypads "EVENTS" enabling (user)

The audio ZONES STATE enabling of the individual keypads is activated as follows:
- Enter user code with "Master" feature and access menu 1 on the keypad to be enabled
- Scroll the programming steps up to "Keypad Settings" step
- Access the menu and set the "Audio Zones State"/"Audio events" on (YES/NO) using the key (CLR).

Audio enabling to the keypads (user)

The enabling of the communications to the keypads is obtained:
- By setting the various events to be communicated on "YES" in " Audio Keypad" menu.
- By setting the various sectors to be communicated on "YES" in " Audio Keypad " menu.
- in menu "Keypads > Keyboard Settings > RTC Keypad" set to "YES" to enable the vocal management of the system directly with the keypad
- in menu "Keypads > Keyboard Settings > Audio events set to "YES" to activate the communications of the enabled events
- in menu "Keypads > Keyboard Settings > Audio zones state" set to "YES" to activate the communications of the openings of the associated
inputs.

Display options and rear-lighting (user)

It is possible to vary the contrast, the intensity of the LEDS and the rear-lighting; to vary these options work as follows:
- Enter user code with "Master" feature and access menu 1 on the keypad to be enabled
- Scroll the programming steps up to "Keypad Settings" step
- Access the menu and scroll downwards to entry "Reduc. Contrast - LED intens. red. - Rear-lighting".
- Contrast Reduction: By setting "Yes" the contrast of the display is reduced
- LED Intensity Reduction: By setting "Yes" the brightness of the LEDS of the keypad is reduced
- Rear-lighting (%): Set the value (from 10% to 100%) of the rear-lighting intensity of the display and of the keypad.

Interruption of vocal repetitions (user)

It is possible to interrupt the cycle of the vocal repetitions of the keypads:
- Press key (3) of the keypad if in the user menu.
- Press key (3) followed by ENT if outside the user menu.

RTC enabling on A500Plus, A600Plus and ICE Keypad

It is possible to activate the RTC directly on the keypad with the same functions and use modalities of the RTC with telephone connection.
- Enter user code and press 7; ("RTC Keypad": must be enabled in the "user profile"
- Insert the commands described on the user manual for RTC, press (ESC) to exit
NB: During the video verification of the wireless sensors, audio playback on the keyboards is disabled.

- 41 -
Satellites

INPUTS OUTPUTS OPTIONS CONNECTIONS HOUSINGS CONSUMPTION

n°2 - single/double balancing n°8 outputs o.c.

Single housing
n°4 with double zones connection programmable, to interface
CONTSAT W
XSAT2 with tamper signal with relay module MR2 / MR4 With four wires ~ 32 mA
Single housing
- inputs managements / MR8
CONT SX
witch alarm n° 16 outputs set as double
n°10-single/double balancing
Single housing
n°20 with double zones connection n°8 programmable o.c.
CONTSAT W
XSAT8 with tamper signal outputs, to interface with relay With four wires ~ 40 mA
Single housing
- inputs management module MR2 / MR4 / MR8
CONT SX
switch alarm
n°10-single/double balancing
n°18 with XEXP8 Single housing
n°18/36-with double zones n°1 additional alarm relay SAT W HOUSING
connection with tamper signal n°8 programmable o.c. Housing
XSAT36 With four wires ~50 mA
- inputs management outputs, to interface with relay CONTXTREAM
switch alarm module MR2 / MR4 / MR8 Housing
n°1 dedicated to tamper proof CONTXTREAM-S
n°1 fire protection dedicated input
n°10-single/double balancing
n°18 with XEXP8
n°18/36-with double zones n°1 additional alarm relay With 3 or 5 A power Housing
XSATPW 3Q connection with tamper signal n°8 programmable o.c. supply CONTXTREAM
With four wires ~60 mA
XSATPW 5Q - inputs management outputs, to interface with relay XSATPW3Q>> 3.4A Housing
switch alarm module MR2 / MR4 / MR8 XSATPW5Q>> 5A CONTXTREAM-S
n°1 dedicated to tamper proof
n°1 fire protection dedicated input
L’utilizzo del satellite modello radio SAT WS, fa decadere le prestazioni IMQ.
n° 3 - NC i np ut s t o ne g a t i ve n°3 - relay outputs C / NC
SAT MINI With four wires ~ 30 mA
configurable via dip switches programmable
n°16 radio detectors n°1 additional alarm relay
n°32 set as double n°8 programmable o.c.
SAT WS With four wires ~85 mA
from versione2.0 outputs, to interface with relay
max n°32 set as single module MR8
n° 1 relay outputs C / NC
XSATWS n° 32 set up as a single With four wires ~ 45 mA
programmable
n° 32 radio detectors n°2 programmable o.c.
XSATWS 2
n° 2 outputs, to interface with relay With four wires ~ 70 mA
XSATWS 4
n°1 dedicated to tamper proof module MR2 / MR4 / MR8
n°2 programmable o.c.
XSATWS 4 n° 32 radio detectors outputs, to interface with relay With four wires ~ 70 mA
module MR2 / MR4 / MR8
n°1 Additional alarm relays
li nk for addi ti onal
n°8 programmable outputs
n° 32 sensors addressed power supply wi th
o.c. to interface with the relay Single housing
XSATHP n° 4 single / double balanced communications a With four wires ~ 250 mA
module MR2 / MR4 / MR8 CONTXTREAM
n°1 dedicated to anti tampering mains failure, battery
n ° 1 output (FA) is working
failure and battery
properly
The satellites boards must be connect to the control panel RS485 in the same way of Keypads, RS readers, HP sirens and HP
detectors
For further information, refer to the manual of the relative satellites.
NOTE: The following function is available up to 1.2R6 panel versions
X SAT WS: In the event of problems with receiving the radio signal, the XSATWS expansion boards with an address from 1 to
8 (of serial 1 for XTREAM640) can be programmed to manage the same sensors in pairs (max. 4 pairs).
When programming, in the step "Installation > Match XSATWS", it is possibile to create 4 satellite matches:
Abbin. XSATWS
Setting the first to "yes" will match satellite 2 to satellite 1 snnn , setting the second to "yes" will match satellite 4
Abbin. XSATWS
to satellite 3 nsnn and so on for the other two pairs. All you have to do is acquire the sensors in the first satellite

of the pair for them to be automatically managed also by the second. Any remote control handsets will have to be acquired in
both satellites, as though they are independent.
Just one radio siren can be matched to the central control unit, and this can be acquired and managed by a single radio
satellite.
Please note that the tamper proof signals of the zones programmed with reading of the double balancing are managed
directly from the control panel.

The additional supply unit mod. POWER1Q or 4Q in housing, must have ONLY its transformer and its maintenance
battery, furthermore, only the essential wiring to carry out its function must transit through it. Therefore, serial RS485
must not transit in this housing.

- 42 -
 Addressing XSATMINI

The satellite can be programmed with 32 different addresses, to be addressed on a central XSATHP or through the Virtual
XSAT HP as any serial detector.

Satellite Dip Dip Dip Dip Dip Satellite Dip Dip Dip Dip Dip
Address 1 2 3 4 5 Address 1 2 3 4 5
Satellite 1 Off Off Off Off Off Satellite 17 Off Off Off Off On
Satellite 2 On Off Off Off Off Satellite 18 On Off Off Off On
Satellite 3 Off On Off Off Off Satellite 19 Off On Off Off On
Satellite 4 On On Off Off Off Satellite 20 On On Off Off On
Satellite 5 Off Off On Off Off Satellite 21 Off Off On Off On
Satellite 6 On Off On Off Off Satellite 22 On Off On Off On
Satellite 7 Off On On Off Off Satellite 23 Off On On Off On
Satellite 8 On On On Off Off Satellite 24 On On On Off On
Satellite 9 Off Off Off On Off Satellite 25 Off Off Off On On
Satellite 10 On Off Off On Off Satellite 26 On Off Off On On
Satellite 11 Off On Off On Off Satellite 27 Off On Off On On
Satellite 12 On On Off On Off Satellite 28 On On Off On On
Satellite 13 Off Off On On Off Satellite 29 Off Off On On On
Satellite 14 On Off On On Off Satellite 30 On Off On On On
Satellite 15 Off On On On Off Satellite 32 Off On On On On
Satellite 16 On On On On Off Satellite 32 On On On On On

Addressing Addressing Addressing

XSAT2-XSAT8-XSATWS/2/4 -SAT03-SAT04 XSATHP SATWS

Satellite Dip Dip Dip Dip Satellite Dip Dip Dip Dip Satellite Dip Dip Dip Dip
Address 1 2 3 4 Address 1 2 7 8 Address 4 6 7 8
Satellite 1 Off Off Off Off Satellite 1 Off Off Off Off Satellite 1 Off Off Off Off
Satellite 2 On Off Off Off Satellite 2 Off Off Off On Satellite 2 Off On Off Off
Satellite 3 Off On Off Off Satellite 3 Off Off On Off Satellite 3 Off Off On Off
Satellite 4 On On Off Off Satellite 4 Off Off On On Satellite 4 Off On On Off
Satellite 5 Off Off On Off Satellite 5 Off On Off Off Satellite 5 Off Off Off On
Satellite 6 On Off On Off Satellite 6 Off On Off On Satellite 6 Off On Off On
Satellite 7 Off On On Off Satellite 7 Off On On Off Satellite 7 Off Off On On
Satellite 8 On On On Off Satellite 8 Off On On On Satellite 8 Off On On On
Satellite 9 Off Off Off On Satellite 9 On Off Off Off Satellite 9 On Off Off Off
Satellite 10 On Off Off On Satellite 10 On Off Off On Satellite 10 On On Off Off
Satellite 11 Off On Off On Satellite 11 On Off On Off Satellite 11 On Off On Off
Satellite 12 On On Off On Satellite 12 On Off On On Satellite 12 On On On Off
Satellite 13 Off Off On On Satellite 13 On On Off Off Satellite 13 On Off Off On
Satellite 14 On Off On On Satellite 14 On On Off On Satellite 14 On On Off On
Satellite 15 Off On On On Satellite 15 On On On Off Satellite 15 On Off On On
Satellite 16 On On On On Satellite 16 On On On On Satellite 16 On On On On

+ DA DB - serial number 3 (B2/3) for connection with keypads and serial satellites; the peripherals
RS485 - 3 connected on this serial will have software numbering from 17 to 32.
+ DA DB - serial number 2 (B2/3) for connection with keypads and serial satellites; the peripherals
RS485 - 2 connected on this serial will have software numbering from 17 to 32.
+ DA DB - serial number 1 (B1) for connection with keypads and serial satellites; the peripherals
RS485 - 1 connected on this serial will have software numbering from 1 to 16.

SATELLITES SAT03 with version lower than V.2.0 cannot manage the addresses from 9 onwards.

SATELLITES SAT04 can manage the addresses up to n. 8.

SATELLITES SATWS with version lower than V.1.1 cannot manage the addresses from 9 onwards.

- 43 -
Key installation
The control panel can be armed from an external actuator as well as from the keypad; by means of the zone inputs suitably
programmed as arming in ON, HOME, ZONE or PERIMETER modality.
Control Panel Programming
Prog. Key
Program "Impulsive" or "State", depending on the wanted management .
Prog. Zone
Program a zone as Key ON: (Arming ON) therefore by unbalancing this clamp with a negative for a few seconds "Impulsive
management" or maintaining the unbalancing "State management", the control panel will switch on at ON modality and the
zones programmed as "Included at ON" will be considered fully active. The same is valid for the zone programmed as HOME
Key: (Arming HOME), for the zone programmed as ZONE Key: (Arming ZONE) and for the zone programmed as PERIMETER
Key: (Arming PERIMETER)

The twin zone to that used to control an arming in any modality, must be configured as "Unused". On the contrary, to
warn of the incorrect programming, the keypad displays the wording "Prog. Error # 1".
N.B. The zones programmed as Key (ON-HO-ZONE-PERI), must be associated to one sector only.

"Impulsive" Management
The impulsive management enables to manage the control panel from keypad and from electronic key in the same manner.

Connection layout RK32 and IMP32 (Impulsive)

Remote arming

Electronic Key (mod. RK32 + mod. IMP32)

Bridge P3 open (deletes the 60 seconds delay)
Bridge P4 in B position (the red LED is completely controlled by clamp X).
Connect clamp (X) to output OC1 -> "Cat. Armings - YES for ON HO ZO PE
- blk= YES" -> bistable time
-> sector #.
Connect clamp (P) to output OC2 -> "Cat. Sector - Re-balancing -> bistable
time ->

"State" Management
The State management assumes the management of the system only from electronic key and to use the keypad only if wanting
to activate an arming with the exclusion of the key block (in case an electronic key is lost and has to be excluded).

ATTENTION: in this way, if the system had been previously armed with electronic key, it can only be disarmed with electronic
key.

The R1 resistances in the various drawings must have a value of 4.700 ohm

Connection layout RK32 (State)

PART. ACTIV.
Electronic Key (mod. RK32)

(Arm. RK32) Bridge P3 open (deletes the 60 seconds delay)

(Zone State) Bridge P4 in B position (the red LED is completely controlled by clamp X).
Connect clamp (X) to output OC1 -> -> "Cat. Armings - YES for ON HO ZO PE - blk=
YES" -> bistable time
Connect clamp (P) to output OC2 -> "Cat. Sector - Re-balancing -> bistable time ->

- 44 -
EB1 key electronic board connection/programming layout

ZONE SUPER DIP 1 (OFF) Conditional Arming: when controlling an arming, this is
(dip8:off) executed only if, upon removal of the key, input "P" is active or flashing.
Should these conditions not verify, the command is ignored. Not active
with the open door function.
(ON) Conditional Arming: disabled
DIP1 (OFF) CA Output: fast
(dip8:on) (ON) CA Output: slow
DIP 2 (OFF) "yes" type partialisation: by arming in partial the partialisation
relay activates first, then the total one (STATE only)
(ON) "yes" type partialisation: disabled
DIP 3 (OFF) Led reader normally ARMED
(ON) Led reader normally DISARMED
DIP 4 (OFF) the readers connected in COD1 do not have restrictions
(ON) the readers connected in COD1 can only work armings at ON
DIP 6 (OFF) Electronic board outputs with IMPULSIVE functioning
(ON) Electronic board outputs with STATE functioning
DIP 7 (OFF) 1 arming
(dip8:off) (ON) 2 armings
DIP 8 (OFF) Open door function: disabled
(ON) Open door function: switches the CA output, immediately after
having recognised the key, for a time dependant from DIP1 and DIP6.
COD 2 The readers connected in COD2 are not enabled to arming at ON

Example of control panel programming

EX: Program zone L1 as Key ON whereas zone L11 as Unused.
EX: Program zone L2 as HOME Key whereas zone L12 as Unused.
EX: Output O.C. 2 must be programmed with modality "Cat. Armings - YES for ON HO ZO PE - memo all = YES" -> bistable time
EX: Output O.C. 1 must be programmed with modality "Cat. Sector - Re-balancing -> blk bistable time ->
If the electronic key is used in IMPULSIVE modality, program the Mod. key functioning as Impulsive
If the electronic key is used in STATE modality, program the Mod. key functioning as State

The above shown programming example is approximate. Any input zone, with the exception of the twin zones - double zones
with tamper signal - can become arming inputs.
Hints on armings management
The control panel enables four types of armings: ON, HOME, ZONE and PERIMETER. To every type of arming it is possible to
arbitrarily associate any zone set of the control panel.
When the control panel is armed in one of the four possible modalities, the zones associated to that modality are active and
may signal alarm.
The arming of the control panel, if carried out with an external key, can happen in two different ways: impulsive or state. When
controlled from keypad, the arming is always impulsive.
The main difference between the impulsive and state modality is that in the first, if the control panel has been armed using an
external key it can be disarmed using keypad and vice-versa, whereas in the second, the control panel cannot be disarmed
using keypad as long as an external key maintains it armed at state.
The control panel establishes a hierarchical order of the arming where the ON modality is the highest level one and the
following modalities proceed in order HOME, ZONE and PERIMETER. This determines that if an arming is controlled and later
one of higher level takes over, the control panel passes to the highest level modality.

• Example 1: the control panel is armed in HOME modality by an external state key. Later the ON arming is controlled by keypad. The
control panel passes to ON arming. If it is disarmed by keypad, it remains armed in HOME modality, until the external state key
completely disarms it.
• Example 2: The control panel is armed in ON modality by an external state key. Later the ZONE arming is controlled by keypad. The
control panel remains armed in ON modality. If it is later disarmed by the state key, it passes to ZONE arming, until it is completely
disarmed by keypad.
• Example 3: The control panel is armed from keypad in any modality. Later an impulsive key intervenes in any modality. The control
panel disarms. The same happens if the control panel is armed from impulsive key and then disarmed from keypad.

L’organo di comando esterno deve essere almeno di II livello IMQ e la relati-

va scheda di decodifica deve essere collocata all’interno della centrale.
Il non rispetto di questa segnalazione fa decadere le prestazioni IMQ.

- 45 -
RS serial readers
The RS readers connect directly on serial RS485 and enable to carry out all arming/disarming operations of the various sectors
to which they are associated and/or activation of the open collector outputs.
Up to 512 TOUCH keys can be acquired that will be associated to the various User codes.
Every key acquires a user profile and consequently all enablings.
Thanks to the recognition of the reader on which we are working it is possible to carry out, with due programming, partial
armings, activations of open collector outputs or emergency calls.
The reader can work in two functioning modalities, single or immediate.
The two modalities are substantially different in the way the activations are performed; the single modality offers the user the
various activations possibilities, the immediate modality directly works the armings and/or disarmings depending on the enablings
of the user-key (Touch) that is neared to the reader.
Installation of the key blocks
The serial key block (RS) must be connected to the clamps of the RS485
serial line normally used for the connection of keypads or of satellites.
• OnthesameserialportRS485, up to a maximum of 16 key
blocks (Mod. RS) can be connected.
• We recommend sheathed cables with four wires of 0.5 mm each.
• The total length of the connection cable can be 600 meters and
TOWARDS OTHER
must be subdivided among all connected electronic boards.
KEY BLOCKS
• The supply output of serial port RS485 is protected by fuse 3.15A
250V

XTREAM 64B - XTREAM 64

XTREAM 640 XTREAM 32B - XTREAM32
XTREAM 6B - XTREAM 6
Max. armings 4 4
Conditional Arming yes yes
Max. number key blocks 32 16
Max. meters key blocks serial length serial length
ON Max. keys 512 keys 64 keys
Number of combinations more than 1000 billion more than 1000 billion
Nominal voltage 12 V = 12 V =
Min. absorption 25 mA 25 mA
Max. absorption 30 mA 30 mA
OC Arming State or Impulsive State or Impulsive
Environmental conditions - 10°C / +55°C - humidity 95% - 10°C / +55°C - humidity 95%
Technical features
Addressing
Key Block Dip Dip Dip Dip Dip Should installation envision more activation points, the installed key blocks must
Address 1 2 3 4 5
be addressed using the 5-way dip switch, located on the electronic board.
Key Block 1
The numbering of the key blocks must be progressive.
Off Off Off Off Off
To address the key blocks, position the dips according to the table.
Key Block 2 Off On Off Off Off
Bear in mind that there cannot be more key blocks with the same address,
Key Block 3 Off Off On Off Off
otherwise they will stop working and the control panel will activate a Tamper
Key Block 4 Off On On Off Off
alarm.
Key Block 5 Off Off Off On Off
In this case, to reset functioning:
Key Block 6 Off On Off On Off
a) give the key blocks the correct addresses;
Key Block 7 Off Off On On Off b) remove and give power back to all key blocks.
Key Block 8 Off On On On Off
Key Block 9 Off Off Off Off On Main features
Key Block 10 Off On Off Off On TOUCH is the recently evolved product of the electronic key technology. Thanks
Key Block 11 Off Off On Off On to this technology, TOUCH satisfies the safety requests, offering the user great
Key Block 12 Off On On Off On performances and comfort.
Key Block 13 Off Off Off On On • the Touch keys have a univocal code programmed at the factory, and this code
Key Block 14 Off On Off On On cannot be changed
Key Block 15 Off Off On On On • the Touch keys must be acquired by the motherboard and univocally associated
Key Block 16 Off On On On On with a user code;
• follow the indications to acquire the code from all envisioned keys;
• protect the external key blocks against possible tampering or acts of vandalism;
• the key must be positioned parallel to the LEDS;
• never position the side by side key blocks, even if connected to different serials, but separate them from a blind fruit or
other.
• proximity key with recognition and memorisation of false key, with visualisation on key block of line and control panel state,
with possibility to automatically partialise the system.
• the key does not require batteries to work.
• by using the same key it is possible to control more systems even with different functions (home, work, open a door, a tilting
door, arm and disarm one or more equipment), meaning to work in all those situations in which the key has been acquired.
Warnings
• Installation: the equipment must only be installed by qualified staff.

- 46 -
 Functioning of the serial RS key blocks
Keys acquisition
The acquisition of the Touch keys can be carried out by directly resting the key to the reader, after having enabled the suitable step, or using
the A600Plus keypads. (see step control panel programming "ACCESSES"> Touch on RS / Touch on A600 > Key acquisition).
Keys deletion
To delete the Touch keys follow that described during programming of the step control panel "ACCESSES"> Touch on RS / Touch on A600 >
Key deletion).

Visualisations/ arming/disarming commands

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Green LED
1st Red LED
2st Red LED
3st Red LED

(A) S ector(s) = D isarmed led (1), (2), (3) disarmed

(B ) S ector(s) = Fully A rmed (ON) led (1), (2), (3) armed
Sectors = Inconsistency in arming, certain sectors may not
(B ) led (1), (2), (3) slow ly flashing
be armed in the chosen modality
Awaiting feedback from the control panel of the occurred
(B ) led (1), (2), (3) quickly flashing
command
(C ) S ector(s) = 1 Partial A rming (HOME ) led (1) armed
(D ) S ector(s) = 2 P artial A rming (ZONE) led (2) armed
(E ) Sector(s) = 3 Partial A rming (P E RIME TER) led (3) armed

B alanced zones: armed

Green
Main system state Unbalanced zones: disarmed
LE D
A t least one zone excluded: flashes slowly
S hows the occurred recognition of the key, or the condition
Green
in which it is possible to remove the key without varying the Flashes quickly
LE D
state of the electronic board outputs.

RS Functioning in Single Modality

In this modality the reader can be associated to one or more sectors and the various activation possibilities are proposed to the user. If the RS
reader is associated to more sectors, the visualisation of the LED will refer to the main state of all associated sectors, in case of arming
inhomogeneity, the reader will display a slow flashing of the red LEDS; if the visualisation of the LEDS were deactivated, the visualisations of
the state of a sector will be enabled after a "User-Key" will have been recognised.
The operations allowed are those enabled for that User-Key.
Visualisation of the system state
If the LEDS are normally enabled
• All LEDS always display the current state of the sectors associated to the reader
If the LEDS are normally disabled
• To enable visualisation:
• Near the key until the green LED flashes quickly;
• Immediately remove the key to have the visualisation of the state.
Arming/Disarming
To work an arming/disarming, near the Touch key in correspondence of the presetting signalled by the AVS logo:
1 - Near the key;
2 - Await the visualisation of the wanted modality, that will cyclically change; (A) —> (B) —> (C) —> (D) —> (A)
• By removing the key, the relative arming/disarming will be controlled.

RS Functioning in Immediate Modality

In this modality the control panel immediately works the functions associated to the User-Key without having to await the removal of the Touch.
With regard to arming, the User-Key will always perform that with maximum priority for which it is enabled or the disarming.
We recommend associating the key electronic board to only one sector and leave the visualisation of the LEDS always active.
Visualisation of the system state
If the LEDS are normally enabled
• All LEDS always display the current state of the system.
If the LEDS are normally disabled
• The system state will never be displayed.
Arming/Disarming
To work an arming/disarming, near the Touch key in correspondence of the presetting signalled by the AVS logo and the state change of the
control panel and the eventual activation of the OC outputs, if associated to the User-Key, will immediately activate.

- 47 -
PSTN Telephone - Technical features
The PSTN telephone is directly integrated on the control panel electronic board, its functioning is subject to the enabling, during
programming, of the PSTN telephone section.
Outdoor connections: • internal changed and derived telephone line
XTREAM 640 - Telephone numbers profiles: • n. 16 numbers, that can be associated to any alarm or technical event
XTREAM 64B-64-32B-32-6B-6 - Telephone numbers profiles: • n. 16 numbers, that can be associated to any alarm or technical event
Protocols: • FAST FORMAT with assignable channels - VOCAL - SIA 1st Level - SIA
2st Level - SIA_HAYES for hayes XM40Plus modem or AVS certificate
- CONTACT-ID
Time transmission of alarms • D2 Vocal mode 12 sec., M2 vocal mode 12 sec.
• D2 Contact ID 16 sec., M2 Contact ID 19 sec.
Type of interface • Proprietary interface compliant to ETSI ES 203-21 and RTTE
Type of transmission system • ATS2:SP2 (ex ATS2) or DP1
Operating mode • Pass-through
(Acknoweledgement)

Connection of the telephone line

AB : connection to the incoming telephone line, upstream of all eventual

system telephone appliances.
F6

F7

A'B': connection to the eventual system telephone appliances.

Note: fix the telephone cable using the appropriate turret.

L9 L10 T +SA +S C NC NO OUT IN A B A" B"
VLINEE VLINEE VPOT ALARM SPK MIC

Vocal sinthesis board XSINT (NO XTREAM640)

Protocols: VOCAL (mod.XSINT) •
Messages: •
The control panel enables the recording of forty (n. 40) customised vocal
messages for a total time of 120 seconds.
• Every individual message can have a maximum recording time of 30 seconds.
• These messages can then be used for communication of the control panel.
• A library of pre-recorded messages allows automatic and personalized
composition of alarm messages and different technical events
RTC Remote Telephone Control • Programmable activation for any single user profile
Tension: • Nominal tension: : 12 V
Working Temperature: • + 5 °C / + 40 °C
Consumption: • in quiet: 10 mA
• in transmission: 25 mA
XSINT-vocal synthesis board / insertion in the board
Plug-in connector Plug-in connector

OC
1
USB
J1 XSINT
J3 J1 J2 - Vocal Board -
J4

RESET

J5

S1

F3.15A F2 F3
A T 0.63A F 2A

J6
S2
F1

F6

F7

1. Completely switch off the power to the control panel

2. Place the holder nut at the “A” point on the control panel board
3. Insert the vocal synthesis board on the control panel board, introducing the J1 connector place in front of the board lower face with the
female J1 placed on the control panel board and the holder nut at the “A” point.
4. Press smoothly until its complete insertion.
5. Switch on the power to the control panel.

- 48 -
Xgsm - Technical features
XGSM is a device which, when used with the Xtream central control unit, allows you to make and receive calls via the GSM
mobile phone network.
Outdoor connections: • GSM Channel
Telephone numbers profiles: • n. 64 numbers, that can be associated to any alarm or technical event
Protocols: • FAST FORMAT with assignable channels - VOCAL - SIA - SIA 2nd level -
CONTACT-ID
RTC Remote Telephone Control - • programmable activation for every individual user profile
Voltage: • nominal voltage: 12 V
Environmental conditions: • + 5 °C / + 40 °C
Absorption: • quiet: 50 mA
• transmission: 400 mA
Electronic board sizes: • 93 x 15 x 60 mm
Declaration • The GSM modules used are compliant with R&TTE Directive 99/05/EC as
declared under the responsibility of the same manufacturer.
Tipo di sistema di tramissione • ATS2:SP2 (ex ATS2) or DP1
Modalità di funzionamento • Pass-through
(Acknoweledgement)

Installation

OC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TA FA
J3
S1 S2
USB

J5
S3

F5A F3.15A Fixing points of

RESET J6 the supports for
Xgsm
POWERALIM.

S4
SUPPLY
BATT.BATT.

J7
F1

F2

F3.15A F2A
F3.15A F3.15A F3.15A

J8
S6
S5

S7
F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

How to proceed
a. Completely disconnect the power supply, both network and battery.
b. Insert the appropriate plastic supports in the holes located on the control panel electronic board with the guides facing outwards.
c. Insert Xgsm electronic board on connector J5 making it slide inside the supports guides until it stops.
d. Break the presetting on the control panel housing.
e. Pass the antenna cable through the hole and insert it on the pre-settings as shown in the illustration.
f. Insert the antenna and fix by fastening the nut.
g. Connect the antenna cable to the GSM module.
h. Give power back to the control panel.

XTREAM 32-XTREAM 6
PLEASE , PLACE THE GSM ANTENNA 1 M FAR FROM THE CONTROL PANEL, USING THE
ANT250 EXTENSION CORD.
- 49 -
PSTN + GSM
If wanting both the telephone line and the GSM channel, connect the telephone line to the control panel and insert the Xgsm
electronic board on the control panel.
The calls management is subject to the type of interface chosen during programming.
If the system uses both the XGSM and the XGSM485, the latter is set by default. If the central control unit detects a
communication failure or a fault with the GSM network of the XGSM485, it automatically switches to the XGSM
module until the fault is corrected.
SIM Card Inclusion/Antenna Connector Input

Before inserting and removing the SIM Card, completely remove power from the control panel.
XGSM XGSM 4G
Antenna Antenna
Connector Connector
Input Input

SIM Card
position
SIM Card
MICRO
position SIM

XGSM: To insert the SIM Card: XGSM 4G: To insert the SIM Card:
1. Open the slide support 1. Insert MICRO SIM Card in the predisposition
2. Insert the SIM Card in the presetting respecting the direction indicated in the figure
3. Close the slide support until completely fixed

Disable all call transfers The warning of low SIM Card happens upon
Deactivate the answering machine reaching of the 8 Euros threshold.
Delete all SMS from the SIM

If the security PIN code of the SIM card is not disabled it must be entered in the corresponding input step of
the panel programming menu. If a wrong PIN code is entered, the panel will execute maximum two attempts
to activate the XGSM module then stop, and will keep it blocked until a new PIN code is programmed. An
error message will be displayed.

XGSM485 - XGSM485 PRO - Technical features

XGSM485 is a device which, when connected to the Xtream central control unit via the RS485 serial port ( B1 only), allows you
to make and receive calls via the GSM mobile phone network.
Outdoor connections: • GSM Channel
Telephone numbers profiles: • n° 64 n. 64 numbers, that can be associated to any alarm or technical event
Protocols: • FAST FORMAT with assignable channels, VOCALE, SIA, SIA 2nd level, CONTACT - ID,
SIA IP e CONTACT ID IP
RTC Remote Telephone Control - • programmable activation for every individual user profile
Pre-recorded words • 320

Customizable voice messages • max 40

Simulated line function • XGSM485 PRO
Voltage: • 12 V =
Supply tolerance • 11.5 V = - 15 V =
Absorption: • quiet: 160 mA
• trasmission: max 320 mA
Maximum battery allocable • 12 V = - 2,1 Ah
Dialling mode supported • multifrequency (DTMF)
Line signals generated • Dial tone: 425Hz cadenced (for Italy)
(Mod. XGSM485 Plus) • Busy Tone: (425Hz) cadenced
Electronic board sizes: • 121 x 75 x 23 mm
Environmental conditions: • Temperature -10°C / + 55°C - Umidity 95%
Declaration • The GSM modules are compliant to R & TTE Directive 99/05/EC as stated under its
responsibility the same manufacturer.
Time alarm transmission • D2 Vocal mode 12 sec., M2 vocal mode 12 sec.
• D2 SIA DC09 10 sec., M2 SIA DC09 10 sec.
Type of interface specification • Proprietary interface compliant to ETSI ES 203-21 and RTTE

- 50 -
XGSM485 e XGSM485 PRO - Technical features
XGSM485 has a vocal synthesis module that contains 320 pre-recorded words that can be used to customize a maximum of 40
voice messages.
If the device does not interface with the control unit, XGSM485 can make absence of interfacing calls to the control unit.
The XGSM485 can take two SIM Cards. If both are installed, the main SIM ( SIM A) is set by default and the system automatically
switches to the secondary SIM ( SIM B) in the event of any of the following:

• No credit
• GSM network down
• No GSM field
• GSM module operating faults

After switching to the Secondary SIM Card, the device sets a 240-minute timer for automatically switching back to the Main SIM
Card. The device may switch back the Main SIM Card earlier, however, if any of the above occurs to the second one in the
meantime.
If the system uses both the XGSM and the XGSM485, the latter is set by default. If the central control unit detects a
communication failure or a fault with the GSM network of the XGSM485, it automatically switches to the XGSM module
until the fault is corrected.
XGSM485 PRO can also connect to the switched line and to telephones downstream. In this case, when XGSM485 PRO
detects a decrease in line voltage (typically 48V), it connects any telephones downstream to its internal interface. In this
situation, XGSM485PRO emits the free line tone and waits for the number to be dialled (DTMF only). Once the number is
dialled (recognised when there is a longer than anticipated pause after the last digit of the DTMF) the mobile phone call
sequence begins, during which the interface generates connected or engaged signals.
The power of the ring generator of the device permits activation of a limited number of ringtones.
Thus, it is recommended that a minimum number of cascade-connected phones be connected . This number can
not be defined since consumption during the ring phase varies from model to model.

XGSM485 and XGSM485 PRO TERMINAL BOARD

ANT GSM • Antenna cable plug connector

BATT + / - • Output for battery connection
+ • Positive power supply
DA DB • Control unit connection serial
- • Negative power supply
TI • Anti-tampering input with reference to the negative. Using this input, the anti-tamper button on the board is NOT
considered.
TO • Anti-tampering input with reference to the negative. Using this input, the anti-tamper button on the board is
considered.
- • Negative power supply
X1 • Manages point input coupled to terminal board 1 and/or open collector coupled to output O.C.1
X2 • Manages point input coupled to terminal board 2 and/or open collector coupled to output O.C.2
X3 • Manages point input coupled to terminal board 3 and/or open collector coupled to output O.C.3
+ VOUT • Positive power supply output protected by self-resetting fuse. Max. 100 mA
- VOUT • Negative power supply output
AB • PSTN telephone line input (only XGSM485 Plus)
A' B' • Telephone line input (only XGSM485 Plus)
VARIOUS
SIM A • Main SIM card slot
SIM B • Secondary SIM card slot
RV1 • This is factory set, do not change
RV2 • This is factory set, do not change
LD1 • Red LED light "GSM module enabled": Off when module is disabled, On when module is regularly enabled
It turns on and off when there is a module malfunction.
LD2 • Greed LED light "GSM signal": LED lights are off if there is poor signalling, LD2 on if there is significant
LD3 signalling, LD2 and LD3 on if there is a good amount of signalling - LD2 - LD3 and LD4 on if there is excellent
LD4 signalling.
LD5 • Green LED light "Status indicator": Flashing if the GSM module is in stand-by and connected to the GSM
network; Fixed If the GSM module is interfaced; Off if the GSM module is not connected to the network (not working).
S2 • Used to Manually RESET EEPROM
S3 • Position 1-2: Tamper NOT ACTIVATED
• Position 2-3: Tamper ACTIVATED
USB • Connector for direct connection with Computer via USB
TAMPER • Anti-tampering button, refer to terminals TI and TO

- 51 -
XGSM485 Installation - Warnings:
XGSM485 should be positioned at least 1m away from sources of
electromagnetic interference (ex. transformers, power supplies, etc) and at A
the same time it should be the same distance away from other equipment that
can suffer from the electromagnetic radiation of the GSM, including the control
panel itself and its peripherals.
The XGSM485 module can be installed using the mod. CONT SX box or, in
B
alternative, using the mod. CONT SATW box in case a backup battery is needed
(max. 12V 2.1Ah)
If mod. CONT SX is used, place the electronic board as indicated in the figure
on the right
If mod. CONT SATW is used, please follow the instructions contained in the
XGSM485 manual.
Warnings:
• Do not place the antenna in metal containers.
• Do not place the antenna near radio devices, whether they are transmitters or receivers.
• Before mounting the container, check the GSM signal level.
How to proceed:
a. Both the battery and mains power supply must be off.
b. Break up the fitting on the CONT SX container.
c. Pass the antenna cable through the hole
d. Fix the XGSM485 to the CONT SX container
e. Insert the antenna and fix it by tightening the nut firmly.
f. Connect the antenna cable to the GSM module.
g. Switch on the control unit power supply.
B
- A: Antenna mounting set up
- B: Container mounting set up
To insert the SIM Card: Disable all call transfers
1. Open the slide support
Deactivate the answering machine
2. Insert the SIM Card in the
presetting Delete all SMS from the SIM
3. Close the slide support until
completely fixed
Before inserting and removing the SIM
SIM CARD position Card, completely remove power from the
control panel.

If the security PIN code of the SIM card is not disabled it must be entered in the corresponding input step of
the panel programming menu. If a wrong PIN code is entered, the panel will execute maximum two attempts
to activate the XGSM module then stop, and will keep it blocked until a new PIN code is programmed. An
error message will be displayed.
TAMPER XGSM485 and XGSM485 PRO
USB
External TAMPER between TO and - (negative):
S3

1 with this connection, opening of both the EXTERNAL TAMPER and the TAMPER BUTTON
TAMPER TI TO on the board are signalled.
Jumper S3 in position 2-3
TAMPER

USB
S3

1 External TAMPER between TI and - (negative):

TAMPER TI TO
with this connection, only opening of the EXTERNAL TAMPER is signalled.
Jumper S3 in position 2-3
TAMPER

USB
S3

1 Bridge between TO and - (negative):

TAMPER
with this connection, only opening of the TAMPER BUTTON on the board is signalled.
TI TO
Jumper S3 in position 2-3

With Jumper S3 in position 1-2 the TAMPER is disabled .

Terminals X1, X2, X3 operation (only XGSM485PRO)

The terminals X1, X2 and X3 can be configured as inputs for zones 1, 2 and 3 with single balancing (alarm only) or double
balancing (alarm and tamper), and as Open Collector outputs 1, 2 and 3 with negative reference; or both configurations at the
same time (the line input is directly unbalanced by activation of the relative O.C.).

- 52 -
 Checking Credit and Expiry of the SIM Card for XGSM - XGSM485 and XGSM485PRO
Credit Check
This check is carried out cyclically regardless of the use of the GSM, or when the GSM module carries out operations using
credit.
Upon reaching of the 8 Euros threshold, the keypad displays the LOW CREDIT strip and, if the calls for have been enabled in
the telephone "associate events", GSM Events 1 the telephone calls are made.
Prof. : nnnnnnnn

SIM Card Expiry Date Setting

This operation is necessary every time a SIM is recharged or is activated for the first time, so that the control panel can notify,
if enabled, of the SIM Card expiry date.
We recommend setting the notice in advance compared to the same expiry date, to avoid blocks by the operator.

It is possible to display the residue credit, the level of GSM signal and vary the SIM Card expiry date by following the
procedure described in the User manual.

Recording of vocal messages

Depending on the equipment used (XTREAM640, XSINT and XGSM485) it is possible the recording of forty (n. 40) customised
vocal messages for a total time of 120 seconds.
Every individual message can have a maximum recording time of 30 seconds.
These messages can then be used for communication of the control panel.
RECORDING WITH CONTROL PANEL PROCEDURE (XTREAM640 - XSINT):
To carry out recording, enable the RTC function and call the control panel on PSTN line.
Upon answering of the control panel enter the installer code and follow the vocal indications.
Should the PSTN telephone line not be available, simulate it using a switchboard.

Procedure:
1- Enable the PSTN telephone
Enabling PSTN
YES
2- Enable the RTC function
N. reply rings
3- Call the control panel >0 (0 .. 16)
4- Wait for the "enter code" control panel reply
5- Enter the installer code

Recording:
6- Press key (1) - await control panel communication where the number of the message we are about to record is shown.
7- Start speaking after having pressed key (#), (
8- The recording automatically interrupts if you do not speak for more than 2 seconds.
Note: The various messages will be recorded one after the other and are numbered during recording in increasing order from
1 to 40 and are linked to the telephone memory locations from 376 onwards.

Commands:
[1] REC: Activates recording
[0] RESET: Activates the deletion of all messages
[3] TEL. OFF: ends the telephone communication
[5] PLAY: Plays the current message
[4] <: Goes back by one or more recorded messages
[6] >: Goes forward by one or more recorded messages
[#] ENTER: It is the confirmation command without which many of the other commands are not carried out

Deletion:
Note: it is not possible to delete an individual recorded message; the procedure, once activated, deletes all messages recorded
on the customisable memory.

Recording with XWIN software procedure (XTREAM640 - XSINT - XGSM485):

To record, follow the procedure with Xwin software and then transfer the telephone files in control panel and / or in the form
XGSM485 always using the same procedure used for programming.

- 53 -
Vocal messages
XTREAM has the possibility of forwarding specific vocal messages depending on the arisen events.
These messages can be technical or alarm and/or to reset the inputs.

Technical messages relate to situations like power supply anomalies, the absence of the telephone line or other, and are
composed automatically using the vocabulary of pre-recorded words shown in the Telephone Table; normally associated and
placed before these messages, is the welcoming message where the installer usually records the address of the establishment
where XTREAM is installed and, if the sectors are enabled, the message relating to the event belonging sector.
These messages (Welcoming and Sector Message) can be enabled or not to transmission for every individual profile of telephone
numbers.

Zones automatic communications

Alarm/zones reset messages relate to the opening or closing of the inputs.
The opening/closing communications of the inputs are normally automatically composed by XTREAM in relation to the type of
line set during SIA coding (ex. theft line or gas line etc.), to the zone number (1-640); normally associated and placed before
this communication, is the welcoming messages and, if the sectors are enabled, the message relating to the event belonging
sector.
These messages (Welcoming and Sector Message) can be enabled or not to transmission for every individual telephone
number.

Zones customised communications

Should it be necessary to customise the XTREAM communications relating to the zones, by creating an additional message to
the standard one, it is possible to access the pre-recorded vocabulary and enter the code of the word in the "Vocal word 1-2-3-
4" steps, as shown in the " Telephone Table" inside the telephone menu.

Zones par.
ENT éê

Iss. Al / Rest. Iss. zone coding Iss. Telephone zone Iss. zone num.
YES YES YES YES

Vocal word 1 Vocal word 2 Vocal word 3 Vocal word 4

0 (max. 511) 0 (max. 511) 0 (max. 511) 0 (max. 511)

For every individual input it is possible to customise the communication by imposing the control panel to "automatically"
communicate or not the words and have another 4 extra telephones available ("Vocal word 1-2-3-4").

Welcoming message communication

The welcoming message is part of the 40 customisable by the installer and can be composed by:
1- Recorded welcoming message (usually the ES system reference: at the offices of AVS Electronics S.p.A. in via Valsugana n. etc.)
2- Enabling or not of the sector reference (should the system be divided into more sectors, it would also be useful, in the vocal communication,
to have the sector reference in the communication).
3- Additional optional message (should the system be divided per sectors, it would also be useful, in the vocal communication, to have the
sector detail in the communication).

A message could be composed as follows:

"1" at the office of AVS Electronics S.p.A. in via Valsugana n. .. etc" - " 2" sector 3" - "3" production " - " etc. etc."

The enabling of the communication message happens using the programming step "account code/messages" from the telephone
menu.

Presentaz. word Under "Phone number > Associate Sector > Sector #", introducing a value different from zero (0) in the
0 (0 .. 499) “WORD” programming menu, it is possible to activate the vocal announcement of the plant introducing
message.

word sector Presentation word :

0 (0 .. 499) Introducing a value different from zero (0) will communicate the associated word (see word table).
Sector word :
Emis. num. sect. Introducing a value different from zero (0) will communicate the associated word (see word table),
NO linked to the associated sector.
Announcement of the SECTOR number:
Choosing “YES” will communicate “sector number” words.

Presentaz. word Example :

376 (0 .. 499) · The introducing message recorded in the memory place n° 376, which corresponds to the 1st
recorded message, is enable.
word sector
· The additional word n° 117 (garage) is enable
117 (0 .. 499) · The “sector number” word is enable
Emis. num. sect.
SI

- 54 -
Telephone Table - 1st
To every Telephone Code corresponds a certain default pre-recorded vocabulary that can be used to customise the vocal
messages of the control panel.

Phone Vocal Phone Vocal Phone Vocal Phone Vocal

Code communication Code communication Code communication Code communication

1 A • 81 DISARMING • 46 GATE • 178 NINETY_ONE

23 ABSENT • 161 DOCTOR • 118 GAZ • 171 NO
5 ACCESS • 208 DOOR • 125 GROUP • 172 NO
15 ACCOUNTANCY • 243 DOWNLOADING • 126 GSM • 174 NORTH
27 ACTIVATED • 104 EAST • 43 HEAT • 173 NOT
28 ACTIVATION • 190 EIGHT • 42 HEATER • 180 NOVEMBER
26 ACTIVE • 77 EIGHTEEN • 235 HEATING • 181 NUMBER
7 AGGRESSION • 187 EIGHTY • 12 HIGH • 191 OCTOBER
62 AIR_CONDITIONER • 188 EIGHTY_EIGHT • 13 HIGH • 183 OFF
11 ALARM • 189 EIGHTY_ONE • 92 HIGH • 273 OFFICE
65 ALLOWED • 89 ELECTRICAL • 276 HIGHER • 184 ON
88 AND • 90 ELECTRICAL • 128 HOME • 17 OPEN
16 ANOMALY • 91 ELECTROVALVE • 186 HOUR • 18 OPEN
19 APRIL • 93 EMERGENCY • 49 HUNDRED • 185 OPERATION
20 ARCHIVE • 2 ENABLED • 130 IN • 115 OUT
21 AREA • 110 END • 132 INCLUDED • 216 PANEL
3 ARMED • 94 ENTER • 133 INERTIAL • 193 PANIC
4 ARMED • 135 ENTER • 134 INPUT • 194 PARKING
136 ARMED • 14 ENVIRONMENTAL • 138 INSTALLER • 197 PARTIAL
24 ASSOCIATED • 98 ESCAPE • 139 INTERFERENCE • 198 PARTIALIZED
25 ATTIC • 275 EXCEEDED • 140 INTERNAL • 196 PARTITION
8 AUGUST • 99 EXCLUDED • 141 INTRUSION • 261 PARTITION
29 AUTOMATIC • 100 EXCLUDED • 142 IRRIGATION • 200 PERCENT
30 AUTOTEST • 102 EXCLUDED • 119 JANUARY • 203 PERIMETER
84 AVAILABLE • 101 EXCLUSION • 148 JULY • 202 PERIMETRICAL
33 B • 103 EXECUTED • 123 JUNE • 201 PERIPHERICAL
35 BALCONY • 97 EXHAUSTED • 51 KEY • 206 PLUS
36 BARRIER • 241 EXPIRATION • 71 KITCHEN • 209 PORTER'S_LODGE
249 BASEMENT • 240 EXTENSION_BOARD • 143 LABORATORY • 210 POWER
34 BATHROOM • 105 EXTERNAL • 204 LANDING • 211 PREALARM
39 BATTERY • 106 FAILED • 146 LEVEL • 212 PRESSURE
160 BEDROOM • 107 FALSE • 147 LIGHT • 214 PRODUCT
40 BLOCK • 108 FALSE • 145 LINE • 215 PRODUCTION
116 BURGLAR • 109 FEBRUARY • 22 LISTENING • 69 PROGRESS
41 C • 223 FIFTEEN • 268 LIVING_ROOM • 207 PUMP
48 CASE • 224 FIFTH • 37 LOW • 225 RADIO
47 CELLAR • 52 FIFTY • 38 LOW • 242 RANGE
45 CHILDREN_ROOM • 53 FIFTY_EIGHT • 233 LUMBER_ROOM • 228 RE_INCLUSION
56 CLEAR • 54 FIFTY_ONE • 230 MAINS • 137 READER
57 CODE • 112 FINISHED • 80 MANAGEMENT • 231 REAR
58 COMMAND • 114 FIRE • 158 MARCH • 232 RECOGNIZED
59 COMMERCIAL • 131 FIRE • 159 MASKING • 234 RESTORE
60 COMMON • 213 FIRST • 151 MAY • 227 ROBBERY
61 COMMUNICATION • 55 FIVE • 162 MEMORY • 251 ROLLING_SHUTTER
66 CONTACT • 10 FLOODING • 82 MESSAGE • 44 ROOM
67 CONTROL • 199 FLOOR • 165 MILE • 237 ROOM
50 CONTROL_PANEL • 205 FLOOR • 163 MINUS • 236 SATURDAY
68 CORRIDOR • 217 FORTY • 154 MISSED • 244 SECOND
70 CREDIT • 218 FORTY_EIGHT • 152 MISSING • 262 SECTION
72 D • 219 FORTY_ONE • 153 MISSING • 265 SEISMIC
127 DAMAGE • 222 FOUR • 96 MISTAKE • 248 SELECT
121 DAY • 221 FOURTEEN • 167 MODE • 260 SEPTEMBER
74 DECEMBER • 220 FOURTH • 149 MONDAY • 259 SEVEN
124 DEGREES • 64 FREEZER • 169 MULTIPLE • 76 SEVENTEEN
229 DEPARTEMENT • 63 FREEZING • 182 NEW • 256 SEVENTY
250 DETECTOR • 113 FRONT • 175 NIGHT • 257 SEVENTY_EIGHT
79 DIAL • 117 GARAGE • 179 NINE • 258 SEVENTY_ONE
238 DINING_ROOM • 120 GARDEN • 75 NINETEEN • 170 SHOP
271 DISARMED • 156 GARRET • 176 NINETY • 144 SIDE
272 DISARMED • 267 GARRET • 177 NINETY_EIGHT • 246 SIGNAL

- 55 -
Telephone Table - 2nd
To every Telephone Code corresponds a certain default pre-recorded vocabulary that can be used to customise the vocal
messages of the control panel.

Phome Vocal Phome Vocal Phome Phome Vocal

Vocal communication
Code communication Code communication Code Code communication

44 ROOM • 245 SIXTEEN • 226 TEENAGERS • 312 TWENTY_EIGHT

237 ROOM • 255 SIXTH • 287 TELEPHONE • 313 TWENTY_ONE
236 SATURDAY • 252 SIXTY • 286 TELEPHONE_CALLS • 87 TWO
244 SECOND • 253 SIXTY_EIGHT • 288 TEMPERATURE • 306 USER
262 SECTION • 254 SIXTY_ONE • 78 TEN • 307 VALUE
265 SEISMIC • 274 SOUTH • 291 TERRACE • 311 VENTILATION
248 SELECT • 31 START • 289 THERMOSTAT • 314 VERANDA
260 SEPTEMBER • 73 STORE • 292 THIRD • 317 VOLUMETRIC
259 SEVEN • 83 STORE_ROOM • 296 THIRTEEN • 195 WALL
76 SEVENTEEN • 86 SUNDAY • 297 THIRTY • 150 WAREHOUSE
256 SEVENTY • 277 SUPERVISION • 298 THIRTY_EIGHT • 32 WARNING
257 SEVENTY_EIGHT • 9 SUPPLYING • 299 THIRTY_ONE • 318 WATCHDOG
258 SEVENTY_ONE • 270 SURVIVAL • 166 THOUSAND • 6 WATER
170 SHOP • 129 SYSTEM • 295 THREE • 168 WAY
144 SIDE • 266 SYSTEM • 269 THRESHOLD • 164 WEDNESDAY
246 SIGNAL • 278 TAMPER • 122 THURSDAY • 192 WEST
263 SIM • 155 TAMPERING • 294 TOTAL • 111 WINDOW
264 SIREN • 282 TAVERN • 157 TUESDAY • 95 WRONG
239 SITTING_ROOM • 283 TECHNICAL • 85 TWELVE • 319 ZERO
247 SIX • 284 TECHNICAL • 310 TWENTY • 320 ZONE

Telephone Table - recorded messages

The vocal messages recorded by the installer are memorised in control panel and correspond to the telephone codes shown in
the table.

Phone Phone
Customised message recording by the installer Customised message recording by the installer
Code Code

376 Message 1: • 396 Message 21:

377 Message 2: • 397 Message 22:
378 Message 3: • 398 Message 23:
379 Message 4: • 399 Message 24:
380 Message 5: • 400 Message 25:
381 Message 6: • 401 Message 26:
382 Message 7: • 402 Message 27:
383 Message 8: • 403 Message 28:
384 Message 9: • 404 Message 29:
385 Message 10: • 405 Message 30:
386 Message 11: • 406 Message 31:
387 Message 12: • 407 Message 32:
388 Message 13: • 408 Message 33:
389 Message 14: • 409 Message 34:
390 Message 15: • 410 Message 35:
391 Message 16: • 411 Message 36:
392 Message 17: • 412 Message 37:
393 Message 18: • 413 Message 38:
394 Message 19: • 414 Message 39:
395 Message 20: • 415 Message 40:

- 56 -
RTC ACTIVATION BY A CALL FROM THE CONTROL PANEL
It is possible to activate the RTC function during an alarm telephone communication, by pressing key (7) after the two-tone
signal. Subsequently, the control panel will reply - ENTER CODE -. Now follow the indications shown in the paragraph below.
USER RTC ACTIVATION
1. Compose, using a telephone in DTMF (multifrequency or "tones"), the telephone number where the control panel XTREAM is installed.
2. Upon reaching of the number of "Reply Rings" set for PSTN calls and at first ring for GSM, a synthesized voice will say - ENTER CODE
-.
• For calls through PSTN , if an answering machine is included, the overlapping can be activated:
a. Compose the telephone number and let it ring once.
b. Put the receiver back and call again, at least after 8 seconds and not after 20 seconds from the first ring.
c. The control panel will reply at first ring, - ENTER CODE -, or, only on GSM channel, "ENTER COMMAND" if the recognition of incoming
number procedure is enabled.
3. Slowly enter the User Code, which must be enabled for RTC functions; a synthesized voice will say - WELCOME TO THE REMOTE
MANAGEMENT SYSTEM -; followed by - LIST AVAILABLE COMMANDS -
4. The various functions can now be activated.
DTMF Commands
The commands are directly activated by pressing the keys on the telephone keypad. The DTMF commands described below
are active or not, depending on the profile to which the user is associated.
ATTENTION: there is an interdiction time of two minutes between an RTC call and the subsequent one that doubles if the code
inserted in the previous call is incorrect.

• [0] OFF ZONE: activates the possibility of excluding/including the input zones of the control panel from n. 1 to n.
640. Example: [0] + (zone number) + (#).
• [1] ESC: sector change.
• [2] MEM: listen to the events memory
• [3] TEL OFF: causes the interruption of the telephone communication.
• [5] OFF: causes the disarming of the control panel - CONTROL PANEL DISARMED -
• [6] O.C.: activates the possibility of controlling the Open Collector outputs from n. 1 to n. 250;
activates only the O.C. programmed as "O.C.User/Sect" by users enabled to the function "Enab. OC User".
Example: to control the O.C. n. 2; subsequently press keys [6] and [2] followed by [#] or [6] [0] [2].
• [7] TEST: supplies information on the state of the control panel.
• [8] PART. ARM.: access is gained to a sub menu dedicated to the partial armings;
[1] to arm in HOME / [2] to arm in ZONE / [3] to arm in PERIMETER
• [9] ON: causes the arming of the control panel in modality ON - CONTROL PANEL ARMED ON-
• [#] ENTER: it is pressed to confirm a data introduced by the keypad.
• [*] STOP: it is pressed to interrupt a function (ex: the list of the events memory).

RTC USER with recognition of incoming number

This function enables the caller to communicate directly without having to enter the User code; active only
for calls on GSM channel, therefore the XGSM Kit is necessary. This function happens only if during
programming the telephone number from which the RTC operation is associated to a User enabled for
RTC and to automatic "RTC validation".
INSTALLER RTC ACTIVATION

• [0] RESET: Activates the deletion of all messages

• [1] REC: Activates recording
• [3] TEL. OFF: ends the telephone communication
• [5] PLAY: Plays the current message
• [4] <: Goes back by one or more recorded messages
• [6] >: Goes forward by one or more recorded messages
• [7] >: Enables reprogramming with XWIN through the GSM line of Central
• [#] ENTER: It is the confirmation command without which many of the other commands are not
carried out

- 57 -
Outgoing SMS Management
XTREAM has the possibility of forwarding specific SMS messages depending on the arisen events.
These messages can be technical or alarm and/or to reset the inputs.

Technical messages relate to situations which power supply, battery or other anomalies, and are automatically composed by
using a library of pre-recorded SMS
Zone messages relate to signals of the zone inputs for alarm, reset and exclusion communications.
The zone SMS are composed by the sequence of the 4 standard words to which the zone strip is added.

Zones par.
ENT éê

Iss. Al / Rest. Iss. zone coding Iss. Telephone zone Iss. zone num.
YES YES YES YES

Incoming SMS Management

It is possible to request the execution of remote controls
Type Syntax Example from the control panel by using suitably coded SMS.
The same operations envisioned for the vocal RTC
oc activation #act number_oc# #act 13# connection can be requested.
oc deactivation #deact number_oc# #deact 13#
The incoming SMS messages are carried out only if:
control panel arming #arm [on|ho|zo|pe] sector# #arm ho 2# - the sender telephone number is associated to a user
- the associated user is RTC enabled with automatic validation
control panel disarming #dis sector# #dis 2# depending on the telephone number
- are syntactically correct
zone exclusion #byp number_zone# #byp 36# - request actions for which the user is enabled

zone inclusion #unbyp number_zone# #unbyp 36# Commands List

sector state request #stat sector N# #stat sector 2#

More commands can be placed in line in the same SMS, as
long as:
sectors state request #stat sectors# #stat sectors#
zone state request - the total length does not exceed 43 digits
Referred to: - up to 5 commands in each sms
#stat zone N# #stat zone 2# - the commands are separated by #
Open/Tamper/Excluded/-
Supervision
- every command is preceded and followed by #
zones state request #stat zones# #stat zones#
The excess spaces are deleted
output state request #stat output N# #stat output 5#
Example of correct sequences
outputs state request #stat outputs# #stat outputs# #excl 12#excl 15#arm on 2#zones state#
system state request
Referred to: technical #stat system# #stat system# Example of INCORRECT sequences
anomalies #excl 12#arm on 2#zones state
excl 12 arm on 2#zones state##
calls block #stop# #stop#

All commands and status requests provide for the sending of a reply message

Example:
The command #system state# sends, in one or more SMS, also including:
- SIM CARD residue credit

The "zones" and "exclusions" sections contain the number list of the relative zones (number sequence separated by spaces).
An SMS is sent; every section is contained in only one SMS, but an SMS can contain more sections.
Should the individual section have such a size to exceed the max limit envisioned, the message is stopped and ended with
suspension dots.
Example: #zone 1 2 23 open ...#
In this case, the exceeding parameters are not communicated.

- 58 -
 Sirens
Outdoor self-powered sirens for security systems.
C ITY (X) LED Plus TS85 V LED Plus
Technical Features TS85 P LED Plus
CITY CAR BON LED Plus TS85 X LED Plus
Power supply 9.6 V = / 15 V = 9,6 V = / 15 V =
Minimum operating voltage 9,5V (battery charging not warrantied – not compliant with EN50131 requirements)
12,8 V (for correct battery charging - compliant with EN50131 requirements)
Low voltage threshold 10,5 V =
Rated supply voltage 13,8 V =
Max. consumption in charging from CP 250 mA
Consumption in alarm from C P 100 mA
Quiescent current 40 mA
Sound pressure level dB (A) at 3 meters 105 dB (A) - D epending on modulation
Siren frequency HZ between 1300 and 1750
Allocable battery 12V - 2,3 Ah
Degree of protection IP34
Operating temperature da - 25°C a + 55°C
Container size (D XLXH) in mm 80 x 200 x 250 110 x 235 x 290 110 x 235 x 290
Weight in Kg 1,3 2,0 2,1
Performance level EN50131 - 4 2 2 3
Certification body Telefication

Board
T TAMPER output with positive safety, with Contact Normally Closed, capacity 3 A - 24 V = Is activated
T by the Anti-removal (Anti-opening and Anti-tearing) system connected to connector J4, the Lack of
Power supply from the control unit and from the Anti-foam, Anti-perforation and Over temperature
probes. The relay remains in alarm status as long as the cause generating the activation persists.
The Anti-foam, Anti-perforation and the Over temperature signals can be deactivated through
programming.
For the configuration refer to the FUNCTIONS TABLE.
B Block Input. With positive present, the sound of the Cone is inhibited.
FA Fault signalling output. It provides a transistorized negative, max. 50 mA, which is lost in the case
of malfunctioning of the Cone, Cone handling circuit, Flash, LEDs. In the case of the Siren battery
is Low or Faulty. Loss of remote power source, loss integrity of trigger command interconnection.
LED Supplementary control input. For the configuration refer to the FUNCTIONS TABLE.
+SA / DB ALARM Input. When this input is unbalanced, the Cone and the Flash is activated.
For the configuration refer to the FUNCTIONS TABLE.
STC / DA CONTROL UNIT STATUS Input. For the configuration refer to the FUNCTIONS TABLE.
- Negative power supply
+ Power Positive and Siren Battery Recharge. 13.8 V power supply =
S1 Not used
J1 Cone and Siren Battery connection connector
J2 - LED LED and FLASH connection connector
J3 - FOAM Optional Anti-foam connection connector - S85 mode
J4 - TAMPER Anti-removal system connection connector
PB1 Programming button
PB2 Programming button
Connections

The connections are fixed for FA, B and TT and vary for STC, +SA and AUX based on the configuration.
Example 1. Connections with default parameters (Steps 1 = 3, 2 = 2, 9 = 1 of the Functions Table)
CONTROL
UNIT • + / -: Siren power supply
TERMINALS
• STC: System status (ON/OFF) signalling input, by closing it on the Negative the Red Status Led is turned on
• +SA: Alarm Control Unit Input, with Positive present the siren does not sound.
• LED: Auxiliary signalling input, by closing it on the Negative, the Greed Status Led is turned on

SIREN
TERMINALS
Example 2. Connections with balanced inputs with resistance (Steps 1 = 5, 2 = 6, 9 = 1 of the Functions Table)
CONTROL
UNIT • + / -: Siren power supply
TERMINALS
Gold • STC: System status (ON/OFF) signalling input, by balancing on the Negative with a 4k7 Ohm resistance,
Red
the Red Status Led is turned on
Purple
Yellow • +SA: Alarm Control Unit Input, with Positive balancing the siren does not sound.

SIREN
• LED: Auxiliary signalling input, by balancing on the Negative with a 4k7 Ohm resistance, the Green
TERMINALS Status Led is turned on

- 59 -
Functioning

Alarm: SA input unbalancing activates the Main Sound and the Flash; LED input unbalancing, if programmed with Value 2 or 3, the Alternative
Sound and the Flash is activated (see LED Input in the Functions Table).
Encoding of the alarms: if enabled, it blocks the Sound and the Flash after 5 total balances within 24 hours of SA input and LED input, if Step
9 = 2 or 3 (refer to Encoding of Alarms and LED Inputs in the Functions Table).
Siren programming
STAND BY
Unbalance the siren Tamper input, the GREEN LED and the RED LED alternately flash with a reduction in brightness, and the STC and LED
inputs are inhibited.
In this phase, the Green and red LEDs luminous intensity can be adjusted, when the PB1 button is briefly pressed, the intensity of the LEDs
increases and when the PB2 button is pressed, the intensity of the LEDs decreases.
ACCESSING PROGRAMMING
• from the STAND BY phase, press PB1 or PB2 for at least 3 seconds (GREEN LED, RED LED and FLASH are steady)
• as soon as the FLASH turns off, release the button
• the first programming step of the 13 possible steps is displayed (1 flash of the RED LED light, followed by “X” flashes of the GREEN LED)
PROGRAMMING
• each time the PB2 button is pressed, a Programming step of the available 13 steps advances sequentially.
• the Step selected is shown by the flashing of the RED LED (see NUMBER OF RED IMPULSES in the Functions Table)
Examples: To move from Step 2 to Step 8, press the PB2 button 6 times
To move from Step 11 to Step 6, press the PB2 button 8 times
• once the Step to be verified is selected, the Value of the set programming of the 8 possible values is shown by the flashing of the GREED
LED (see NUMBER OF GREEN IMPULSES in the Functions Table).
The displaying is repeated until one of the two buttons PB1 or PB2 is pressed
• use the PB1 button to modify the value of the selected step while taking into consideration that every time the button is pushed the programming
sequentially advances one value (see NUMBER OF GREEN IMPULSES in the Functions Table)
Examples: To move from value 1 to value 4, press the button PB1 3 times
To move from value 6 to value 2, press the button PB1 4 times
• the flashing of the green LED (see NUMBER OF GREEN IMPULSES in the Functions Table) indicate the Value selected that is saved
instantly.
EXITING THE PROGRAMMING
Exiting the programming can be done in one of two ways:
• balancing the siren Tamper input
• keeping the PB2 pressed until the alternate flashing between red and green LEDs
• unbalancing the SA input or the LED input, if Step 9 = 2 or 3, without having modified at least one parameter.
In this case, the siren activates its regular alarm cycle.
• for Time out after 10 minutes from the last operation
- If variations of configuration are executed, when exiting the programming it is necessary to unbalance and then rebalance the SA input
or the LED input, if Step 9 = 2 or 3 to restore the correct operation of the siren.
- The entry and subsequent exiting from programming, reset the Faults, the Alarms Count and the Timers relative to the Static and
Dynamic battery testing. Moreover, during the Programming the Anti-vibration Tamper and the Fault signalling are inhibited and the
signalling of the Over temperature, Anti-foam and +S.A. (if at least one parameter has not been changed) STC and LED control inputs
remain activated.

Signalling of Memories and Faults

• In step 13 of the Programming it is possible to see the details of the Fault and Tamper Memories.
• More contemporary events are displayed one after another.
• Press the PB1 Button to delete the Fault and Tamper Memories.

Signalling Fault and Tamper memories

(Signals visible at Step 13 of the Functions Table)
1 Siren battery low
2 Siren battery faulty
3 Not assigned
4 Anti-foam Probe input alarm (optional)
5 Thermal Probe Alarm
NUMBER OF 6 Anti-perforation Probe Alarm
GREEN LED
7 Lack of Power from the Control Unit
IMPULSES
8 Cone management circuit fault
9 Cone fault
10 Flash fault
11 Accelerometer fault
12 Green LED fault
13 Red LED fault
The Anti-tear/Anti-opening Tamper Alarm is not signalled in the memory
but only with the activation of the T T output
DURING THE VIEWING OF THE FAULT AND TAMPER MEMORIES
IT IS POSSIBLE TO EXECUTE THE OVERALL DELETION BY PRESSING BUTTON PB1
!!!WARNING!!!
THE SIGNALLING WILL CONTINUE FOR THE FAULTS AND TAMPERS STILL PRESENT AFTER
EXECUTING THE RESET

- 60 -
 HP Sirens
Outdoor self-powered sirens for security systems
C ITY (X) LED HP TS85 V LED HP
Technical Features TS85 P LED HP
CITY CAR BON LED HP TS85 X LED HP
Power supply 9,6 V = / 15 V =
Minimum operating voltage 9,5 V (battery charging not warrantied – not compliant with EN50131 requirements)
12,8 V (for correct battery charging - compliant with EN50131 requirements)
Low voltage threshold
Rated supply voltage 13,8 V =
Max. consumption in charging from CP 400 mA
Consumption in alarm from C P 100 mA
Quiescent current 40 mA
Sound pressure level dB (A) at 3 meters 105 dB (A) - D epending on modulation
Siren frequency HZ da 1300 - a 1750
Allocable battery 12V - 2,3 Ah
Degree of protection IP34
Operating temperature between - 25°C and + 55°C
Container size (D XLXH) in mm 80 x 200 x 250 110 x 235 x 290 110 x 235 x 290
Weight in Kg 1,3 2,0 2,1
Performance level EN50131 - 4 2 2 3
Certification body Telefication

Board

Connections

CONTROL
UNIT The connections are fixed:
TERMINALS

+ / -: Siren power supply

stc/DA: RS485 (tx-rx)
+sa/DB: RS485 (tx-rx)
SIREN
TERMINALS

+SA / DB RS485 Connection

STC / DA RS485 Connection
- Negative power supply
+ Power Positive and Siren Battery Recharge. 13.8 V power supply =
NOTE: when the rempote main drop, the siren start to sound.
S1 Not used
J1 Cone and Siren Battery connection connector
J2 - LED LED and FLASH connection connector
J3 - FOAM Optional Anti-foam connection connector - S85 mode
J4 - TAMPER Anti-removal system connection connector
PB1 Programming button
PB2 Programming button

Functioning
Leds: in accordance with the programming of the central.
Allarm: in accordance with the programming of the central.
Encoding of the alarms: Encoding of the alarms: if enabled, it blocks the Sound and the Flash after 5 alarms within 24 hours.
Note: if there is no power from the control panel, the siren will sound for the time set.

- 61 -
Siren programming
STAND BY
Unbalance the siren Tamper input, the GREEN LED and the RED LED alternately flash with a reduction in brightness, and the STC and LED
inputs are inhibited.
In this phase, the Green and red LEDs luminous intensity can be adjusted, when the PB1 button is briefly pressed, the intensity of the LEDs
increases and when the PB2 button is pressed, the intensity of the LEDs decreases.
ACCESSING PROGRAMMING
• from the STAND BY phase, press PB1 or PB2 for at least 3 seconds (GREEN LED, RED LED and FLASH are steady)
• as soon as the FLASH turns off, release the button
• the first programming step of the 13 possible steps is displayed (1 flash of the RED LED light, followed by “ X” flashes of the GREEN LED)
PROGRAMMING
• each time the PB2 button is pressed, a Programming step of the available 13 steps advances sequentially.

NUMBER OF GREEN LED IMPULSES

FUNCTIONS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SERIAL Serial
Extension
Extension SIREN Siren - - - -
(no info sat)
XTREAM HIGH SPEED
OPERATING
1 Value 1: the siren is managed by the central like a extension connected in RS485
NUMBER MODE
Value 2: the siren is managed by the central like a extension connected in RS485, but there is no information of “tamper
OF
satellite No. xx and low battery Satellite No. xx
RED LED
Value 3: the siren is managed by control panel as RS485 siren (look at dedicated programming steps)
IMPULSES
1 2 2 4 5 6 7 8
SIREN Bear in mind that there cannot be more key blocks with the same address, otherwise they will stop working and the
2
ADDRESS control panel will activate a Tamper alarm. In this case, to reset functioning: a) give the key blocks the correct addresses;
b) remove and give power back to all key blocks.
The default parameters are shown in BLUE BLOCK LETTERS
The Values selected are confirmed at the exit of the Programming Step

• the Step selected is shown by the flashing of the RED LED (see NUMBER OF RED IMPULSES in the Functions Table)
Examples: To move from Step 2 to Step 8, press the PB2 button 6 times
To move from Step 11 to Step 6, press the PB2 button 8 times
• once the Step to be verified is selected, the Value of the set programming of the 8 possible values is shown by the flashing of the GREED
LED (see NUMBER OF GREEN IMPULSES in the Functions Table).
The displaying is repeated until one of the two buttons PB1 or PB2 is pressed
• use the PB1 button to modify the value of the selected step while taking into consideration that every time the button is pushed the programming
sequentially advances one value (see NUMBER OF GREEN IMPULSES in the Functions Table)
Examples: To move from value 1 to value 4, press the button PB1 3 times
To move from value 6 to value 2, press the button PB1 4 times
• the flashing of the green LED (see NUMBER OF GREEN IMPULSES in the Functions Table) indicate the Value selected that is saved
instantly.
EXITING THE PROGRAMMING
Exiting the programming can be done in one of two ways:
• balancing the siren Tamper input
• keeping the PB2 pressed until the alternate flashing between red and green LEDs
• unbalancing the SA input or the LED input, if Step 9 = 2 or 3, without having modified at least one parameter.
In this case, the siren activates its regular alarm cycle.
• for Time out after 10 minutes from the last operation
• If variations of configuration are executed, when exiting the programming it is necessary to unbalance and then rebalance the SA
input or the LED input, if Step 9 = 2 or 3 to restore the correct operation of the siren.
• The entry and subsequent exiting from programming, reset the Faults, the Alarms Count and the Timers relative to the Static and
Dynamic battery testing. Moreover, during the Programming the Anti-vibration Tamper and the Fault signalling are inhibited and the
signalling of the Over temperature, Anti-foam and +S.A. (if at least one parameter has not been changed) STC and LED control inputs
remain activated.

The HP series sirens are programmable, as well as manually, even from the central keyboard and software XWIN

- 62 -
 EWEB PLUS / EWEB PLUS VIDEO / EWEB WIFI II - LAN network board (ETHERNET / WIFI)
EWEB, EWEB PLUS and EWEB WIFI are devices for networking the control unit in Ethernet LAN or Wi-Fi.

EWEB PLUS / EWEB PLUS VIDEO / EWEB WIFI II

EWEB
• Web server: system status on graphical map, system on-off, output on-off, event
log check, diagnostics and zone exclusion EWEB PLUS
• SMTP client for sending emails with attachments
• Management of the AVS-XLINK protocol for integration ELM software or other
systems
• Management of the “my avs alarm” mobile app for iOS and Android, in the free
or Premium versions (subscription):
• Complete management of the Cloud system through AVS CLOUD Server, sectors
ON-OFF, management scenarios, home automation controls, zone status control,
diagnostics, reading of events log
• Images captured live by the cameras connected to the TCP-IP network,
compatible with ONVIF S® or MJPEG®
• Receipt of Alarm, On-Off and System Fault push notifications
• Display of climate data from compatible NETATMO® devices

NOTE ®: These are proprietary brands

EWEB WI FI

EWEB PLUS EWEB PLUS VIDEO EWEB WIFI II

Connection to control unit plug-in with connector J3 - CONN ETH

External connections: ETHERNET RJ45, 10/100 Mbit/s 2.4GHz 802.11 b/g

Absorption: typical: 80 mA typical: 100 mA

Dimensions of board: 70 x 15 x 60 mm
The modules used are compliant with the 2014/53/UE
Declaration (RED) directive as declared by the same manufacturer on
its own responsibility.
Standard compliances EN50131-1, EN50131-3, EN50136-2, EN50131-10

INCERT D-Q5Y-0013 D-Q5Y-0014

Security Grade 2
Environmental Class Class II
Weight 0,065 Kg

Type of transmission system SP2

Operating mode (acknowledgment) Pass-through
AS Interface Proprietary serial interface on “CONN ETH”
Monitoring Ethernet Network Periodic “Keep alive” messaging

Circuit enabling
a. Both battery and mains power supply must be totally switched off.
b. The special plastic supports must be fit into the holes on the control unit board with the guides facing inwards.
c. Fit the board into the J6 (XTREAM 640) or J5 (XTREAM 64 - 32 - 6) connector by sliding it in the support guides until it locks.
d. Break the fitting at the top right on the control unit box.
e. Pass the antenna cable through the hole and fit it on the fitting.
f. Insert the antenna and fix it by tightening the nut firmly.
g. Connect the antenna cable to the module
h. Switch on the control unit power supply.

- 63 -
Programming
Hints on sectors management
XTREAM includes the management of the sectors.
This means that up to 64 systems independent between them can be created with the control panel. In case of having to manage detectors in
common between different sectors, associate them to the various sectors to which they must refer.
These zones will only activate when all sectors to which they are associated are included.
The amount of sectors active in the system, meaning how many sectors exist therein independently, is defined during programming.
The sectors are useful when there is the need to have more systems managed by a single control panel. The normal applications, managing
only one system, do not require the use of this function, therefore only sector 1 will be active and all the zones associated to it.
Armings
The sectors can be activated in different modalities, one from the other. Example: sector 1 can be armed in ON modality, whereas sectors 2
and 3 are armed in ZONE modality. Should there be, at any moment, zones associated to more sectors, these would result being automatically
armed in the lowest level modality present between the sectors to which they belong, where the highest level corresponds to arming ON and
in decreasing order, HOME, ZONE and PERIMETER.
Every zone used by the control panel must be associated to a sector and will result active when said sector is armed in an arming modality
containing this zone.
The conditions that allow forcing are: The conditions that do not allow forcing are:
• Zone type Secondary FAILURE, MASKING • Central control unit tamper
• Zone in antimask status • TamperSwitch KEYBOARDS / TamperCom KEYBOARDS
• Zone in survival status • TamperSwitch SATELLITE / TamperCom SATELLITE
• CENTRAL CONTROL UNIT AND SATELLITES • Radio interference
• Absence of network • TamperSwitch INSWCPU RS / TamperCom INSWCPU RS
• Power feeder failure • No Tel. Line / Tel. Line / GSM Fault
• Recharger failure malfunctions
• Low voltage on ‘+’ power outputs and on ‘+ Vpot’ • Zone camper status
output • "TAMPER" or "ROBBERY" zone type open
• Battery low / battery failure / no battery • Primary FAILURE zone type open
• INSTANT zone type open
• internal instant and timed zones with "OFF times" open

The switch-on can be forced, using the relative controls contained in the guided user menu, accessible by pressing the ENT Key after
gaining access with the user code.
Alarm outputs
The alarm outputs of the system activate when an alarm occurs in one or more sectors, but can only be deactivated by disarming the sector
to which the zone that caused the alarm in progress belongs. This is true for both the relay outputs and the Open Collector outputs. Certain
functions applicable to the Open Collector outputs require specifying the number of the sector of reference. Example: arming OC, OC from
user, etc.
Keypads
The system keypads must be associated to one or more sectors. This determines which alarm messages are displayed therein The zone
alarms are shown only if relating to zones of the associated sectors. The technical alarms are always shown.
The quick arming function (Quick Arm) is linked to the keypad on which it is performed. With this procedure, the sector to which the keypad
is associated or, simultaneously, all sectors to which it is associated, is activated.
The "0 active zones" message, upon exiting the installer code, is displayed on keypad when the common zones are not associated to the four
different arming modalities (ON, HOME, ZONE, PERIMETER). This visualisation disappears when a user code is entered.
After having armed a sector, the "0 active zones" message is displayed on keypad to signal the user that there are no zones active in that
arming modality.
User Codes
The user codes must be associated to one or more sectors and have access to them only through the keypads associated to their sectors. If
a code is associated to one or more sectors and also set as "Master user", it can access the sectors of competence from any keypad. When
a user is associated to more sectors and to the function "Sectors sum", it can arm or disarm all systems (associated to it) simultaneously, by
pressing 0 (zero).
The users associated to a specific sector, if enabled, can consult the control panel events memory, viewing only the events relating to their
sector. A user associated to all sectors can view the full events memory. With regard to the exclusion of the zones and activation of the O.C.
outputs from keypad, the user is enabled to work only on zones and O.C. under the responsibility of its sector; if the O.C. is associated to more
sectors, it will be managed by all users linked to the same sectors of the O.C..
Example of keypad behaviour
User 1 associated to sectors 1, 2, 3, 4 and set as "Master user -> NO"
The Users 2/3 are set as "Master user -> NO"

Users/Sectors KEYPAD (sector 1, 2, 3, 4) KEYPAD (sector 1) KEYPAD (sector 2)

USER 1 (sector 1, 2, 3, 4) sectors choice display sector 1 display sector 2
USER 2 (sector 1) display sector 1 display sector 1 unauthorised
USER 3 (sector 2) display sector 2 unauthorised display sector 2

Only User 1 associated to sectors 1, 2, 3, 4 and set as "Master user -> YES"

Users/Sectors KEYPAD (sector 1, 2, 3, 4) KEYPAD (sector 1) KEYPAD (sector 2)

USER 1 (sector 1, 2, 3, 4) sectors choice sectors choice sectors choice
USER 2 (sector 1) display sector 1 display sector 1 unauthorised
USER 3 (sector 2) display sector 2 unauthorised display sector 2

- 64 -
 15 DEC 06
00 : 00 : 15 PROGRAMMING
ââââââ ÊEnter Installer Code followed by (ENT)
00 : 00 : 15 (by default: 000000)
Xtream If the code is recognised, the wording "Xtream" will appear
avs electronics ÊPress (ENT) to enter

Lingua/Language Language ATTENTION!!! Upon first installation or after the RESET EEPROM procedure, the system may
Press CLR... English request to adjust the control panel to the local language.

SOME PROGRAMMING VALUES MIGHT NOT CORRESPOND TO THOSE ON THE KEYBOARD BECAUSE THEY
RELATE TO THE XTREAM640 CENTRAL CONTROL UNIT E.G.: User Code (1 - 512) instead of User Code (1 - 64).

Installation
ENT éê Installation
Keypads B1 Keypads B1
snnnnnnnnnnnnnnn By setting "YES", the individual keypad connected on serial 1 is enabled
Keypads B23 (ONLY XTREAM640)
Keypads B23
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn By setting "YES", the individual keypad connected on serial 2 or 3 is enabled
Satellite B1
Satell. B1 By setting "YES", the individual satellite connected on serial 1 is enabled
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Satellite B23 (ONLY XTREAM640)
By setting "YES", the individual satellite connected on serial 2 or 3 is enabled
Satell. B23
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn RS key blocks (serial) B1
By setting "YES", the individual RS key block connected on serial 1 is enabled
RS dev. B1 RS key blocks (serial) B23 (ONLY XTREAM640)
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn By setting "YES", the individual RS key block connected on serial 2 or 3 is enabled
Siren B1
RS dev. B23
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn By setting “YES”, the individual HP SIREN connected on serial 1 is enabled
Siren B23 (ONLY XTREAM640)
Siren B1 By setting “YES”, the individual HP SIREN connected on serial 2 or 3 is enabled
nnnnnnnn
Note: it is possible to install the various accessories not in sequential order; it is therefore possible to enable the
Siren B23 serial 10 accessory even without having installed the previous ones.
nnnnnnnn

Satellite type Satellite type

ENT éê The type of satellite model connected is defined;
add. xx indicates which satellite we are programming from 1 to 32.
Satell. add. 1 This step is used to define which types of satellites have been connected to the serials; with this pogramming a
General series of controls are activated, used to avoid performing programming errors during association of the software
zones to the physical ones.
Types
- SAT03/SAT04: wired satellite with maximum 16 inputs
- SAT03 DOUBLE: from satellite version 2.0 it is possible to use the double clamps both on the base and on the
extension electronic board to reach a maximum of 32 inputs
- SATW: radio satellite with 16 radio detectors
- SATW DOUBLE: from satellite version 1.1 via radio it is possible to acquire up to 32 radio detectors
- XGSM485 (B1 only): wired satellite with maximum 3 single or double balancing inputs and/or 3 O.C. outputs.
- XSAT8: wire satellite with maximum 10 inputs and 2 O.C. outputs, using the double zones connection, another
10 inputs can be added
- XSAT2: wire satellite with maximum 2 inputs and 8 O.C. outputs, using the double zones connection, another 2
inputs can be added
- XSAT2 - dual: wire satellite with maximum 2 inputs and 8 O.C. outputs, using the double zones connection,
another 2 inputs can be added; the OC outputs can become 16.
- XSAT36/XSATPW: wired satellite with max 36 inputs with XSAT8 and double zone function/POWER
- XSATHP/XSATHPMINI: wired zone extension peripheral that adds up to 3 normal EOL inputs and up to 32 wired
addressable detectors (HP series)
- Virtual XSATHP: software function that simulates an XSATHP and allows connecting up to 32 addressable
detectors directly to the serial buses of the control panel. Only one single Virtual XSATHP is supported in the
configuration of the panel
WARNING: The Virtual XSATHP function CANNOT BE USED if using physical XSATHP/XSATHPMINI devices
connected to the panel.
- XSATMINI: wired zone extension peripheral that adds up to 3 NC inputs or 1 addressable input

Pairing XSATWS Step up to version 1.2R6 of the control panel

ENT éê
Pairing XSAT WS (NO XTREAM 6 and XTREAM 6B)
XSATWS 1with 2 This menu is used to establish which radio satellites must work in pairs.
NO The first value corresponds to satellites 1 and 2, the second to satellites 3 and 4, the third to satellites 5 and 6,
the fourth to satellites 7 and 8 (in the XTREAM 640 theyrefer to serial 1).
List sat.->BIP ÊTo access other entries press (é) or (ê)
ENT éê
List sat.->BIP
Position #
1 (1..8) This menu is used to define a sequential order between the various radio satellites. This sequential order
defines that the remote controls acquired on the first satellite will be from number 1 > 64, those acquired on the
Satellite addr. second satellite will be from 65 > 128, those acquired on the third satellite will be from 129 > 192 and so on.
0 (0..32)

to following
page

- 65 -
from previous
page Installation

Virtual XSATHP Virtual XSATHP: This menu allows you to define what are the sensors connected and managed directly by the
ENT éê serial port of the system. Detectors connected to the serial port B1 must be numerated from 1 to 16 while those
connected to the serial ports 23 (2 or 3) should be numerated from 17 to 32 and activated in the relevant section.
Sensors B1
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn

Sensors B23
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn

XLink B1
NO Xlink B1: By setting "YES", the XLink electronic board is enabled.

XWEB/EWEB XWEB/EWEB: Setting "YES", enables the XWEB/EWEB board

NO
Enabling PSTN: By setting "YES", the PSTN integrated dialler is enabled to dial the programmed calls.
PSTN enable
NO
XGSM: By setting "YES", the GSM integrated dialler is enabled to dial the programmed calls.
XGSM
NO XGSM 485: By setting “YES”, the GMS dialler with serial connection for making the programmed calls is enabled.

XGSM 485 Hi-speed BUS 1: By setting “YES”, serial 1 is enabled to work in Hight speed mode
NO
Hi-speed BUS 23: By setting “YES”, serial 2 and 3 are enabled to work in Hight speed mode
Hi-speed BUS 1
NO NOTE: after enabling / disabling the Hi-speed BUS 1 or 23 setting, disconnect and re-power the devices connected to
the serial ports.
Hi-speed BUS 2
NO NOTE: Verify that the devices connected on the serial ports support and are set to work with the desired speed.

NOTE: to optimize the timing of the video verification of wireless sensors equipped with a camera, it is advisable to
connect the XSATWS 4 VIDEO model radio video satellite to a serial set in Hight speed

Conditional Arming (forced) By setting NO, the control panel is armed anyway, even if there are unbalanced
Condtional arm.
NO lines or tamper signals.
By setting YES, the control panel analyses the state of the zones, when an arming command is given; even if
there is only one u nbalanced
immediate zone, the control panel is not armed.
Example: if wanting to avoid sending useless signals, for a manoeuvre error, the setting must be YES.
N.B.: By setting NO, the unit no longer complies with EN50131.

Super.block arm Survival blocks Arming: If you set “NO”, the control panel will turn on even if there are sensors in survival mode.
NO By setting “YES” (and only if “Conditional Access = YES), when a command is given, the control panel analyzes
the status of the radio sensors, if there is at least one radio sensor in survival anomaly, the control panel will not
turn on.

Code R. to deflt Codes Reset to Default: By setting “NO”, the “Reset Codes” procedure returns just the Installer Code to its
NO factory setting. By setting “YES”, the “Reset Codes” procedure returns all programming to the default settings.

EN50131 Accord. EN50131 conformity: By setting “NO” or if certain parameters are edited (see the “EN50131 - Grade 2 Conformity”
NO section) the unit no longer complies with EN50131 standards.
DOWNLOADING
Test EN of Digital numbers only: By setting “NO”, the test ofÞÞÞÞÞÞÞÞÞ
the phone numbers DOWNLOADING
set by EN50131 comprises all
Test EN only dgt the programmed phone numbers. By setting “YES”, the test of the phone numbers ===ÞÞÞÞÞÞ
only comprises the phone
NO
numbers programmed with digital protocol.

Language Language: Adjusts the control panel to the local language.

Italian During updating the keypad displays.
The completion of the procedure is displayed by the scrolling of the symbol =
Country
Italy Country: Adjusts the control panel to the local behaviours/electric standards.
NOTE: setting the nation as "BELGIUM" automatically guarantees compliance with T014 with regard to resetting
the TAMPER Alarm
Ctr. Panel Label
Control Panel Label: 16 alphanumerical string, indicated when access to the programming menu

ÊPress (CLR) to vary

ÊEnter the wanted number
ÊPress (ENT) to confirm

to following
page

- 66 -
 from previous
page Sectors
Partition Active sectors: Active sector means the possibility of managing up to 64 completely separate systems. The
ENT éê zones associated to more sectors will be common to the sectors they are linked.
By setting YES, the selector is enabled
Active partit. ns Associate Zones: press ENT to select the sector to be associated to the zones
ynnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Sector # : Select the sector to be programmed where the zones will be associated
Zones: By setting YES, the zone is associated to the sector; the zones can be associated with more than one
Associate zones sector; in this case they will be common to the sectors they are associated with.
ENT éê By default, all zones are associated to sector 1. In this way, the system can immediately manage a single system.
Patrol: At the base of the function there is the possibility of the control panel using the characteristic of managing
Partition # the zones common to more sectors: one or more sectors, amongst those available, is reserved with the aim of
1 (1.. 64)
containing the zones to be subjected to the patrol function. Any user code with the patrol attribute operating on
these sectors, enables the patrol tour function which univocally disables just the zones set in the sector used for
Zones 1
yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy the function.
Sector: select the sector defined for the patrol function
Patrol tour Patrol tour time: is programmed in minutes, once timer is expired, the patrol sector is re-armed at ON. In case of
ENT éê reset or watchdog, the patrol sectors automatically activate.
Manual Arming: By setting “Manual Starting” to NO, the patrol tour sector automatically restarts when the set
Patrol tour # time elapses but if the patrol tour code is entered again before the set time elapses, the patrol tour time begins
1 (1.. 4) again in order to extend the time if required. By setting “Manual starting” to YES, the patrol tour sector restarts
manually when the patrol code is entered. If a patrol tour code is not entered before the set time elapses, the patrol
Partition # tour sector is automatically re-enabled and throws an alarm that can generate a phone call or activate an oc
0 (1.. 64) output. The patrol tour code cannot perform any other operation apart from disabling/enabling the patrol sector.
Messages: Upon entering of the patrol code, the strip "Patrol activated" is displayed in date/time for a few seconds;
Patrol tour time the "user code xxx" and subsequently "Patrol Keypad Access# or RS Key Block#" events are also memorised. At
0 (0.. 255)
the end of the patrol time, "patrol deactivates" and the event is generated in the memory.
- In case of patrol with manual modality, upon entering the patrol code a second time, the message "Patrol
Manual Arming
NO deactivated" is shown in date/time; the code event is then memorised, and, therefore, the various armings of the
patrol sectors.
Macro Arming In case the patrol time is expired without the guard having performed deactivation, the event of "no sector patrol
ENT éê deactivation#" is memorised.
Macro Arming: It is possible to select up to 64 multiple switch-on controls to match with A, B, C, D of the A600
Macro Arming and A600Plus keyboards (see programming in "User Code").
1 (1.. 64) Sector: select the switch-on mode to activate for each individual sector to be managed.

Partitions ÊPress (CLR) to vary

0000000000000000 ÊPress (ç) or (è) to select
ÊPress (CLR) to vary
ÊPress (ENT) to confirm

Labels Prog. Labels prog: The first 16 sectors can be associated with a description comprising 16 alphanumerical characters
ENT éê
ÊPress (CLR) to vary
String ÊWriting keys:
1 (1 .. . 16) (1)abc1(2)def2(3)ghi3(4)jkl4(5)mno5(6)pqr6(7)stu7(8)vwx8(9)yz. (0)_’0
Partition label ÊPress arrows (ç) and (è) to position the cursor
ÊPress (ENT) to confirm

to following
page

- 67 -
 from previous
page Zone
Zones For every "software" zone it is possible to associate a physical input corresponding to the "clamp" where the
ENT éê detector was wired.

Zone number # ÊPress (CLR) to vary

1 (1 .. . 640) ÊTo access other entries press (é) or (ê)
ÊTo move to wanted position press (ç) (è)
Phisical input ÊPress (ENT) to confirm
CPN I.BA 1 S
Entries description

A- CPN = CONTROL PANEL

EXP= SATELLITE
KBD= KEYPAD
B- n. x = SATELLITE ADDRESS (appears only if A = SAT/PAD)
C- I.BA = BASIC INPUT
I.EX = EXTENSION INPUT
MD = HOME AUTOMATION MODULE INPUT
D- n. x = INPUT NUMBER
E- S = SINGLE (connection as "balanced zones" or "balanced zones with tamper signal" and
refers to detector connected with 4k7 resistance)
D = DOUBLE (double zones connection with tamper signal and refers to connected detector
with 10K resistance Physical input
Example: In the example at the side, the software zone is linked to the physical CPNinput
n.xthatI.BA
corresponds
n.x S to -
SATELLITE n. 5 - connected on BASIC INPUT- number 3 - Single (resistance 4k7)
For every input line of the control panel it is possible to determine the type of line.
A B C D E
ÊPress (CLR) to vary (see table "zones type functions" - following page)
ÊPress (ENT) to confirm
Zone type
Istant For every input line of the control panel it is possible to determine the number of unbalancings necessary to
activate the associated alarm outputs. By default, it is programmed that an individual unbalancing of the zones
causes the alarm state of the control panel.
Pulses Number
1 (1 .. . 120) The time interval within which the impulses are summed can be programmed from the Physical input #
Times Menu; upon expiry of this time the counter is reset. EXP5 I.BA 3 S
If the zone remains unbalanced for 30 seconds an alarm state is had, regardless of the number of programmed
impulses.
Should the zone be set as "Prog.SwitchAlarm" this step adjusts the sensitivity of the input; 1= HIGH sensitivity/
250= LOW sensitivity; we recommend carrying out sensitivity tests to correctly adjust the reply of the
various types of detectors on the market.
ÊPremss (CLR) to vary
ÊEnter number of impulses
ÊPremss (ENT) to confirm
For every input line of the control panel it is possible to associate maximum 4 (four) state Open Collectors or
alarm zone.
First O.C. 1
First O.C. Set the Open Collector to be activated for the unbalancing of the line
0 (1 .. . 250) Second/Third/Fourth O.C.
Set the Open Collector to be activated for the unbalancing of the line
Second O.C. Note: the O.C. set must be programmed inside the menu as O.C. of Cat. Sector or Cat. Zone
0 (1 .. . 250)
ÊPress (CLR) to vary
Third O.C.
ÊEnter number of the O.C. to be activated
0 (1 .. . 250) ÊPress (ENT) to confirm
ÊPress (ESC) to go back
Fourth O.C. Tamper detect - Tamper signal means the possibility the control panel has to distinguish the alarm state of the
0 (1 .. . 250) inputs from their tampering; every zone can be independently configured to activate or not this function.

Tamper detect N.B.: By setting NO, the unit no longer complies with EN50131.
NO
ÊPress (CLR) to vary
ÊPress (ENT) to confirm
ÊPress (ESC) to go back

to following
page

- 68 -
 Functions: Zones type
Unused: the zone is not considered from the control panel analysis. These inputs must be balanced with a resistance (4K7).
Immediate: zone that causes an immediate alarm when it unbalances with control panel armed.
24 hour zone: zone independent from arming of the control panel, active both with control panel disarmed and with control panel armed; it
can be excluded from the "ZONE OFF" function.
Timed 1 / [2] Timed 2 / [3] Timed 3: upon arming of the control panel the output time becomes active [1- 2 -3], signalled by the intermittent
sound of the keypad buzzer. After this time, if the input is unbalanced, the return time is made available [1- 2 -3], signalled by an intermittent,
highly frequent, sound; after expiry of this time an alarm is activated, unless the control panel has been in the mean time disarmed.
Conditional: immediate zone that is automatically excluded during the input and output time of a timed zone; in case of more timed zones,
reference must be made to that with the longest time. With control panel armed the unbalancing of this input causes an immediate alarm
when the output time or the return time are not in progress. This particular zone can be used to protect the path from the input zone to the
keypad, as long as when entering from a timed input, the zones programmed as internal immediate result temporarily excluded, whereas by
entering from any input different to that timed, these zones result immediate.
Imm.perm.excl.: (Immediate with permanent exclusion): immediate zone that is automatically excluded if unbalanced at the time of
arming the control panel; it remains excluded until disarming of the same control panel. This particular zone can be used to automate the
exclusion of the zone to be protected at the time of arming. If, for example, we wanted to automatically exclude the balconies or doors that
at the time of arming resulted open.
Imm.temp.excl.: (immediate zone with temporary exclusion); it is automatically excluded if it results unbalanced upon arming of the
control panel; it is automatically included upon its re-balancing.
Timed 1 with Permanent Exclusion / [5] T2 Perm.excl / [6] T3 Perm. excl: these are timed zones with permanent exclusion. They are
automatically excluded if resulting unbalanced at the end of the output time [1- 2 -3]; they remain excluded until disarming of the same
control panel. If it is balanced at the end of the output time, when it is next balanced, the zone will be timed with the secondary input time [1-
2 -3].
Timed 1 with Temporary Exclusion / [8] T2 Temp.excl / [9] T3 Temp. excl 3: zone that is automatically excluded if, at the end of the output
time [1- 2 -3] of the timed zone [1- 2 -3], it results unbalanced; it is automatically included upon its re-balancing. Upon a subsequent
unbalancing, the zone will be timed with secondary input time [1- 2 -3].
These particular zones can be useful for the protection of automations which main door, tilt or gates subject to a proper timing during closing.
This block enables the temporary exclusion of the zone still open at the moment the output timing ends, to then re-included when the zone
closes again.
24 hour Timed Zone 1 / [k] 24H T 2 [l] 24H T 3: zone independent from arming of the control panel, active both with control panel disarmed
and with control panel armed. Upon its unbalancing, the return time is made available [1- 2 -3], signalled by an intermittent, highly frequent,
sound; upon expiry of this latter time an alarm activates, unless the user code has been in the mean time entered; can be excluded from the
function "ZONE OFF".
CAUTION: The zones used as 24-hour timed are not compliant with EN50131 Grade 2
24 hour zone with pre-alarm 4 / [W] 24H pre-al. 3 / [V] 24H pre-al. 2 / [U] 24H pre-al. 1: zone independent from arming of the control
panel, active both with control panel disarmed and with control panel armed. Zone that causes an alarm when it unbalances, at the end of the
pre-alarm time [1- 2 -3 - 4]. If, during this time, the zone unbalances, the pre-alarm count interrupts and resets. During the pre-alarm time the
zone can activate: buzzer (door-chime), pre-alarm O.C., zone state O.C., pre-alarm messages on keypad, pre-alarm events memory.
Immediate with pre-alarm 4 / [w] Imm. pre-al. 3 / [v] Imm. pre-al. 2 / u] Imm.pre-al. 1: zone that causes an alarm when it unbalances with
control panel armed, at the end of the pre-alarm time [1- 2 -3 - 4]. If, during this time, the zone unbalances, the pre-alarm count interrupts and
restarts. During the pre-alarm time the zone can activate: buzzer (door-chime), pre-alarm O.C., zone state O.C., pre-alarm messages on
keypad, pre-alarm events memory.
Tamper: zone independent from arming of the control panel, activates both with control panel disarmed and with control panel armed; it is
used to connect the tamper proof and cannot be excluded from the "ZONE OFF" function.
• Fire: zone independent from the switch-on of the central control unit, active with the control unit on or off, used to connect fire sensors;
can be used separate from the "ZONE OFF" function.
CAUTION: The areas used as FIRE are not compliant with EN50131-1 and EN 50131-3
• Primary Failure: zone independent from the switch-on of the central control unit, active with the control unit on or off; manages the IMQ
general siren failure signal
• Second Failure: (Secondary Failure) zone independent from the switch-on of the central control unit, active with the control unit on or off;
manages the IMQ general sensor failure signal
• AntiMask: (Anti Masking) zone independent from the switch-on of the central control unit, active with the control unit on or off; manages the
IMQ general anti masking sensor failure signal
• Robbery: zone independent from the switch-on of the central control unit, active with the control unit on or off, the alarm is not displayed
on the keypad; specific input for the anti-robbery devices.
CAUTION: With the "Compliant with EN50131" option enabled, the "Encode Alarm" setting, if configured, refers to registration of the
event in the Event Memory only, while the other configurations remain active.
PERIMETER key: zone for remote arming in PERIMETER modality; therefore, the unbalancing of the zone in this way programmed will
cause the arming of the control panel in PERIMETER modality, activating the relative associated zones.
ZONE key: zone for remote arming in ZONE modality; therefore, the unbalancing of the zone in this way programmed will cause the arming
of the control panel in ZONE modality, activating the relative associated zones.
HOME key: zone for remote arming in HOME modality; therefore, the unbalancing of the zone in this way programmed will cause the arming
of the control panel in HOME modality, activating the relative associated zones.
ON key: zone for remote arming in ON modality; therefore, the unbalancing of the zone in this way programmed will cause the arming
of the control panel in ON modality, activating the relative associated zones.
CAUTION: The zones used as 24-hour with pre-alarm are not compliant with EN50131 Grade 2
• Blocking device / Doorlock contact: do not program / reserved for foreign market
N.B. The twin zone to that used to control an arming in any modality must be configured as "Unused". On the contrary, to warn of the
incorrect programming, the keypad displays the wording "Prog. error # 1".
N.B. The zones programmed as Key (ON-HO-ZONE-PERI), must be associated to one sector only.
N.B. Zones from 11 to 640 are programmed by default as [-] Unused
N.B. The zones programmed as "24 hour zone" for the signalling of burglary, must not activate the alarm relay.

- 69 -
from previous
page Zones
Test Zones Test zones - The zone to which the Test function has been enabled does not cause the activation of the
NO programmed alarm outputs nor the sending of calls, but only the memorising of the occurred alarm.

Disables det. survival - Set at "YES", if wanting to deactivate the supervision control for the radio detector.
Dis. det. survival
NO Disables det. fault - Set at "YES", if wanting to deactivate the fault control for the barrier BMHP.

Programm. Switch Alarm - Set to “Inertial / shutter” if the connection was made “areas balanced with inertial
Dis. det. fault
NO sensors”;
If “Inertial”: combined with an inertial sensor; if the cable is interrupted, the control unit signals open area.
If “Blinds”: combined with a rolling sensor; if the cable is interrupted, the control unit doesn’t signal open area.
Prog.SwitchAlarm The programming step “Pulses number” sets the input sensitivity.
Unused
Memo alarm - The alarm caused by the unbalancing of the input zones can be recorded in the events memory
Memo Alarm of the control panel; with "YES", the function is enabled, with "NO" the event will not be recorded.
YES N.B.: By setting NO, the unit no longer complies with EN50131.

Memo restore - The balancing after the alarm of the input zones can be recorded in the events memory of the
Memo Restore control panel; with "YES", the function is enabled, with "NO" the event will not be recorded.
NO
Activates buzzer - The alarm caused by the zones configured with a "YES" will cause the keypad buzzer to
sound; the sounding time has been programmed in the Times programming menu.
Activ. buzzer For example, it can be used to signal detectors alarms which temperatures, liquids level, emergency doors,
YES
without a siren being activated.

Chime Chime - Unbalancing the zone to which the Chime function is enabled activates the sound of the keypad
NO buzzer; to silence it, a User Code must be entered, enabled to disarm the system.
For example, it can be used to check the outputs opening, even emergency, with system disarmed.
Door Door - Unbalancing the zone to which the Door function has been enabled activates the sound of the keypad
NO buzzer; everything is subject to the programming of the "DOOR Buzzer Time". For example, it can be used to
recall attention on the synoptic controls or external visual signals.
Prealm. Memo
NO Pre-alarm memory - The unbalancing of the input zones set as zone type with pre-alarm, can be recorded in
the events memory of the control panel.
Prealm. R. Memo
NO Pre-alarm reset memory - The re-balancing of the input zones set as zone type with pre-alarm can be recorded
in the events memory of the control panel.
Alarms audio en. Alarms audio en. - the alarm of the input zones is communicated to the A600plus keypads enabled for
NO
communication of the alarm.
Zones audio en. OR zone - In the case in which the zone is associated to more sectors, the imbalance of the zone generates
NO alarm also if only a sector is armed between those to which the zone is associated.

OR zone Zones audio en. - The unbalancing of the zones is communicated to the A600plus keypads enabled for
NO communication of the zones state.

Active in ON - By setting YES, the zone is enabled to activate at ON.

Active in ON
YES Active in HO - By setting YES, the zone is enabled to activate at HOME.
Active in AR - By setting YES, the zone is enabled to activate at AREA.
Active in HOME Active in PERI - By setting YES, the zone is enabled to activate at PERIMETER.
NO
Control Panel Relay - By setting YES, the zone is enabled to activate the control panel relay (+Sa - +S / C-NC-NA)

Active in AREA Relay on sat. (NO XTREAM 6B and XTREAM 6) - By setting YES, the zone is enabled to activate the extension
NO relay (C-NC-NA).
Setting "N" establishes which relay must not be activated
Active in PERI Setting "S" establishes which relay must be activated
NO Relay from 1 to 16 refer to the extensions connected to serial 1, relay from 17 to 32 refer to the extensions
connected to serial 2-3.
Ctrl. Panel Relay Sirens active – by setting “YES”, the zone is enabled to activate HP siren connected on RS485
YES Setting “N” established which HP Siren must not be activated.
Setting “S” established which HP Siren must be activated.
From 1 to 8 refers to HP siren connected on serial 1; From 17 to 24 refers to HP siren connected on serial 2-3
Relay on sat. 1
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
ÊPress (CLR) to vary (YES/NO)
ÊPress (ENT) to confirm
Sirens act. 1
YYYYYYYY
Zone Label: for every input zone it is possible to associate a description of 16 alphanumerical digits; this strip
helps the User in the understanding of the zones in which the system is subdivided.
Zone label

ÊPress (CLR) to vary

ÊWriting keys:
(1)abc1(2)def2(3)ghi3(4)jkl4(5)mno5(6)pqr6(7)stu7(8)vwx8(9)yz. (0)_’0
ÊPress arrows (ç) and (è) to position the cursor
ÊPress (ENT) to confirm
to following
page

- 70 -
from previous
page Zones
Sensor settings Detector program: for each software zone it is possible to adjust the parameters of the combined radio sensor
ENT éê
type 4:

Parameter 1 Parameter 1 - Enab. accelerom.: setting to “YES” enables reporting of the strain and of disorientation of the
YES radio sensor as TAMPER.

Parameter 2 Parameter 2 - Low power mode: setting to “YES” enables the “Low consumption” of the radio sensor battery
NO
Parameter 3 - Antimask sensit.: it is possible to adjust the sensitivity of the Antimask present in the sensor by
setting 4 - 100% (Maximum) or 3 - 75% or 2 - 50% . By setting to 1 - OFF the Antimask is not active
Parameter 3
4 (1..4)
Parameter 4 - IR Reduc. Sensit.: setting to “YES” enables a reduction in sensitivity of the infra-red

Parameter 4 Parameter 5 - IR Sig. integrat.: setting “Double pulse” activates a further reduction of the sensitivity of the
YES
infra-red

Parameter 5 Parameter 6 - MW Sensitivity: it is possible to adjust the microwave sensitivity present in the sensor by setting
2 (1..2) 1 - 100% (max) or 2 - 75% or 3 - 50% or 4 - 25%.

Parameter 7 - Enab. IN1 term.: in the radio sensor WIC 4 / WIC 4 Plus, setting to “YES” enables functioning
Parameter 6 of the terminal input IN1
4 (1..4)
Parameter 8 - Puls. inert/SW-AL: in the WIC 4 / WIC 4 Plus radio sensor, it is possible to adjust the number
Parameter 7 of pulses of the input alarm IN1. 1 = High sensitivity - 16 = Low sensitivity
NO NOTE: In case of double channel, configuration of both the sensors must be made exclusively on the one with
the lowest address
Parameter 8
8 (1..16) Parameter 9 - Vibration enable: in the WIC 4 / WIC 4 Plus radio sensor, setting to “YES” enables the integrated
accelerometer “vibration” function.
Parameter 9 Parameter 10 - Vibration sens.: in the WIC 4 / WIC 4 Plus radio sensor, it is possible to adjust the sensitivity
NO
of the accelerometer present in the sensor. 1 = High sensitivity - 8 = Low sensitivity

Parameter 10 Parameter 11 - Vibration pulses number: it is possible to adjust the number of pulses of the Accelerometer
8 (1..8)
present in the sensor. 1 = Very sensitive - 16 = Little sensitive

Parameter 11
16 (1..16) Parameter 12 - Request Image: setting “YES” it configures the detector to be ready for an image requested
from user by the app. MY AVS ALARM. In this operating mode, the battery life is halved.
Parameter 12
NO
Parameter 13 - Enable audio: setting “YES” the sent videos will be with audio. This option also increases
the power consumption because it lengthens the video transfer time.
Parameter 13
NO Parameter 14 - Enable temperature alarm (YES): Setting YES, TERM WS4 detector sends zone alarm
when the set temperature threshold is crossed

Parameter 14 Parameter 15 - Low temperature (YES): Setting YES, the TERM WS4 detector goes into alarm when the
NO temperature falls below the programmed threshold (cold alarm). Otherwise, the alarm occurs when the
temperature exceeds this threshold (heat alarm)
Parameter 15
NO Parameter 16 - Temperature offset: Correction of the temperature value measured by the TERM WS4
detector in multiples of 0.1 ° C.
the Value can be set between: -3.1 and + 3.1 ° C
Parameter 16
109 (0..255) - values from 0 to 31 - correspond to positiv e values from 0.0 ° to 3.1 °
- values from 101 to 131 - correspond to negative values from -0.1 ° to -3.1 °

Parameter 17 Parameter 17 - Temperature threshold: the value can be set between -99 and + 99 ° C which represents
15 (0..255)
the alarm temperature threshold
The sensor automatically introduces a hysteresis of 1.0 ° C to reset the alarm
- values from 0 to 99 - correspond to positive values from 0 ° to 99 °
- values from 101 to 199 - correspond to negative values from -1 ° to -99 °

to following
page

- 71 -
from previous
page Zones
Secondary profile
It is possible to enable the secondary profile for every control panel zone.
The zone acquires this profile, if enabled, and changes its programming depending on the settings of the
secondary profile and of the arming.
With sector disarmed, the zone is always coupled to the basic profile.
The state of the zones shown in keypad or on the associated O.C. outputs, refers to, if the zone is enabled for
the secondary profile, the combination of the two profiles.
The conditional arming refers to the type of zone set in the arming modality activating.
The zones programmed as Tamper, CANNOT BE set in the secondary profile in other types of zones.
If so, the keypad shows a programming error "PROG ERROR # 2".
Once the secondary profile has been enabled, in one or more arming modalities, the zone will undertake its
various features listed below for those armings.
The zone features not included in "Secondary profile" are fixed for individual zone and do not vary depending
on the set arming.

Second. profile Activation Secondary Profile in ON - HOME - ZONE - PERIMETER

ENT éê It is possible to enable the secondary profile for every control panel zone/arming modality.
Active in ON - YES, enables the activation of the secondary profile in ON.
Active in ON
NO Active in HO - YES, enables the activation of the secondary profile in HOME.
Active in AREA - YES, enables the activation of the secondary profile in AREA.
Active in HOME
NO Active in PERI - YES, enables the activation of the secondary profile in PERIMETER.

Active in AREA ÊPress (CLR) to vary (YES/NO)

NO ÊPress (ENT) to confirm

Active in PERI
NO

Zone type Zones Type. Set the type of zone that the zone will have in the secondary profile
Not Used
ÊPress (CLR) to vary (see table "zones type functions")
ÊPress (ENT) to confirm

Memo alarm - The alarm caused by the unbalancing of the input zones can be recorded in the events
Memo Alarm memory of the control panel; with "YES", the function is enabled, with "NO" the event will not be recorded.
YES Memo restore - The balancing after the alarm of the input zones can be recorded in the events memory of the
control panel; with "YES", the function is enabled, with "NO" the event will not be recorded.
Memo Restore Activates buzzer - The alarm caused by the zones configured with a "YES" will cause the keypad buzzer to
NO sound; the sounding time has been programmed in the Times programming menu.
For example, it can be used to signal detectors alarms which temperatures, liquids level, emergency doors,
without a siren being activated.
Activate buzzer
YES Chime - Unbalancing the zone to which the Chime function is enabled activates the sound of the keypad
buzzer; to silence it, a User Code must be entered, enabled to disarm the system.
For example, it can be used to check the outputs opening, even emergency, with system disarmed.
Chime
NO Door - Unbalancing the zone to which the Door function has been enabled activates the sound of the keypad
buzzer; everything is subject to the programming of the "DOOR Buzzer Time". For example, it can be used
Door to recall attention on the synoptic controls or external visual signals.
NO
Pre-alarm memory - The unbalancing of the input zones set as zone type with pre-alarm, can be recorded in
Prealm. Memo the events memory of the control panel.
NO
Pre-alarm reset memory - The re-balancing of the input zones set as zone type with pre-alarm can be
recorded in the events memory of the control panel.
Prealm. R. Memo
NO Control panel relay - enables or not the activation of the relay
Setting "N" establishes which relay must not be activated
Setting "S" establishes which relay must be activated
Ctrl. panel relay
NO Extension relay (NO XTREAM 6B and XTREAM 6) - enables or not the activation of the relay
Setting "N" establishes which relay must not be activated
Setting "S" establishes which relay must be activated
Relay on set. 1
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
Sirens active – by setting “YES”, the zone is enabled to activate HP siren connected on RS485
Setting “N” established which HP Siren must not be activated.
Sirens act. 1 Setting “S” established which HP Siren must be activated.
YYYYYYYY From 1 to 8 refers to HP siren connected on serial 1; From 17 to 24 refers to HP siren connected on serial 2-3

ÊPress (CLR) to vary (YES/NO)

ÊPress (ENT) to confirm
to following
page

- 72 -
from previous
page Zones
Zones: physical input > zone
Phis. input > zone It is possible to carry out a research to understand, starting from a physical input, which software zone is
ENT éê associated to it.
Select the physical input as previously described and subsequently press (ENT). The associated software zone
Physical input # will be displayed.
CPN I. BA 1 S
ÊPress (CLR) to vary
ÊTo access other entries press (é) or (ê)
ÊTo move to wanted position press (ç) (è)
ÊPress (ENT) to display the associated software zone
ÊPress (ESC) to go back

Zone number 1 This menu enables to directly access programming/visualisation of the zones.
ESC ENT ê
ÊPress (ENT) to access programming of the zones
ÊPress (ê) to verify whether the physical input is associated to other software zones
ÊPress (ESC) to go back

AND ZONE
ENT éê Zones: And Zones
AND pair # To program in AND two zones, means that both must be in alarm within the time programmed in order for the
1 (1 .. 64) alarm outputs to activate. To completely disable the AND ZONES function, set "0" on the "first/second" pair for
all 64 pairs.
First zone
0 (1 .. 641)
Couple AND # ÊPress (CLR) to select the pair
Second zone 1 (1 .. 64) ÊSelect the pair
0 (1 .. 641) ÊPress (ENT) to confirm
First zone ÊPress (CLR) to select the "software" zone
Directive AND
0 (1 .. 641) ÊSelect the "software" zone
NO ÊPress (ENT) to confirm
ÊTo press (é) or (ê) to access the "Second zone"
Second zone ÊPress (CLR) to select the "software" zone
0 (1 .. 641) ÊSelect the "software" zone
ÊPress (ENT) to confirm
Note: by setting "641" on the "Second zone", the control panel ensures that the detection of an alarm coming
from the AND zone, happens as soon as any zone of the sector is alarmed.
Non Directional: the control panel ensures that the detection of an alarm coming from the AND zones,
happens only if both are alarmed.
Directional: the control panel ensures that the detection of an alarm coming from the AND zones, happens
only if alarmed in increasing order.
Note:During the AND time the zone can activate: buzzer (door-chime), pre-alarm O.C., zone state O.C., alarm
messages on keypad, pre-alarm events memory.

Tamper exclude Tamper exclude - If yes, enables the simultaneous exclusion of the line and of the tamper in case this is
NO excluded. (Not available if Belgium is set).
Alarms counter - It is the number after which the repetitive events will no longer cause the alarm state of the
programmed outputs, but will be summed and memorised in the events memory; by entering the value of 0
Alarms counter
10 (0 ..10) (zero) as code number, the function is eliminated and the events will never be coded. The braking of a detector
may cause as many alarm cycles as the coded alarms, as long as a value different from "0" (zero) is programmed.
Warning: the rehabilitation of an area excluded from this function occurs by desarming and then arming
again the sector of the specific zone.
N.B.: By setting NO, the unit no longer complies with EN50131.
ÊPress (CLR) to vary (YES/NO) -
ÊSelect the pair -
ÊPress (ENT) to confirm

to following
page

- 73 -
 from previous
page

Tamper
ENT éê Tamper
TA Output Time The zone dedicated to temper proof (TT) and the input zones programmed with the "Tamper" modality, can
MM:SS 1 : 0 activate the alarm relay and the O.C. active output dedicated to the tamper proof alarms (TA).
TA Output Time
Activ. CP Relay
Activation time of the Tamper dedicated O.C. Output (TA)
YES
Activates Control Panel Relay
By setting "YES", the tamper proof alarm will activate the relay in control panel.
Activ. Relay
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Activates Extensions Relay (NO EXTREME 6B and XTREAM 6)
Setting "N" establishes which relay must not be activated
Sirens act. 1 Setting "S" establishes which relay must be activated for the tamper proof alarm
YYYYYYYY Sirens active – by setting “YES”, the zone is enabled to activate HP siren connected on RS485
Setting “N” established which HP Siren must not be activated.
MemoTamp.Alarm Setting “S” established which HP Siren must be activated.
YES From 1 to 8 refers to HP siren connected on serial 1; From 17 to 24 refers to HP siren connected on serial 2-3
TAMPER Alarm Memo
MemoTamp. Rest. By setting "YES", the tamper proof alarm will activate the Alarm Memorisation Tamper.
NO TAMPER Reset Memo
By setting "YES", the tamper proof alarm will activate the Reset Memorisation Tamper.
Activ. buzzer Activates Buzzer
YES By setting "YES", the tamper proof alarm will activate the Buzzer signal in the enabled keypads.
ÊPress (CLR) to vary the parameter
ÊPress (ENT) to confirm

The programming of times not included between 3 and 10 minutes, will void the IMQ approval.
Note: the values of the set times may be automatically rounded off after confirmation with ( ENT)

Fire
ENT éê Fire
Detector Current Detectors Current; It is set by default at (0mA).
20 (5 .. 35 ) The line for fire protection detectors with 2-wire connections, functioning at 12V c.c., finds its place in the extension
satellites of SAT03 type.
Activ. CP relay The alarm happens through recognition of absorption on the line and the threshold can be chosen during
YES programming of the control panel.
All detectors must be connected in parallel on the same line.
Activ. relay
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn +: 12V c.c. supply output, protected by F2 fuse.
F: ended line, with 4.700 ohm resistance, for fire protection detectors with current absorption.
Sirens act. 1 Functioning of the FIRE line; When a detector enters alarm state, it remains that way until it is manually restored.
YYYYYYYY To bring in quiet the eventual outputs in alarm state, the User Code must be entered, opportunely enabled for
reset. The detector that has caused the alarm remains in alarm state, giving the possibility to check the system.
Memo Fire alarm By pressing key [2] (Res. Fire) the detectors are reset, automatically removing power to the same for 10 sec.
YES Activates Control Panel Relay
By setting "YES", the fire alarm will activate the relay in control panel.
Memo Fire reset Activates Extensions Relay
NO Setting "N" establishes which relay must not be activated
Setting "S" establishes which relay must be activated
Activ. buzzer Sirens active – by setting “YES”, the zone is enabled to activate HP siren connected on RS485
YES
Setting “N” established which HP Siren must not be activated.
Setting “S” established which HP Siren must be activated.
From 1 to 8 refers to HP siren connected on serial 1; From 17 to 24 refers to HP siren connected on serial 2-3
Memo Fire Alarm
By setting "YES", the Alarm Fire proof alarm will activate the Alarm Memorisation.
Memo Fire Reset
By setting "YES", the Alarm Fire Reset proof alarm will activate the Reset Memorisation.
Activates Buzzer
By setting "YES", the Alarm Fire proof alarm will activate the Buzzer signal in the enabled keypads.

ÊPress (CLR) to vary the parameter

ÊPress (ENT) to confirm

ATTENTION: the FIRE input is not certified according to CEI79-2 Standard.

to following
page

- 74 -
 from previous
page Antimask Programming
Antimask Activation CP Relay: the alarm caused by the anti-mask signalling if set on YES will cause the activation of the
ENT éê
control panel relay for the time programmed
Activ. CP Relay Activation Relay: the alarm caused by the anti-mask signalling if set on YES will cause the activation of the
NO extension relay (C-NC-NA) for the time programmed
Sirens active – by setting “YES”, the zone is enabled to activate HP siren connected on RS485
Activ. Relay Setting “N” established which HP Siren must not be activated.
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Setting “S” established which HP Siren must be activated.
From 1 to 8 refers to HP siren connected on serial 1; From 17 to 24 refers to HP siren connected on serial 2-3
Sirens act. 1
YYYYYYYY Memo Alarm: the alarm caused by the anti-masking signalling can be recorded in the events memory of the
control panel; a YES enables the function, with NO the event will not be recorded
Memo alarm
NO Memo Restore: the restore of the anti-masking signalling can be recorded in the events memory of the control
panel; a YES enables the function, with NO the event will not be recorded
Memo restore Buzzer Activation: the alarm caused by the anti-mask signalling if set on YES will cause the keypad buzzer to
NO
sound
The sound time can be programmed in the menu, time programming
Activ. buzzer
NO 24 H anti-mask: setting this step on YES, the anti-mask will activate the signalling also at disarmed system.

Antimask 24H ÊPress (CLR) to vary

NO ÊPres (ENT) to confirm

O.C. prog.
ENT éê
Open Collector
The Open Collectors are Optional Outputs that enable extending the system potentials. The integrity of the
system and the good functioning of these outputs is guaranteed only by using the Optional Module "MR4 /
MR8".
O.C. # 1
The control panel has n. 8 programmable Open Collector active outputs plus those belonging to the satellites.
1 (1 .. 250)

Category O.C. # n.: select the open collector to be programmed

Unused
ÊPress (CLR) to vary
Subfunction ÊEnter the chosen number
ÊPres (ENT) to confirm - subsequent step
Unused
Category/subfunction: see functions table
O.C. activ. time ÊPress (CLR) to vary - display the various functions
Inactive
ÊPress (ENT) to confirm
ÊPress (é) (ê) to move
Normally active O.C. activ. time - (look down)
NO
Normally active: set to NO the output supplies a transistorized negative when activated. Set to YES, the
output usually supplies a transistorized negative which is lost when activated.
OC audio en.
NO Audio OC. state (communicates the state of the Open Collector output)
By setting "YES" the variation of the state of the O.C. output is vocally communicated
O.C. label: it is possible to associate a description of 16 alphanumerical digits for every open collector;
O.C. label

O.C. ACTIV. TIME

• Inactive: the output does not activate
• MM:SS: the output will activate for the set time;
• Bistable: the output follows the state of the associated MM = Minutes / SS = Seconds
function • HH:MM: the output will activate for the set time;
• Blk bistable: (only for re-balancing) the output follows HH = Hours / MM = Minutes
the state of the associated zone activating in impulse • DD:HH: the output will activate for the set time;
mode in case this is excluded. DD = Days / HH = Hours
Blk bistable note: this option appears only in the steps where it can be programmed
"Times" Note: the set values may be automatically rounded off after confirmation with (ENT)
ÊPress (CLR) to vary - display the times
ÊPress (é) (ê) to move
ÊEnter the chosen number
ÊPress (ENT) to confirm
ÊPress (é) (ê) to move

O.C. label: it is possible to associate a description of 16 alphanumerical digits for every open collector;
ÊPress (CLR) to vary
ÊWriting keys:
(1)abc1(2)def2(3)ghi3(4)jkl4(5)mno5(6)pqr6(7)stu7(8)vwx8(9)yz. (0)_’0
ÊPress arrows (ç) and (è) to position the cursor
to following ÊPress (ENT) to confirm
page

- 75 -
 Open Collector Functions
Cat. ZONE
Subfunction:
• Alarm: it activates with at least one of the associated zones in alarm state
• Re-balancing: it activates with the balancing of all the associated zones
• Exclusion: it activates with the exclusion of at least one of the associated zones
• Pre-alarm: it activates for the pre-alarm of at least one of the associated zones
• Unbalancing: it activates with the unbalancing of at least one of the associated zones
• Tamper: it activates with the tamper of at least one of the associated zones
• Antimask: it activates with the antimasking of at least one of the associated zones
• Unused: it will never activate
Cat. ARMINGS
• it activates when the sector is armed in ON - HOME - ZONE - PERIMETER modality, or when it is - DISCONNECTED, or when THE
PATROL TIME EXPIRES. (using the patrol function; signals the missed entering of the patrol code within the time programmed for
sector rearming ("patrol time").
• Armings (Arm. Type): select the type of arming of reference:
Arming ON - Arming HOME - Arming AREA - Arming PERI - Disarming - Patrol time expiry - (YES/NO)
Note: it is not possible to simultaneously set at "YES" one of the armings and the disarming or an arming/disarming at the same time as
"patrol time expired".
• Alarm Memo (RK32): by setting "YES" in disarmed state, it flashes if in the previous arming state an alarm has occurred.
Controlled sector: set the sector of reference
Cat. TIMES
Subfunction:
• Unused: it will never activate
• Entry time: activated during the entry time
• Exit time: activated during the exit time
Controlled sectors: set the sector of reference
Cat. USER ACCESS
• Code: by setting "YES", it activates when the associated User Code is entered (see User Profiles)
• Emergency code: by setting "YES", it activates when the associated Emergency User Code is entered (see User Profiles)
• Key: by setting "YES, it activates when the serial key electronic board recognises a Key
• Emergency key: by setting "YES, it activates when the serial key electronic board recognises an Emergency key
Cat. SECTOR
Subfunction:
• Unused: it will never activate
• Alarm: it activates with at least one of the zones associated to the sector in alarm state
• Re-balancing: it activates with the re-balancing of all the zones associated to the selected sector
• Exclusion: it activates with the exclusion of at least one of the sector zones
• Pre-alarm: it activates for the pre-alarm of at least one of the sector zones
• Unbalancing: it activates with the unbalancing of at least one of the zones associated to the selected sector; it can be used for an
external circuit trial signal.
• Tamper: it activates with the tamper of at least one of the sector or peripheral zones of competence.
• Antimask: it activates with the antimasking of at least one of the associated zones to the partition
Controlled sectors: set the sector of reference
Cat. USER
• it activates from RTC, from Keypad entering a user code with "User OC Enab." enabled, from Timer or from RING.
Controlled sectors: set the sector of reference
Cat. POWER SUPPLY
• Mains power failure: with “YES”, it activates when the control panel or the supervised power units connected in series are not powered,
after a delay programmable in minutes. (see “Times”)
• Power unit failure: with “YES”, it activates when the voltage supplied by the power unit of the control panel or by that of the supervised
power units connected in series is higher than 16 V = or when it is lower than the voltage generated by the battery or when the output
voltage on the various board positives is lower than 10 V =
• Low battery: with “YES”, it activates when the battery of the control panel or of one of the supervised power units connected in series
drops below 10.5 V and there is no charging voltage. It resets when voltage rises above 12.8 V =
• Battery faulty: with “YES”, it activates when the battery of the control panel or of one of the supervised power units connected in series,
drops below 9.5 V =
• No battery: with “YES”, it activates when the battery of the control panel or of one of the supervised power units connected in series,
drops below 3 V =
Cat. TELEPHONE
• No telephone line: with "YES", it activates when the presence of the telephone line or GSM is no longer detected
• Call in progress: with "YES", it activates when a telephone communication is in progress
• From Ring: by setting “YES”, it activates when the control panel receives a GSM call from a phone number enabled to perform the
function
Cat. FIRE
• it activates when there is a FIRE alarm coming from one of the satellites or input programmed as Fire.
Cat. KEY ACCESS
• it activates when an acquired key is read by a reader
Cat. TIMER
• it activates when the Timer reaches the pre-fixed day and time; it cannot be controlled by the user.
AUTOTEST cat.
• Activated when the central control unit performs the "Autotest" function. If the time is set as Bistable, the output is activated for 3
seconds
RESET FIRE cat.
• Activated when an enabled user performs a "Reset Fire Line" operation (pressing key 2 in the "User Menu" ).
If the time is set as Bistable, the output is activated for 15 seconds.
Cat. BLOCKING DEVICE
• do not program / reserved for foreign market

- 76 -
 from previous
page

Timings
ENT éê Times
Exit time 1 Exit time 1- 2- 3
Inactive
Output time of the timed zone 1 - 2 - 3 and 24H timed 1 - 2 - 3
Entry time 1- 2- 3
Entry time 1 Input time of the timed zone 1 - 2 - 3 and 24H timed 1 - 2 - 3
Inactive
To observe compliance with EN50131, the input time must not exceed 45 seconds.
Sec. Entry time 1 Secondary entry time 1- 2- 3
Inactive Input time of the Timed zone with temporary exclusion 1 - 2 - 3
To observe compliance with EN50131, the input time must not exceed 45 seconds.
Exit time 2 Pre-alarm time 1- 2- 3 - 4
Inactive Pre-alarm time of the Immediate zones with pre-alarm 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 and of the "24 hour zone with pre-alarm 1 - 2
- 3 - 4".
Entry time 2 Activ. CP Relay
Inactive
Activation time of the control panel relay
Satellite address
Sec. Entry time 2
Inactive Select the satellite of the relay to be programmed
Relay time
Exit time 3 Activation time of the relay on extension
Inactive Siren address
Select the HP siren to be programmed
Entry time 3 Siren time
Inactive Activation time HP Siren
Buzzer time
Sec. Entry time 3 Sound time of the buzzer of the keypads, in case it is associated to an alarm ("Activate buzzer"). By inserting
Inactive
"Deactivated", the buzzer is excluded; by setting "Bistable", the buzzer does not deactivate after an established
time, but only after the user intervention.
Prealarm time 1
Inactive Interpulse time
Time interval within which the unbalancings necessary to activate the zones alarm will be counted with a number
Prealarm time 2 of impulses greater by one. If times lower than 30 seconds are used, the IMQ approval becomes void.
Inactive AND ZONES Time
It defines the time interval within which the unbalancing of the zones in "and" between them is considered valid
Prealarm time 3 to cause alarm. If times lower than 30 seconds are used, the IMQ approval becomes void.
Inactive Offset mains OFF
It is the delay that the control panel must await from the moment network voltage is missing, before the outputs
Prealarm time 4 programmed for this signal activate. Memorisation in the "events memory" happens at the end of the delay.
Inactive
DOOR Buzzer Time
Activ. CP relay Activation time of the buzzer on keypad from the unbalancing of a zone with this function associated.
MM:SS 3 : 0 Survival time
(Supervision time): supervision of the detectors via radio selectable between (40..254min..255). It is a time
Satell. add. interval within which the detectors via radio must be received from the control panel; 255 disables this function.
1 (1 .. 32) Maintenance Interval
Time interval expressed in months that is reset every time one exits programming, which upon expiry, displays
Activate relay
Deactivated on the keypads the message "SYSTEM MAINT". The "0" value indicates that the service is disabled.
Messages latency:
Siren add. the historical messages, for example the visualisation on keypad of an occurred alarm, are displayed for the
1 (1 .. 32)
time set or until the end of the cause that generated them; upon expiry of this time-out, they will be deleted from
visualisation. Upon entering of the user code, the events memory will be displayed.
Siren time
MM:SS 3: 0
- By entering from 1 to 254 in hours, the message will remain displayed until the end of the set time.
Buzzer time - By entering 255, the message will be displayed on keypad until the end of the cause that generated it.
MM:SS 1 : 0
- By entering 0, the message will go directly into the events memory without any warning to the user.
Interpulse time
60 (0:255 sec)
TIMES MANAGEMENT
AND Zone time • Not programmed: the output does not activate
60 (0:255 sec) • MM:SS: the output will activate for the set time;
MM = Minutes / SS = Seconds
Offset mains OFF • HH:MM: the output will activate for the set time; HH = Hours / MM = Minutes
20 (0:255 min) • DD:HH: the output will activate for the set time; DD = Days / HH = Hours

Buzz.DOOR time "Times" Note: the set values may be automatically rounded off after confirmation with (ENT)
255 (0:255 sec)
ÊPress (CLR) to vary - display the times
Survival time ÊPress (é) (ê) to move
120 (40-255min) ÊEnter the chosen number
ÊPress (ENT) to confirm
Maintenance Per. ÊPress (é) (ê) to move
0 (max. 24)

Messages Latency
255 (max. 255h)

to following
page

- 77 -
 from previous
page

Service Codes
ENT éê Service Codes
Installer Code The Installer Code is that code that enables access to the entire programming of the control panel.
ââââââ The pre-set value by default is 00000 (six zeros).

Prog.when Armed Prog. when armed: by setting NO the access of the installer code is disabled if the control panel has at least one
NO sector armed.

! ATTENTION !
By setting "YES", therefore allowing to work with control panel armed,
voiding compliance with EN50131
Enabled by user
NO Enabled by user: by setting “YES” the installer will access to the programming via keypad, via USB, via PSTN line
or IP only if enabled by the user.

By entering the Installer Code any detection on the input zones and on the tamper proof zone is blocked; all
pending calls are also cancelled.
If no key on the keypad is pressed for 2 minutes, programming is automatically abandoned. It is possible to bring
this time to 60 minutes, by accessing the "Menu Block" menu, enabling increase of the system maintenance
Communic. Code period.
ââââââ
Communication Code
If digit on keypad can:
- Active the Control Panel USB connector to interactive programming
- Active the Keypad USB connector to interactive programming
Note: this function is only for ICE Keypad.
- “XWIN” “Synchronize Control Panel” to request to XWIN the programming using the “Remote Prog. Tel.
Access Passw. Number”
ââââââ - “XWIN” “Synchronize Computer” to send the programming to XWIN using the “Remote Prog. Tel. Number”
- “memory Download “ to send the memory events to XWIN using the “Remote Prog. Tel. Number” (maximum
500 events)

Note: Communication code is not setted, you must activated using the installation menu
N.B.: use keys 0 to 9 to enter the password

Program. Passw. Access Password

ââââââ It is an alphanumerical password composed of 6 digits; by default 000000.
This password allows the control panel to recognise the computer for reprogramming via a phone connection.
N.B.: To enter the password, use keys 0 to 9 for the numbers and buttons UP (ON) and DOWN (HO) for letters A,
B, C, D, E, F.

Programming Password
It is a numerical password composed of 6 digits; by default 000000.
It is the password that the computer compares with the control panel before aligning programming via a phone
connection.
N.B.: To enter the password, use keys 0 to 9 for the numbers and buttons UP (ON) and DOWN (HO) for letters A,
B, C, D, E, F.

For the full enabling of the alignment it is necessary that the Access Password and the Programming Password
programmed in control panel, be the same to those programmed in the computer for the selected client. The date
of the control panel must coincide with that on the PC.

ÊPress (CLR) to vary

ÊPress (é) (ê) to move
ÊPress (ENT) to confirm

to following
page

- 78 -
 from previous
page User Code
User Codes The programmable User Codes are in total 512 for control panel XTREAM640 and 64 for control panel XTREAM
ENT éê
64B - XTREAM 64 - XTREAM 32B - XTREAM32 - XTREAM 6B - XTREAM 6 and enable access to all management
functions of the control panel. The values by default are:
Code # User Code 1: 000010 and Emergency Code 1: 000011
1 (1 .. 512 )
User Code 2: 000020 and Emergency Code 2: 000021
Code # User Code 63: 000630 and Emergency Code 63: 000631
ââââââ User Code 64: 000640 and Emergency Code 64: 000641
User Code 511: 005110 and Emergency Code 511: 005111
Active Code User Code 512: 005120 and Emergency Code 512: 005121
YES The Emergency Code is composed by summing a unit without carry over
to the last digit of the User Code.
User prof. # Active code: "YES" enables the recognition of the Code.
1 (1 .. 32)
User Profile: Associates the user code to one of n°32 profiles available in the menu.
Controlled partitions: Every user code can be associated to one or more sectors.
Partitions
Partitions sum: If the sum modality is enabled, the User may decide to individually work on the various sectors
ynnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
for which it is enabled or, by entering the "sum" modality using the 0 (zero) key, simultaneously carry out
Partitions sum armings and disarmings on all sectors.
NO Master user: If enabling the User as master, the code has priority on the keypads, it can therefore work on its
sector even from keypads not under its competence.
Master user As well as this enabling it will also have other functions that are described in the "MASTER USER ENABLINGS"
NO table; certain functions are subject to enabling in the "User Profile".
MASTER USER ENABLINGS
Double check Function Profile Enabling
NO Change User Codes (NO MASTER) of competence area Change User Code: YES
Enable / Disable User Codes of competence area Change User Code: YES
Skip part. choose
NO Change User Code (NO MASTER) label Change User Code: YES
Vocal telephone numbers change of sectors of competence Change tel. par.: YES
SIM Card expiry date variation Change tel. par.: YES
Patrol tour
A600Plus keypad parameters variation -
NO
Skip partition choose: When this option is activated, the user will be able to operate on all his partitions also
MacroArm. B Key from keypads belonging to other partitions (if Master User is in NO)
0 (0 .. 64) Double check (only on A600Plus reader): "YES" enables the possibility of entering the code for 20 seconds,
only after having neared the key associated to the user on reader A600Plus.
MacroArm. A Key The codes set at "YES" always work with "double consent".
0 (0 .. 64) Patrol tour: "YES" enables the code patrol function; the patrol code cannot perform any other operation if not
MacroArm. C Key that of entering its code:
0 (0 .. 64) - It cannot perform operations (armings, disarmings, exclusions, OC)
- It cannot access any user menu
MacroArm. D Key Macro Arm A/B/C/D key: This defines which of the 64 possible multiple switch-ons can be matched to keys A,
0 (0 .. 64) B,C and D on the A600 and A600Plus keyboards (see programming in "Installation")
Macro Arming thanks to A300’s ON/HO/AR/PE keys: By programming YES for all single parameters, the ON,
MacroA300 HO->B HO, AR and PE keys of the A300 keypads installed on the system, will respectively follow the macro arming
NO associated to the A, B, C and D keys (see programming in “Installation”).
Shift 1/2: This defines in which of the 15 available time bands, programmable using the “Timing Programmer”,
MacroA300 ON->A
the user code is enabled. With 0 the code is always enabled.
NO
User label: it is possible to associate a description of 16 alphanumerical digits for every user;
MacroA300 AR->C ÊPress (CLR) to vary
NO ÊWriting keys:
(1)abc1(2)def2(3)ghi3(4)jkl4(5)mno5(6)pqr6(7)stu7(8)vwx8(9)yz. (0)_’0
MacroA300 PE->D
ÊPress arrows (ç) and (è) to position the cursor
NO
ÊPress (ENT) to confirm
Shift # 1
0 (0 .. 15) NOTE: After 3 attempts at entering incorrect codes, the control system will be disabled.
NOTE: To guarantee compliance with document T014, the User Code must have 6 figures.
Shift # 2
0 (0 .. 15)
ÊPress (CLR) to vary - YES/NO
User label ÊEnter the chosen number
ÊPress (é) (ê) to move
ÊPress (ENT) to confirm
to following
page

Example: Two sectors and one PATROL sector

Intends performing patrol that interests zones 3, 4, 13 and 14: the guard can move freely as long as within
SECTOR 1 SECTOR 2 the influence area of these detectors.
To do this, a patrol sector is created, for example number 3, that includes the above-said zones, that
become common. It is now possible to create a patrol user by simply assigning this sector 3 to a user
zone 1 zone 2 zone 11 zone 12
code and enabling the "PATROL "YES"" step. The moment the patrol user enters the code, the common
zone 3 zone 13 zones, associated to sector 3, become inactive, and the surveillance can carry out the inspection. A timer
zone 4 zone 14 is also simultaneously activated (different for every available patrol sector), used to automatically
reactivate sector 3 and, eventually, proceed with the communication (and/or alarm) for "patrol not
SECTOR 3 3
SETTORE completed". At the end of the inspection, the patrol user deactivates the patrol function, and by doing this,
the common zones behave following the arming state relating to the original 1 and 2 sectors.
This example can be replied for up to 4 patrol sectors, each of which assumes an arbitrary number of
sectors on which to perform patrol.

- 79 -
 from previous
page

User Profiles
ENT éê User Profiles
User Prof. # Every User Code can be associated to one of the 32 available profiles.
1 (1 .. 32) The user profiles identify 32 different personalisations to which every user code can refer. The personalisations
consist in the enabling or not of certain keypad functions. The keys that refer to the functions are shown in brackets.
Arms in ON Example: By enabling the "Arms at ON" function, the key (ON) is consequently enabled. If a user code is associated
YES
to this profile, the user will have the possibility of arming at ON.
Arms in ON - command (ON)
Arms in HOME "YES" enables the Code selected for the arming in the ON modality.
NO
Arms in HOME - command (HO)
"YES" enables the Code selected for the arming in the HOME modality.
Arms in AREA
NO Arms in AREA - command (ZO)
"YES" enables the Code selected for the arming in the AREA modality.
Arms in PERI - command (PE)
Arms in PERI
NO "YES" enables the Code selected for the arming in the PERIMETER modality.
Disarms panel - command (5)
Disarm panel "YES" enables the Code for the disarming of the control panel.
YES Immediate disarm
"YES" enables the Code for the disarming of the control panel, without pressing key (5) from the keypad (it must,
Immediate disarm however, be enabled to disarm, see Disarms control panel).
NO Disarms Timer - arm (disarms with timer active)
"YES" enables the Code to the disarming of the control panel, even if the control panel has been previously armed by
Disarms timer-arm the timer. "NO", the Code does not have the possibility of disarming the control panel, until the automatic disarming
NO of the timer.
Disable door opener (Key access OC)
Disab. Door Open "YES" disables the activation of the output programmed as "Key access" combined with the readers.
NO PO inhibition - command 1
By setting “YES” it enables the Code to block the Timer
Timer bypass Activates overtime - command (8)
NO "YES" enables the Code to postpone the arming by one hour, from Timer, for a maximum of three times (see Timer).
Code change - command (1)
Activat. overtime "YES" enables the Code to the possibility of varying itself.
NO Change tel. par. (Changes telephone parameters) - command (1)
"YES" enables the Code to the possibility of varying/checking the telephone parameters:
Code change - Phone numbers with VOCAL or SMS protocol and with user sectors consistent with those of the phone number
YES
- Check residue credit SIM Card
- Check field intensity GSM
Change tel. par.
YES - Variation SIM Card Expiry Date if the code is Master
Memory view - command (MEM)
Memory view "YES" enables the Code to the possibility of examining the events memory of the control panel.
YES OFF ZONE func. - command (ZONES)
"YES" enables the Code to the possibility of excluding the zones from keypad or from RTC with command (0).
OFF ZONE func. Enables User OC - command ( )
YES
"YES" enables the Code to activate the OC outputs from keypad using key ( ) or from RTC using command
(6).
Enable User OC Buzzer exclusion
NO
"YES" enables the Code to the possibility of excluding the sound of the buzzer of the keypad.
Date/Time - command (1)
Buzzer exclusion
YES "YES" enables the Code to the possibility of varying the date and time.
Enable Install.
Enable the Installator for access to programming through the keyboard, direct connection through USB port or
Date / Time
NO remote phone connection or XWEB/EWEB.
Code Communicates
Enable Install. "YES" ensures that a telephone communication is activated every time the Code relating to the user is entered,
YES sending the event "User Code #".
Communicate emer. code (communicates the emergency code)
Code Communicat. "YES" ensures that a telephone communication is activated every time the User Emergency Code is entered
NO (see "User Manual"), sending the event "User Emergency Code #".
Enables RTC fun- (Enables RTC functions) (Remote Telephone Control)
Comm.emerg.code "YES" enables the Code to remotely manage the Control Panel through the PSTN or GSM line (see Blue
NO Voucher).
Stop dialler (interrupts telephone communication)
Enables RTC fun. “YES” interrupts the current telephone communications and those awaiting recognition of the user code (keypad,
NO TOUCH or BIP) and, during a telephone call, pressing key 3 on the phone being called if the user code is
associated.
Stop dialler Automatic RTC valid.
NO "YES" enables the Code to the possibility of directly entering in RTC without requesting the code, after having
pressed key "7" following a call, or in RTC connection from GSM module.
Autom RTC valid.
YES ÊPress (CLR) to vary
ÊEnter number to be set
to following ÊPress (ENT) to confirm
page

- 80 -
from previous
page User Profiles
Keypad RTC Keypad RTC
NO "YES" enables the Code to the possibility of entering in RTC on the A600Plus keypads after having entered the user code
and having pressed key "7" should the code be associated to only one sector, with key should the code be associated
to more sectors (only A600Plus).
Zones walk Test
Zones Walk Test
NO The zones' walk test function allows to display the state of all zones for the control panel/keypads/satellites.
- Key (5), allows to deactivate or activate the memory function. Also, by exiting and entering the MEMO function,
the previous memorisations are deleted.
- Key (CLR), allows exiting from the Zones' Test function.
- The arrow keys (é) and (ê) allow selecting the group of zones to be displayed.
- The wording (MEMO) signals that the memorisation modality is active, therefore the unbalancing of one or more
zones, causes the relative memorisation.
Note: for the lines on the keypads the MEMO function is always active and cannot be excluded
Test Outputs Note: per le linee sulle tastiere è sempre attiva e non escludibile la funzione MEMO
NO Test Outputs
"YES" enables the User Code to carry out a function check of the outputs of the control panel consisting in their activation
Reset Fire loop for 3 seconds (User Manual).
YES Reset fire loop - command (2)
"YES" enables the Code to perform the FIRE Alarm Reset (User Manual).
Reset mem. all. Reset alarm and tamper memories - command (3)
no operation
No operation: the user code has no constraints on enabled arming, the alarm memories are reset when the
sector is switched on.
Alarm: the code cannot switch on in the presence of an alarm or tamper memory. In order to proceed with arming,
the alarm memories must be reset from the keyboard with the command (3) o through the myAVSAlarm application
(by clicking on the sector in alarm the reset will be proposed).
N.B.: In case of tamper, the user code cannot reset or switch on the sector.
Alarm + Tamper: the user code cannot switch on in the presence of an alarm or tamper memory. In order to
proceed with arming, the alarm or tamper memories must be reset from the keyboard with the command (3) or
through the myAVSAlarm application (by clicking on the sector in alarm or tamper, the proposed reset).
Off timers enab. Off timers enab. - command (4)
NO "YES" enables the Code to activate and deactivate the "times off" function of the input and output timed lines.
Multi part. vision
Multi-part. vis. It is possible to vary the displaying of the sectors to which the code is associated, when this is linked to more sectors.
Flat
Sector 1
ko-ap########### Flat: enables the user to display the sectors in groups of 16.

Sect.: 0206154455 Compact: enables the user to display only the sectors of competence in groups of 5 at a
state:okon--arpe time.

Sector #03 ok
Continuous: allows the user to visualise the relative sectors one at a time and, for the first
offices 16, the relative descriptive string.
Commands summary:
[è][ç][é][ê]: to select the sector
[ENT]: to access the sector
[CLR]: to directly set the sector number
[0]: to simultaneously manage all sectors of competence
[ESC]: to go back by one step

COMPACT FLAT CONTINUA DESCRIZIONE

OK K PARTITION #01 ok system disarmed, zones balanced
-- - PARTITION #01 -- system disarmed, zones open
On O PARTITION #01 On system armed in ON
Ho H PARTITION #01 Ho system armed in HOME
Ar A PARTITION #01 Ar system armed in AREA
Pe P PARTITION #01 Pe system armed in PERIMETER
- sector not of competence
Visualisations

User O.C.
User OC It is possible to associate an Open Collector active output to the Code; in this way, every time this is entered, the
0 (0 .. 250) O.C. will activate (0 - disabled, 1 to 250 - enabled).
Emergency user O.C.
It is possible to associate an Open Collector active output to the selected Emergency Code; in this way, every
Emerg. User O.C.
0 (0 .. 250) time this is entered, the O.C. will activate (0 - disabled, 1 to 250 - enabled).
The Emergency Codes are not programmable but are codes that the control panel automatically creates adding
a unit to the "original User Code"; therefore, every User Code has its own Emergency Code.
Istant. key mode Istant key mode: "YES" enables the key coupled with this profile to work in immediate modality regardless of the
NO programming of the reader.

to following
page

- 81 -
from previous
page

NO XTREAM 6B - XTREAM 6
BIP CHANNELS Functions:
ENT éê - None: no function associated

Key number # - Arming ON /HOME /AREA /PERI /Disarming - SECT: ?: the key is associated to the
1 (1 . . 8)
arming/disarming of one or more sectors; if sector 65 (sixty-five) is set, the command
works on all sectors associated to the user.
Operation type:
No operation
- Despatch: Panic/Doctor/Fire: the key is associated to the panic/doctor/fire signal
Operation type:
Activates O.C. - Activates/Deactivates OC?: the key is associated to the activation/deactivation of the
O.C. output. It must be programmed as "Cat. User".
O.C. #
1 (1 . . 250) - Switches OC: varies the state of the O.C. output; activates it if disarmed, deactivates it if
armed. It must be programmed as "Cat. User".
Emerg. key
NO - MACRO functions: the key is associated to the arming MACRO function which number is
Operation type: herein programmed
Arm. ON Part.

Partition #
1 (1 . . 65) Emergency Channel:
Note: if the emergency option is enabled (YES), the emergency code function will also be
Emerg. key activated simultaneously with the operation associated with the button.
NO Keys functioning:
Macro Arming: Keys from 1 to 4 directly activate the function to which they are associated,
Arm. ON Part. the second group of keys is activated with the simultaneous pressing of key 5 (the middle
one) and subsequently of one of the other keys.
Macro Arming
1 (0 . . 64) ÊPress (CLR) to vary
ÊPress (é) and (ê) to move
Emerg. key ÊEnter the key to be set
NO ÊPress (ENT) to confirm

PROGRAMMING OF THE CHANNELS ON THE REMOTE CONTROL

Select the Key Function from 1 to 5+4 according to the
conversion table "Channels - Keys"

1 2
5 Keys to Keys to
3 4 Channels
press
Channels
press
1 • 1 5 • 5+1
2 • 2 6 • 5+2
3 • 3 7 • 5+3
4 • 4 8 • 5+4

to following
page

- 82 -
 from previous
page Readers
Readers
ENT éê
Arming Zone
The functioning of the outdoor arming zones is programmed in this Menu for one key electronic board. By
Arming zones accessing and exiting this menu, all pending armings will be disarmed.
ENT éê
Key functioning mode
• Level mode: when an arming input is balanced with its resistance, the control panel results disarmed; when the
Working mode resistance opens or short circuits, the control panel results armed.
Pulse mode Example of armings sum: the arming from keypad and the closing of the arming input cause a sum of the
armings, with the result that, for the control panel to return in disarmed state, the arming clamp must be open
Disarm Timer-arm and the keypad disarmed.
NO ATTENTION: when two armings are summed, the most important one in hierarchical order prevails.
• Pulse mode: the closing and subsequent re-opening of an arming input causes the arming of the control panel
in the relative modality; a new impulse will determine its disarming. With this setting, the control panel can be
armed and disarmed indifferently from keypad or from arming input, without bounds.
Disarms Timer-arm: "With a "YES" the outdoor armings are enabled, for example "Electronic keys", to disarm
the control panel previously armed from Timer. With a "NO", to disarm the control panel wait for the automatic
disarming from Timer, or disarm from keypad with a User Code enabled to disarm with Timer active.

CAUTION: using this function voids compliance with EN50131

RS serial readers
Serial key blocks
RS readers Enable the management through system key.
ENT éê Select the key block to be programmed.

RS readers Sectors (controlled sectors) -

1 (1 .. 32) with (s) the serial key block is associated to the sector.
The serial key block can be associated to work with one or more sectors.
Partitions
snnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Command mode:
• Single: in this modality the serial key block can be associated to one or more sectors and, when the key is
Command mode neared to the reader, the various possible activations are proposed to the user. The LEDS can be programmed
Singles normally armed or normally disarmed. The operations allowed are those enabled for that key block.
• Immediate: in this modality the control panel immediately works the functions associated to the Key without
Arming modes having to await the removal of the Touch. Every time that the key is neared to the serial key block, the control
ENT éê panel switches between arming and disarming. With regard to arming, the key will always perform that with
maximum priority for which the user is enabled or the disarming. We recommend associating the serial key
block to only one sector and leave the visualisation of the LEDS always active.
Active in ON
YES
Armings: in this menu the readers are enabled to perform or not the activations in total/partial.
included in ON: with "YES" the serial key block is enabled for the total arming
Active in HOME
YES included in HOME: with "YES" the serial key block is enabled for the HOME partial arming
included in AREA: with "YES" the serial key block is enabled for the AREA partial arming
included in PERI: with "YES" the serial key block is enabled for the PERIMETER partial arming
Active in AREA
YES Disarming: with "YES" the serial key block is enabled for the disarming.
Works if CP arm. (functioning with control panel armed):
by setting "YES", the serial key block is enabled to work with control panel armed.
Active in PERI LEDS norm. Armed (LEDS normally armed):
YES
by setting "YES" the always active visualisation is enabled on the reader LEDS.
False key mem. (false key memorisation):
Disarming by setting "YES" memorisation of the false key in events memory is enabled.
YES
Emergency reader:
by setting "YES" all keys working on this key block are considered of emergency.
Works if CP arm. Dr. Op. only Dis. (Door opener only if disarmed):
YES
if "Command mode" = Instant:
by setting "YES", the "OC Key" output associated to the reader is activated only during the sector disarming
Norm. light LED if "Command mode" = Single
NO
by setting "YES", the "OC Key" output associated to the reader is activated only by briefly placing the key when
the sector is disarmed or during the sector disarming .
Memo False key
NO
O.C. Key: Select the Open Collector ("Key Access") to be activated from 1...250 in case the Key is recognised.
Emergency reader
NO O.C. Emer. key (O.C. Emergency key): Select the Open Collector ("Key Access") to be activated from 1...250
in case the Emergency Key is recognised.
Dr. Op. only Dis.
NO Memorisation users-key
ever time a key is neared to a reader, the user-key is recorded in the events memory.
O.C. Key rec.
0 (0 .. 250)
ÊPress (CLR) to vary
OC Emergency key ÊPress (é) and (ê) to move
0 (0 .. 250) ÊPress (ENT) to confirm

to following
page

- 83 -
from previous
page Readers
Keypad
ENT éê
RD on A600Plus/A600EVO Plus/A500 Plus/ICE
Keypad number
1 (0 .. 32) Command mode:
• User Code: in this modality the keypad can be associated to one or more sectors and, when the key is
neared to the reader, one passes directly to the user menu.
Command mode - If the keypad is associated to a sector, it will directly display the state of the sector.
user code
- If the keypad is associated to more sectors, it will display the possibility of choosing on which sector to work.
• Istantantan.: in this modality the control panel immediately works the functions associated to the key without
Arming modes having to await the removal of the key.
ENT éê - If the keypad is associated to only one sector, every time the key is neared to the reader, the control panel
switches between arming and disarming. With regard to arming, the key will always perform that with maximum
Active in ON priority for which the user-key is enabled or the disarming.
YES - If the keypad is associated to more sectors, and a user-key also associated to more sectors is neared (or
master), the key will always perform the arming of maximum priority for which the user-key is enabled or the
disarming, if at least one sector is armed.
Active in HOME
YES
Arming modes
Active in AREA included in ON: with "YES" the RD is enabled to work the total ON arming
YES included in HOME: with "YES" the RD is enabled to work the total HOME arming
included in AREA: with "YES" the RD is enabled to work the total AREA arming
Active in PERI included in PERI: with "YES" the RD is enabled to work the total PERIMETER arming
YES Disarming: with "YES" the RD is enabled to work the disarming

Disarming Works if CP Arm. (functioning with control panel armed):

YES by setting "YES", the key reader is enabled to work with control panel armed.

False key mem. (false key memorisation):

Works if CD arm. by setting "YES", the memorisation of the key is enabled.
YES
O.C. Key: Select the Open Collector to be activated from 1...250 in case the Key is recognised.
Memo False key
NO O.C. Emer. key (O.C. Emergency key): Select the Open Collector to be activated from 1...250 in case

O.C. Key rec. ÊPress (CLR) to vary

0 (0 .. 250) ÊPress (é) and (ê) to move
ÊPress (ENT) to confirm
OC Emergency key
0 (0 .. 250)

to following
page

- 84 -
 from previous
page

Accesses
ENT éê Accesses
RS readers In this menu it is possible to program the acquisition of the keys that will have access to the control panel.
ENT éê Acquisitions:
The acquisition of the Touch keys can be carried out both through the RS serial key block and by using the
A600Plus keypads.
RS readers # Should there be an A600Plus keypad included in the system, for practicality, we recommend using this for the
1 (0 .. 32)
acquisition of the keys.
The individual TOUCH keys are memorised in memory locations from 1 to 512. The same is valid for the BIP
Key # remote controls acquired on the radio satellite.
1 (0 .. 512)
To respect the enablings and the associations of the keys/remote controls to the codes, it is fundamental
they are acquired in the two sections, in the same order.
Key acquisition
ENT éê RS readers
Enables to acquire the touch keys using the serial key blocks.
Key acquisition RS readers # (serial key blocks)
........... in progess Select the key block to be used for the acquisition.
Key
selects the key memory locations to be programmed.
Key deletion
ENT éê Key Acquisition
by accessing this menu the possibility of acquiring the Touch is activated.
Move the Touch key towards the RS connector while the display indicates “.... in progress”
Key deletion Note: if the Touch has already been acquired, the display will show the location where it is memorised.
........... in progress
Key Deletion
by accessing this menu the touch is deleted.
Key keypad
ENT éê Key keypad
Enables to acquire the touch keys using the key block of the A600Plus keypad.
Key # Key
1 (1 .. 512) selects the key memory locations to be programmed.
Key acquisition
Key acquisition by accessing this menu the possibility of acquiring the Touch is activated.
ENT éê Move the Touch key towards the RS connector while the display indicates “.... in progress”
Note: if the Touch has already been acquired, the display will show the location where it is memorised.
Key deletion
Key acquisition
........... in progess by accessing this menu the key is deleted.

All deletion
Key deletion enter this menu to simultaneously cancel all the memorised keys
ENT éê

Key deletion Memo KEY/BIP

........... in progress selects the memory location of the key/remote control to be programmed.
Ass. user num. (associated user number)
All deletion defines to which user the Touch/BIP must be associated. The key/remote control acquires the enablings of
ENT éê the profile associated to the user.
Emergency key
with "YES" it defines that the reading of the KEY/BIP will be considered an emergency code.
Are you sure..??
CLR=NO ENT=YES
Enablings
By setting "YES" the Key/remote control is enabled, acquired in a specific memory location (from 1..512), to
KEY / BIP work.
ENT éê
ÊPress (CLR) to vary
Touch / BIP ÊPress (é) and (ê) to move
1 (0 .. 512) ÊPress (ENT) to confirm

Assoc. user num.

1 (0 .. 512)

Emergency code
NO

Keys enable
ENT éê

Keys enable 1
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn

Keys enable 17
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn

to following
page

- 85 -
 from previous
page

Keypad
ENT éê Keypads
Partitions (controlled sectors) -
Keypad Number
1 (0 .. 32) with (s) the keypad is associated to the sector.
The keypad can be associated to work with one or more sectors.
Buzzer
Partitions For every keypad the functioning of the Buzzer can be individually enabled, in case of wanting to hear
snnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
the scanning of only the input, of output and of alarm time.
Example:
Buzz. on alarm Keypad 1: Alarm + Output + Return
YES Keypad 2: Alarm + Return + Timer Warning
Keypad 3 and 4: Output only
Buzz. on exit Buzzer on alarm: Function linked to "Options Prog./Activate Buzzer".
YES Buzzer on exit: Function linked to the existence of timed lines.
Buzzer on entry: Function linked to the existence of timed lines.
Buzzer on chime: Function linked to "Prog. Options/Chime".
Buzz. on entry Buzzer on door: Function linked to "Prog. Options/Door".
YES
Beep of keys
Enables or not the beep of the keypad upon pressing of the keys;
Buzz. on chime - If set at NO, the Beep of the keys is always deactivated;
YES - If set at YES, the enabled user excludes and includes the Beep as it pleases.
Buzzer Timer ann.
Buzz. on door It is the warning upon automatic inclusion of the timer, which can be enabled or not for every keypad.
YES
QuickArm ON
For every keypad, it is possible to enable the Quick Arm function (quick arming) in ON.
Beep of keys
YES Setting to "YES" enables the QuickArm option for ON
Using this function voids compliance with EN50131
QuickArm HOME
Buzz. Timer ann. For every keypad, it is possible to enable the Quick Arm function (quick arming) in HOME.
YES
Setting to "YES" enables the QuickArm option for HOME
Using this function voids compliance with EN50131
QuickArm ON QuickArm AREA
NO For every keypad, it is possible to enable the Quick Arm function (quick arming) in AREA.
Setting to "YES" enables the QuickArm option for AREA
QuickArm HOME Using this function voids compliance with EN50131
NO QuickArm PERI
For every keypad, it is possible to enable the Quick Arm function (quick arming) in PERIMETER.
Setting to "YES" enables the QuickArm option for PERIMETER
QuickArm AREA Using this function voids compliance with EN50131
NO

Keypad setup
QuickArm PERI
NO For every keypad it is possible to enable the programming of the accessory LEDS and of the
multipurpose keys, press (ENT) to access the menus.

Keypad setup Funct. LED programming : in this menu it is possible to program the activation of the 4 accessory
ENT éê LEDS located on the keypad; in particular

Funct. LED prog. Num. LED # (max. 4):

ENT éê Select the LED to be programmed.
(LED 1 at top, LED 4 at bottom)
Num. LED # x:
LED num. #
1 (1..4) Using key (CLR) choose the associated function, an Open Collector or a type of arming and confirm
with (ENT)

Operation Type:
No operation • O.C. Assoc. #:
ÊPress (ENT) to select the Open Collector of reference.
O.C. #: Set the open Collector and press (ENT) to confirm
Operation Type:
O.C. assoc.
• - Arming Part - Arm. ON Part - Arm HOME Part - Arm ZONE Part - Arm PERI Part
OC # 1 (0 ÊPress (ENT) to select the Partition of reference.
.. 250) Partition #: Set the Partition and press (ENT) to confirm

Operation Type: ÊPress (CLR) to vary

Arming Part.
ÊWrite the number to be set
ÊPress (ENT) to confirm
Partition # ÊPress (é) and (ê) to move
1 (1 .. 64)

to following
page

- 86 -
from previous
page Keypads
Func. Keys Prog. Function keys programming: in this menu there is the possibility of associating to the function keys,
ENT éê A-B-C-D, an Open Collector programmed as "O.C. User/Sect." in menu "Prog. O.C.", or force an
arming. This modality, in alternative to "Quick Arm", enables to perform.
Key num. #
1 (1 - 4) Key num. # (max. 4):
select the KEY you intend to programme: A=1; B=2; C=3; D=4
Operation Type: Key num. # x.
Disarming Use the (CLR) key to select the operation:
- Switch OC: changes the status of the Open
Partition # Collector; activates it when off, deactivates it when on.
65 (1 .. 65)
- Activate O.C.: activates the associated Open Collector.
- Deactivate O.C.: deactivates the associated Open Collector
Key num. # - Swi. ON Sect.: Switches on the sector in ON
2 (1 - 4) - Swi. HOME Sect.: Switches on the sector in HOME
- Swi. AREA Sect.: Switches on the sector in AREA
Operation Type: - Swi. PERI Sect.: Switches on the sector in AREA
Panic dispat - Switch off: Switches off the sector
- Macro Switch-ons: Activates the operation associated with the user issuing the command
Key num. # - Panic Disp.: This is not displayed on the keypad and activates Panic Alarm calls to the programmed
3 (1 - 4)
phone numbers
- Medical Disp.: This is displayed on the keypad, activates the buzzer, for the sectors involved in the
Operation Type: event and activates Medical Alarm calls to the programmed phone numbers
Medic Dispact
- Fire Disp.: This is displayed on the keypad, activates the outputs as programmed in the “Fire” menu
on the control panel and activates Fire Alarm calls to the programmed phone numbers
Key num. # - No oper.: No operation is performed
4 (1 - 4)
O.C. #:
Set the Open Collector to be managed
Operation Type:
Fire Dispatch Sector #:
Set the sector to be managed;
!! CAUTION!

With "Compliant with EN50131" option activated, the Switch-on and Switch-off operations can be
performed only after entering the
user code.

With the "Compliant with EN50131" option deactivated, only the Switch-off operations can be
performed only after entering the user code.

Keypad RTC Keypad RTC

YES "YES" enables the Keypad to the possibility of performing the RTC after having entered the user code
and having pressed key "7" should the code be associated to only one sector, with key should the
Events Audio en. code be associated to more sectors.
YES Events Audio en.
"YES" enables the Keypad to the possibility of activating the communications of the enabled events.
Zones audio en. Zones audio en.
YES "YES" enables the Keypad to the possibility of activating the communications of the inputs openings
OC Audio en.
OC Audio en "YES" enables the Keypad to the possibility of activating the communications of the activations /
YES deactivations of OC outputs

Shift # 1 Shift 1/2: Defines in which of the 15 available shift, that can be programmed by the “Timer”, the A600
0 (0 - 15)
keyboard audio is enabled. If 0 is set, the audio is always enabled.

Shift # 2
0 (0 - 15) NB: During the video verification of the wireless sensors, audio playback on
the keyboards is disabled.

ÊPress (CLR) to vary

ÊWrite the number to be set
ÊPress (ENT) to confirm
ÊPress (é) and (ê) to move

to following
page

- 87 -
Audio Keypad
ENT éê Keypads
Partitions Audio Keypad: this menu is used to select the events that will be vocally communicated by the A600Plus
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
keyboard.
Events to dial Sectors (controlled sectors) -
(s) associates the A600Plus audio to the sector.
ENT éê
The audio can be enabled to work on one or more sectors.
Watch-Dog In this menu the Audio events are associated to the A600Plus:
NO
Watch Dog
Com. Tamper Communication of the Watch-Dog
NO Com. Tamper
Communication of all events of Tamper type,
Mains fault
Mains fault
NO Communication of No network voltage after a delay programmable in "Times Programming".
Battery Battery
NO Communication of the low level state of the battery
Autotest
Autotest Communicates the self-test
NO FIRE Zone
Fire Zone Communicates the fire protection alarm received from the Fire lines
NO Interference
Communication of radio interference signal.
Interference Sirens failures
NO
Communication of anomalies related to the sirens connected serially
Arming ON
Sirens failures
NO Communication of the Arming in ON modality
Arming HOME
ON Arming Communication of the Arming in HOME modality
NO Arming ZONE
Communication of the Arming in ZONE modality
HOME Arming Arming PERI
NO Communication of the disarming in PERIMETER modality
AREA Arming Disarming ON
NO Communication of the disarming in ON modality
Disarming HOME
PERI Arming Communication of the disarming in HOME modality
NO Disarming ZONE
Disarmed ON Communication of the disarming in ZONE modality
NO Disarming PERI
Communication of the disarming in PERIMETER modality
Disarmed HOME N.B.: if on/off voice communication is enabled, the Sector Sound programming inserts the associated audio
NO in the voice message of the A600Plus/A600EVOPlus/A500Plus/ICE keyboards.
Zone bypass
Disarmed AREA
Communication of an eventual zone exclusion
NO
Sensor fault
Disarming PERI Communication of no reception of supervision of one or more detectors
NO Antimask
Communication of reporting antimask wireless sensors enabled this feature.
Zone bypass
Pre-alarm
NO
Communication of zones pre-alarm, if in zones options memorise pre-alarm is set at YES
Sensor fault Communicates codes
NO Communication of the entering of an enabled code
Emergency code - No entering of PATROL code
Antimask Communication to the associated number when an enabled Emergency Code has been entered on the keypad
NO Only for the sectors defined PATROL, communicates the "No entering of patrol code" if it sets the "manual re-arming at
Prealarm YES", to the associated number.
NO Communicates Panic
Communication of the panic message.
Com. codes Communicates Medic
NO Communication of the doctor message.
Com. Panic Communicates Fire
NO Communication of the fire message.
Us. /key false (user/false keys)
Com. Medic Communication by a user or reading of a false key
NO PSTN Events
Com. Fire Communicates the no telephone line
GSM Events
NO
Communicates the low SIM Card credit and, if set, also enables the call for GSM self-test
Us. / keys false
NO
NB: During the video verification of the wireless sensors, audio playback on the keyboards is
PSTN Events
NO disabled.
GSM Events
NO ÊPress (CLR) to vary
ÊPress (ENT) to confirm
to following ÊPress (é) and (ê) to move
page

- 88 -
 from previous
page

WL/XSATHP satell
ENT éê WL / XSATHP
Satellite addr By accessing the "WL / XSATHP satell" menu there is the possibility of programming the sensors via
1 (1 . . 32) radio and the sensors addressed performing the acquisition, the deletion and the signal verifications for
Sensor modify every acquired sensor.
ENT éê Note: all references to the detectors are to be considered relating to the address selected on the
detector with the Dip and not to the zone belonging in control panel.
Sens. acquisition CAUTION: using these peripherals voids compliance with EN50131
ENT éê
Sensor modify: in this menu the acquisition and deletion of the detectors via radio per satellite is
Sens. acquisition programmed.
Satellite addr.(Satellite address): select the satellite on which the acquisition or deletion of the detectors
procedure is to be carried out.
Sens(n) Sat.(n) NB: If the Sat-Radio is set as double there is no need to set "Satellite address 2" to work on detectors
signal received
from 17 to 32.
Sensors deletion Satellite via Radio
ENT éê Sens. Acquisition(detectors acquisition): by accessing this menu the acknowledgement procedure of
the various detectors activates for 60 seconds.
Sensors deletion
1 (1 - 32) Sens(n) Sat(n)(sensor num.; satellite num.): these are the references for understanding which satellite
via radio has received, which detector has transmitted and to which control panel zone it is coupled.
All deletion Signal received: the amount of signal received from the sat-radio is highlighted on a bar from 1 to 8.
ENT éê Sensor deletion (detectors deletion): by accessing this menu there is the possibility of individually
All deletion deleting the various acquired detectors.
CLR=NO ENT=YES All deletion: by accessing this menu there is the possibility of simultaneously deleting all acquired
detectors. Once deletion is completed, the display visualises "executed".
Sensors verify NOTE: to detach the detectors from the Sat-Radio XSATWS 4 for reuse in another system,
ENT éê it is necessary to performthe following procedure to delete the Sat-Radio code memorised:
Sensors list - tremove and reinsert the detector’s battery,
ENT éê - in the first 10 seconds press the TAMPER button 3 times in quick succession.
- If the operation is successful, the LED light will come up steadily for a few seconds
Sensors list 1
ssssssssssssssss Satellite XSATHP
Detector memorization : get into this menu to activate for a period of 1 minute the learning process of
Sensors test sensors connected to the selected satellite. After this period, the keyboard will intermittently the type of
ENT éê sensor connected to the satellite and its corresponding address.
Sens(n) Sat.(n) Sn (n) (detector number) Sat (N) (satellite number) Outspider / BMHP / XSATMINI (sensor type):
signal received This is the way to identify which sensors have been memorized, on which satellite and detector type.
Detector Elimination: not supported function
BIP modify Total elimination (elimination of all detectors): not supported function
ENT éê
NB: to make the elimination of one or more detectors, disconnect the sensor to remove from its serial
BIP Acquisition port, and then perform the detector memorization again.
ENT éê Sensors verify: in this menu there is the possibility of checking which detectors have been effectively
acquired by the satellite via radio and test them.
Group number Sensors list: the acquired detectors are highlighted with a (Y)
1 (1 . . 4)
Sensors test: checks which satellite via radio has received, which detector has transmitted and to
Group number which control panel zone this is coupled. For XSATHP satellites, such as occurs sensors were acquired,
from which the satellite and the sensor type.
Satellite via Radio: Sens(n) (Sensor num.) Sat(n) (Satellite num.) Signal received (signal quality):
Sat (n) TCM (n)
signal received see “Sens. Acquisition”
Satellite XSATHP: Sn(n) (Sensor num.) Sat(n) (Satellite num.) Outspider/BMHP/XSATMINI (Sensor
BIP Deletion type): see “Sens. Acquisition”
ENT éê Note: to include a pad of virtual signal, press (CLR) once. The pad will be active only during the test,
BIP # 1 not during the normal functioning of the system. In keypad, as well as the visualisation Sat(n) Dt(n)
1 (1..64) Zn(n), an "A" will appear.
Note: to activate the memorisation of the radio detectors, press the MEM key in "detectors test"
All deletion modality. This function displays a list of detectors received with valid power level. To exit memorisation,
ENT éê
press MEM.
All deletion ATTENTION
CLR=NO ENT=YES Programming steps corresponding to the BIP remote control, Sirena and EEPROM
cancellation/restore are active only for programming the radio satellite. The submenus are
BIP verify also present in the XSATHP satellite menu but are not programmable.
ENT éê
Remote Controls Acquisition
BIP list It is possible to acquire up to sixteen (16) remote controls for every group (max. 4) that must be coded
ENT éê following the table attached to BIP. It is not possible to acquire more remote controls with the same
coding in the same group and we recommend not acquiring the same remote control on more groups.
BIP list 1
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn To acquire a remote control, transmit from near the receiver, bearing in mind that the ACQUISITION
happens by pressing any key, with the exception of key (5).
BIP test Amends Remote Controls: the acquisition and deletion of the remote controls is programmed in this
ENT éê menu.
Sat (n) TCM (n) Satellite add.(Satellite address): select the satellite on which the acquisition or deletion procedure is to
signal received be carried out.

Eeprom Deletion
ENT éê
ÊPress (CLR) to vary
to following
page

- 89 -
from previous
page WL / XSATHP
Sirens modify: in this menu it is possible to program acquisition and delete the sirens.
Siren modify Sirens acquisit. (Acquisition of sirens): entering this menu the learning procedure of the sensors is active
ENT éê
for 60 minutes.
Siren acquisit. NOTE: acquisition of the sirens is only possible by performing a tamper transmission;
ENT éê The siren also, during the first acquisition phase, memorises a code that links it uniquely to the control
panel to which it was associated both for the signals received and for those transmitted.
Siren acquisit.
Siren (n) (Siren number): this is the reference to identify which siren has transmitted
Signal received: on a bar from 1 to 8 the quantity of signal received is highlighted.
Siren(n) T=xxC
signal received
Siren deletion (Deletion of siren from the control panel memory): entering this menu it is possible to
Siren deletion individually delete the sirens acquired.
ENT éê NOTE: to detach the siren from the control panel for reuse in another system, it is necessary to perform
the following procedure to delete the control panel code memorised:
Siren deletion tremove and reinsert the siren’s battery, in the first 10 seconds press the TAMPER button 3 times in
. . . execute
quick succession. If the operation is successful, the LED light will come up steadily for a few seconds
All deletion
ENT éê
All deletion (simultaneous deletion of all the sirens): entering this menu there is the option of
Are you sure..?
NO=CLR YES=ENT simultaneously deleting all the sirens acquired. With deletion performed, the display shows “performed”.

Siren Prog. Sirens Prog. (Siren programming): parameters can be adjusted for each siren:
ENT éê
Parameter 1 - Enab. accelerom.: setting to “YES” enables reporting of the strain and of disorientation of
Parameter 1 the radio siren as TAMPER.
YES Parameter 2 - Max time alarm: One minute/three minutes
Parameter 2 NOTE: If you set a value of “Siren time” in the “Times” menu greater than “maximum sound duration” the siren
1 (1..2) will automatically turn off when the maximum time expires and the control unit will not activate it again in case of
alarms if not after expiry of “Siren Time”.
Parameter 3
4 (1..8) Parameter 3 - Sound level: there is a choice of 8 Levels. The values are relative to the sound level of both the
Main Sound and the Alternative Sound. 1 is the Maximum and 8 is the Minimum.
Parameter 4 Parameter 4 - Principal sound tone: it is possible to select one of 8 tones for the Principal Sound
1 (1..8) Parameter 5 - Power supply type: select the type of power supplied to the siren between
Parameter 5 1 - Battery 6V or 2 - Power supply 12V + Battery
1 (1..2) Parameter 6 - Tamper active siren: setting to “NO”, in case of tamper / antitear opening the siren
transmits the event and sounds according to the schedule of the combined central unit setting to “YES”, if
Parameter 6
NO the tamper / tear-off is opened, the siren transmits the event and sounds autonomously for the time set
“Max. sound “or based on commands sent from the combined control panel.
Parameter 7 Parameter 7 - Flash on / off: enables the siren flash to flash the on / off of the central office;
YES
On: continuous ignition for a few seconds - Off: three consecutive flashes
Parameter 8 Parameter 8 - Vibration enable: setting to “YES” enables the integrated accelerometer “vibration” function.
NO
Parameter 9 - Vibration sens.: it is possible to adjust the sensitivity of the accelerometer present in the
Parameter 9 siren. 1 = High sensitivity - 8 = Low sensitivity
8 (1..8)
Parameter 10 - Vibration pulses number: it is possible to adjust the number of pulses of the
Parameter 10 Accelerometer present in the siren. 1 = Very sensitive - 16 = Little sensitive
16 (1..16)

Siren verify
ENT éê Siren verify: in this menu it is possible to check which sirens are acquired and their characteristics.

Siren list Siren list: the sirens acquired are marked with an (s)
ENT éê
Siren test: it checks which siren has transmitted and displays its characteristics
Siren list 1 type 1 and wait for the siren information to appear on the display
n
Screen 1: Siren 1 (Siren Number) T=+28C (Operating temperature)
Siren test (Radio signal) 3.6V (Battery voltage) A (Attenuator)
ENT éê
Screen 2 (key 5): Siren 1 (Numero Sensore) V 2.0.0 (Versione firmware sirena)
Siren(n) T=xxC XXXXXX (Siren model)
signal received
ÊPress (CLR) to vary
ÊWrite the number to be set
ÊPress (ENT) to confirm
ÊPress (é) and (ê) to move

to following
page

- 90 -
 da pagina
precedente WL / XSATHP
MD Modify: in this menu you can program the settings of the single home automation modules acquired
MD Modify
ENT éê
MD acquistion: It is possible to acquire up to 115 home automation modules.
MD Acquisition To acquire a home automation module, transmit near the receiver bearing in mind that ACQUISITION takes
ENT éê
place by closing and opening any Phase or Negative input (I1, I2 or I3) within 30 minutes of powering the
MD Acquisition module or by briefly pressing the P1 button of the module.

MD(n) T=xxC Screen 1: MD 1 (Home automation module) T=+28C (Operating temperature)

signal received (Radio signal) 230V (Tensione Alimentazione)A (Attenuatore)
Screen 2 (key 5): MD 1 (Home automation module number) V 2.0.0 (Firmware Version)
MDR201 (Home automation module model)

MD deletion (home automation modules deletion from the control panel memory): by entering this
menu it is possible to delete individually the home automation modules acquired.
NOTE: to detach the home automation module from the control panel in order to be able to reuse it in
MD deletion another system, it is necessary to carry out the following procedure to delete the memorized control panel
ENT éê code:
MD deletion - Keep button P1 pressed until the LED starts flashing red once a second.
... - Press and release the P1 button 3 consecutive times to reset the programming and delete any acquired
remote controls and / or associated radio receiver. If the operation is successful, the LED turns solid green
for about 5 seconds.

ATTENTION: It is recommended to acquire the programming in the XWIN software as, in the case of control
panel board replacement, all that is required is to acquire from the new control panel the programming saved
in order to retrieve the code of the control panel that was removed and the combination of all the existing
home automation modules. Otherwise it will be necessary to perform the maneuver of deletion in the
individual home automation modules as described above

All deletion (simultaneous deletion of all home automation modules): by entering this menu it is
All deletion possible to simultaneously delete all the home automation modules acquired. When cancellation is
ENT éê completed, the display shows “done”.
are you sure?
NO=CLR YES=ENT MD verify: in this menu it is possible to check which MD home automation modules are acquired and their
characteristics.
MD Verify MD Test: verifies which home automation module MD has transmitted and displays its characteristics
ENT éê
MD List Screen 1: MD 1 (Home automation module) T=+28C (Operating temperature)
ENT éê
(Radio signal) 230V (Tensione Alimentazione)A (Attenuatore)
Lista MD 1 Screen 2 (key 5): MD 1 (Home automation module number) V 2.0.0 (Firmware Version)
sssssssnnnnnnn
MDR201 (Home automation module model)
MD Test
ENT éê
MD(n) T=xxC NOTE: to insert a virtual signal attenuator, press (CLR) once. The attenuator will only be active during the
signal received
test not during normal operation. With the attenuator inserted, on the keypad, in addition to displaying of
MD(n), etc. an “A” will appear.
Note: to activate the memorization of the radio detectors, press the MEM key in “MD test” modality.
This function displays a list of home automation modules received with valid power level.
To exit memorization, press MEM.

Delete Eeprom: by accessing this menu there is the possibility of simultaneously deleting all acquired detectors
Delete Eeprom
ENT éê and remote controls. Once deletion is completed, the display visualises "performed".

are you sure?

NO=CLR YES=ENT Eeprom restore: At each exit from the installer menu, the satellite radio memory is read and its
Eeprom restore contents are stored in the internal EEPROM of the center.
ENT éê Entering this menu you can send all the sensors, remote controls and sirens to the satellite.
are you sure? When the operation has been completed, the display shows "executed".
NO=CLR YES=ENT
Reset memo. radio: by entering this menu it is possible to simultaneously delete all the codes of the radio
Reset mem. radio devices stored in the control panel. After cancellation, the display shows "done".
ENT éê

are you sure?

NO=CLR YES=ENT ÊPress (CLR) to vary
ÊWrite the number to be set
ÊPress (ENT) to confirm
ÊPress (é) and (ê) to move
a pagina
seguente

- 91 -
 from previus
page Sirens
Siren address: in this menu it is possible to program the parameters of the Buzzers with serial connection.
Sirens
ENT éê
STC Command (Control Panel State): In this menu you have the opportunity to inform the siren about
Siren add. the control panel state and to customize the operation of the red led by function combined with this
1 (1 .. 16) command; We recommend to program the function of category “ARMING”

STC Command
ENT éê
Category / Subfunction: see table functions command STC and LED
Category
Unused
ÊPress (CLR) to vary
ÊPress (ENT) to confirm
Partitions
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN ÊPress (é) (ê) to move

Subfunction Partition: Select one or more Partitions to which the STC command.
Unused
O.C. activ. time - (see Table Time Management)
O.C. activ. time
Inactive Normally active: set to NO the output supplies a transistorized negative when activated. Set to YES,
the output usually supplies a transistorized negative which is lost when activated.
Normally active
NO
OC audio enabled: by setting “YES” the variation of the state of the O.C. output is vocally communicated
OC audio en. O.C. label: it is possible to associate a description of 16 alphanumerical digits for every open collector;
NO

O.C. label LED Command: in this menu you have the option to customize the operation of the green LED siren,
associating it to any function you want. Changing the default parameters, this command can have effect
on the red led function or be used to trigger an alarm with a alternative sound (see next steps
LED Command “PARAMETERS”).
ENT éê
Category / Subfunction: see table functions command STC and LED
Category
Unused
ÊPress (CLR) to vary
Partitions ÊPress (ENT) to confirm
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN ÊPress (é) (ê) to move

Subfunction Partition: Select one or more Partitions to which the STC command.
Unused
O.C. activ. time - (see Table Time Management)
O.C. activ. time
Inactive
Normally active: set to NO the output supplies a transistorized negative when activated. Set to YES,
Normally active the output usually supplies a transistorized negative which is lost when activated.
NO
OC audio enabled: by setting “YES” the variation of the state of the O.C. output is vocally communicated
OC audio en.
NO O.C. label: it is possible to associate a description of 16 alphanumerical digits for every open collector;

O.C. label ÊPress (CLR) to vary

ÊWriting keys:
(1)abc1 (2)def2 (3)ghi3 (4)jkl4 (5)mno5 (6)pqr6 (7)stu7 (8)vwx8 (9)yz. (0)_’0
ÊPress arrows (ç) and (è) to position the cursor
ÊPress (ENT) to confirm

TIMES MANAGEMENT
• Inactive: the output does not activate • MM:SS: the output will activate for the set time
• Bistable: the output follows the state of the (MM = Minutes / SS = Seconds)
associated function
• HH:MM: the output will activate for the set time
• Blk bistable: (only for re-balancing) the output
(HH = Hours / MM = Minutes)
follows the state of the associated zone activating
in impulse mode in case this is excluded. GG:HH: the output will activate for the set time
(GG = Days / HH = Hours)

Blk bistable note: this option appears only in the steps where it can be programmed
"Times" Note: the set values may be automatically rounded off after confirmation with (ENT)
ÊPress (CLR) to vary - display the times
ÊPress (é) (ê) to move
ÊEnter the chosen number
ÊPress (ENT) to confirm
ÊPress (é) (ê) to move
to following
page

- 92 -
 Functions command STC and LED
Cat. ZONE
Subfunction:
• Alarm: it activates with at least one of the associated zones in alarm state
• Re-balancing: it activates with the balancing of all the associated zones
• Exclusion: it activates with the exclusion of at least one of the associated zones
• Pre-alarm: it activates for the pre-alarm of at least one of the associated zones
• Unbalancing: it activates with the unbalancing of at least one of the associated zones
• Tamper: it activates with the tamper of at least one of the associated zones
• Antimask: it activates with the antimasking of at least one of the associated zones
• Unused: it will never activate
Cat. ARMINGS
• it activates when the sector is armed in ON - HOME - ZONE - PERIMETER modality, or when it is - DISCONNECTED, or when THE
PATROL TIME EXPIRES. (using the patrol function; signals the missed entering of the patrol code within the time programmed for
sector rearming ("patrol time").
• Armings (Arm. Type): select the type of arming of reference:
Arming ON - Arming HOME - Arming AREA - Arming PERI - Disarming - Patrol time expiry - (YES/NO)
Note: it is not possible to simultaneously set at "YES" one of the armings and the disarming or an arming/disarming at the same time as
"patrol time expired".
• Alarm Memo (RK32): by setting "YES" in disarmed state, it flashes if in the previous arming state an alarm has occurred.
Controlled sector: set the sector of reference
Cat. TIMES
Subfunction:
• Unused: it will never activate
• Entry time: activated during the entry time
• Exit time: activated during the exit time
Controlled sectors: set the sector of reference
Cat. USER ACCESS
• Code: by setting "YES", it activates when the associated User Code is entered (see User Profiles)
• Emergency code: by setting "YES", it activates when the associated Emergency User Code is entered (see User Profiles)
• Key: by setting "YES, it activates when the serial key electronic board recognises a Key
• Emergency key: by setting "YES, it activates when the serial key electronic board recognises an Emergency key
Cat. SECTOR
Subfunction:
• Unused: it will never activate
• Alarm: it activates with at least one of the zones associated to the sector in alarm state
• Re-balancing: it activates with the re-balancing of all the zones associated to the selected sector
• Exclusion: it activates with the exclusion of at least one of the sector zones
• Pre-alarm: it activates for the pre-alarm of at least one of the sector zones
• Unbalancing: it activates with the unbalancing of at least one of the zones associated to the selected sector; it can be used for an
external circuit trial signal.
• Tamper: it activates with the tamper of at least one of the sector or peripheral zones of competence.
• Antimask: it activates with the antimasking of at least one of the associated zones to the partition
Controlled sectors: set the sector of reference
Cat. USER
• it activates from RTC, from Keypad entering a user code with "User OC Enab." enabled, from Timer or from RING.
Controlled sectors: set the sector of reference
Cat. POWER SUPPLY
• Mains power failure: with “YES”, it activates when the control panel or the supervised power units connected in series are not powered,
after a delay programmable in minutes. (see “Times”)
• Power unit failure: with “YES”, it activates when the voltage supplied by the power unit of the control panel or by that of the supervised
power units connected in series is higher than 16 V = or when it is lower than the voltage generated by the battery or when the output
voltage on the various board positives is lower than 10 V =
• Low battery: with “YES”, it activates when the battery of the control panel or of one of the supervised power units connected in series
drops below 10.5 V and there is no charging voltage. It resets when voltage rises above 12.8 V =
• Battery faulty: with “YES”, it activates when the battery of the control panel or of one of the supervised power units connected in series,
drops below 9.5 V =
• No battery: with “YES”, it activates when the battery of the control panel or of one of the supervised power units connected in series,
drops below 3 V =
Cat. TELEPHONE
• No telephone line: with "YES", it activates when the presence of the telephone line or GSM is no longer detected
• Call in progress: with "YES", it activates when a telephone communication is in progress
• From Ring: by setting “YES”, it activates when the control panel receives a GSM call from a phone number enabled to perform the
function
Cat. FIRE
• it activates when there is a FIRE alarm coming from one of the satellites or input programmed as Fire.
Cat. KEY ACCESS
• it activates when an acquired key is read by a reader
Cat. TIMER
• it activates when the Timer reaches the pre-fixed day and time; it cannot be controlled by the user.
AUTOTEST cat.
• Activated when the central control unit performs the "Autotest" function. If the time is set as Bistable, the output is activated for 3
seconds
RESET FIRE cat.
• Activated when an enabled user performs a "Reset Fire Line" operation (pressing key 2 in the "User Menu" ).
If the time is set as Bistable, the output is activated for 15 seconds.
Cat. BLOCKING DEVICE
• do not program / reserved for foreign market

- 93 -
 da pagina
precedente Sirens
Parameters Parameters: in this menu it is possible to personalise the work parameters of the Buzzer
ENT éê
Alarm counter: Max 5 in 24h: the siren blocks the functioning of the Cone and the Flash in rest status
Alarm counter after 5 alarms inwithin 24 hours and unblocks it after 24 hours from the first alarm.
Max 5 in 24h Unlimited: the siren does not perform any blocking
Princ. sound tone
Pricipal sound tone: it is possible to select one of 8 tones for the Principal Sound
1 (1 ... 8)

Alt. sound tone Alternative sound tone: it is possible to select one of 8 tones for the Alternative Sound
2 (1 ... 8)
Flash: Follows alarm state: the Flash is restored at the rebalancing of the input that has generated the alarm
Flash 40 min./STC restore: the Flash automatically deactivates after approximately 40 minutes or when the
Follows alm. st. STC input is rebalanced
STC restore: the Flash is deactivated when the STC input is rebalanced
STC Command
STC Command: Red Led = STC: the RED LED is activated at the unbalancing of the STC input and is
Red Led = STC
deactivated at the rebalancing of the STC input
Tamper enable St. chg = 1 Beep: a BEEP signals both the unbalancing and the rebalancing of the STC input
ENT éê St.c. = 1 B.+Red L.: the unbalancing of the STC input activates a BEEP and the RED
LED, the rebalancing of the STC input activates a BEEP and deactivates the RED LED
Antifoam Beep only-No led: RED LED and BEEP are not activated by the unbalancing of the STC input
NO
Tamper enable: In this step, the tampers to activate or otherwise the T T output and signalling to the
Temperature central control unit with serial connection are enabled.
YES

Vibration Antifoam: set at “Yes”, enables control of the Antifoam sensor of the Buzzer, when applicable
YES
LED Command Temperature: set at “Yes”, enables control of the Temperature sensor of the Buzzer
Green Led = LED
Vibration: by setting “Yes”, control of the Vibration sensor of the Buzzer is enabled
Sound level
1 (1 ... 8) LED Command: Green Led = LED: the unbalancing of the LED input activates the GREEN LED, the
rebalancing of the LED input deactivates the GREEN LED
Max time alarm Only alt. sound: the unbalancing of the LED input activates the alarm with the Alternative Sound and
3 (1 ... 8) the Flash. The rebalancing deactivates the Sound while the Flash behaves based on its configuration.
Alt.sn. + Gr. Led: simultaneously executes the actions of Value 1 and 2
R & G Led pulses Unbal. = memo STC: the unbalancing of the LED input activates the visualisation of the
Status STC input status with the RED LEDs

Sound level: there is a choice of 8 tones. The values are relative to the sound level of both the Main
Sound and the Alternative Sound. 1 is the Maximum and 8 is the Minimum.
Max time alarm (minutes): The values are relative to the sound level of both the Main Sound and the Alternative Sound

R&GLedpulses:The value set is relative to both the functioning of the Red LED and that for the Green LED:
Status: the LEDs are activated with fixed light at the unbalancing of the relative input and
deactivated at the rebalancing of the relative input
Follows Flash: the LEDs are activated with a cadence similar to that of the FLASH at the
unbalancing of the relative input and deactivated at the rebalancing of the relative input
5 fast pulses: the LEDs emit 5 quick flashes at the unbalancing of the relative input and
deactivated at the rebalancing of the relative input
1 pulse: the LEDs are activated with fixed light for approximately one second at the
unbalancing of the relative input and remain inhibited at the rebalancing of the relative input
Unb = 5fp. Bal = 1p.: the LEDs emit 5 quick flashes at the unbalancing of the relative
input and are activated with a fixed light for approximately one second at the rebalancing
of the relative input
R=blnk+Fl. V=st.:the Red LED emit quick flashes at the unbalancing of the relative input
and slowly at the rebalancing ; the FLASH emit few quick flashes at the unbalancing of
STC and one slowly at the rebalancing; the Green LED is a “STATUS”

ÊPress (CLR) to vary

ÊPress (ENT) to confirm
ÊPress (é) or (ê) to move
ÊPress (ESC) to go back

a pagina
seguente

- 94 -
 from previous
page Dialler
In this menu it is possible to memorise up to 64 telephone numbers for control panel XTREAM640 and 16 for control panel XTREAM
64B - XTREAM 64 - XTREAM 32B - XTREAM32 - XTREAM 6B - XTREAM 6 . For every telephone number, it is possible to define the
communication protocol (Vocal, Fast, Sia 1st lev., Sia 2nd lev., Sia_Hayes, Contact-Id) , the number of call attempts for every Tel. Num.,
with which interface (PSTN/GSM) the calls are forwarded and if the main, the sector and the additional phone must be communicated (for
vocal protocols).
Small programming steps:
- Set existence of the telephone in the installation menu; PSTN ENABLING: YES and/or GSM ENABLING: YES
- Set a communication protocol; ex: VOCAL
- Set a telephone number to call; in "telephone number " - ex: 049 9698 ...
- Set the communication interface: ex PSTN if using the telephone integrated on telephone line, GSM if using module Xgsm.
- Associate a user to the set telephone number to give the number the user features (RTC - Calls block - Number recognition); leave 0
(zero) if no association is wanted.
- Associate the zones that will have to be communicated to the telephone number. - ZONES
- Associate the technical events that will have to be communicated to the telephone number. - ASSOCIATE EVENTS
- Associate the telephone numbers to the active sectors. - "ASSOCIATE SECTORS"
Definition of "interface": physical mean with which a call is made.
Definition of "protocol": information distribution modality

Dialler
ENT éê Telephone numbers
Telephone numbers Telephone number
ENT éê Select the telephone number to be programmed from 1 to 64.

Telephone Number 1:
Tel. Numb. #
1 (1 .. 64) Set the wanted telephone number
The letters P and W, are set by scrolling with the arrows (é) and (ê) and by confirming the data by
pressing the arrow (è)
Tel. Numb. #
********************* The letter P on PSTN interface ensures that the dialler interprets the number before this initial as necessary
for getting an external line from a switchboard (Ex.: 9P049W334312).
The letter W introduces a three seconds pause where it has been included (Ex.: 049W334312).
The listening of the free line tone, if enabled, starts after selection of part of the number before the P code.
If the interface in use is GSM, all digits before the symbols P and W, are omitted from the selection.

Email: Set the email address to send the messages to. Requires both the XWEB/EWEB optional board to be
installed and the WEB interface to be set.
Email N.B.: only in the first 8 phone numbers
Protocol: defines, for every telephone profile, the modality with which the events must be transmitted.
VOCAL: it is the protocol that is normally used to communicate the alarm messages in vocal.
FAST FORMAT: this is a protocol that allows alarm and technical events to be communicated to special
Protocol receivers installed at Security Firm headquarters
Vocal SIA1: this is a protocol that allows alarm and technical events to be communicated to special receivers
installed at Security Firms, more advanced compared to the FAST FORMAT.
SIA2: this is a protocol that allows alarm and technical events to be communicated to special receivers
installed at Security Firms, more advanced compared to the FAST FORMAT.
SIA-HAYES: it is a more advanced protocol than SIA that allows alarm and technical events to be communicated
to an AVS-certified modem connected to a PC on which the WINREC. reception software is installed.
CONTACT-ID: this is a protocol that allows alarm and technical events to be communicated to special receivers
installed at Security Firms, more advanced compared to the FAST FORMAT.
SMS/Email: this is the protocol that allows alarm or technical events to be communicated either via SMS (in
this case it requires both the optional XGSM board to be installed and the GSM interface to be set) or via
email (in this case it requires the optional XWEB/EWEB board to be installed and the WEB interface to be
set).
Interface: Set the wanted interface towards which the calls are to be forwarded
PSTN: Select PSTN if wanting to forward calls only on analogical line
GSM: Select GSM if wanting to forward the call only on GSM channel using the Xgsm.
PSTN/ backup GSM: Select PSTN/ backup GSM if wanting to forward the call on PSTN line and use the GSM
Interface channel only if the analogical line is absent.
PSTN The switching to GSM happens after verification of the absence of line voltage and/or analysis of the Dial tone
(only if "Free line listening at YES" is set).
Note: the call will be repeated in GSM if the same has not had a good result in PSTN.
PSTN + GSM: Select PSTN + GSM if wanting to forward the call on both analogical line and on GSM channel
GPRS/IP: Select GPRS/IP if wanting to forward the call on the GSM line to a receiver set to the SIA - IP
protocol (supports protocols SIA1, SIA2 and CONTACT ID)
WEB: Select WEB to send the call via the IP network to a receiver that is compatible with the SIA - IP protocol
(supports SIA1, SIA2 and CONTACT ID protocols) or to communicate events via email.
- WEB backup GPRS: Select WEB backup GPRS if you want to forward the call via the IP network to a
receiver set up for the SIA - IP protocol (supports the SIA1, SIA2 and CONTACT ID protocols) via the WEB
network card and use the GPRS connection if the previous is not available. Switching to GPRS takes place
after checking the absence of the EWEB card data connection.

ÊPress (CLR) to vary

ÊEnter the telephone number
ÊPress arrows (é) and (ê) to move on to another menu
to following
page ÊPress (ENT) to confirm

- 95 -
from previous
page Dialler
Link to partit.s
1 (1 .. 4) Telephone numbers
Associate Sector - Group: in this menu the telephone numbers are associated to the active sectors.
Every telephone number can be associated to one, two, three, four sectors or to all.
- Select one of the four association possibilities (1..4).
Partition # - Once one of the 4 possibilities has been selected,
65 (0 .. 65) - Press (ENT) and associate the sector.
Sector #: set the sector to which it is associated; by entering the value 65, the telephone number is
associated to all sectors.
By entering the value 0 (zero), the number is not associated to any sector and does not perform the calls

Only showed with the DIGITAL protocol

Account Code: the digital communications must communicate the Account Code (Client Code). Therefore,
Acc. code every telephone number, for every sector, can have its own Account Code.
000000 • In SIA and SIA_HAYES the code is made of 6 digits;
• In SEIA and Fast Format the code is made of 4 digits;
N.B.: To enter the Account code, use buttons 0 to 9 for the numbers and buttons UP (ON) and DOWN
(HO) for letters A, B, C, D, E, F.

Only showed with the VOCALprotocol

Customizing vocal announcementl to introduce: introducing a value different from zero (0) in the
“WORD” programming menu, it is possible to activate the vocal announcement of the plant introducing
Present. speech message.
0 (0 .. 499) Presentation word : introducing a value different from zero (0) will communicate the associated word
(see word table).
Partition speech
N.B.: The Sector Sound programming inserts the associated sound in the voice message of the A600Plus
0 (0 .. 499)
keyboards if on/off voice communication is enabled.
Says part.number Sector word : introducing a value different from zero (0) will communicate the associated word (see word
table), linked to the associated sector.
NO
N.B.: The Sector Sound programming inserts the associated sound in the voice message of the A600Plus
keyboards if on/off voice communication is enabled
Announcement of the SECTOR number: choosing “YES” will communicate “sector number” words.
Attempts number
3 (1 .. 16) Number of attempts (of telephone number calls)
Communication is repeated for the number of times set. It is clear that if the communication should have
positive result, the attempts will not repeat. With regard to the Vocal protocol, the control identifying the
good result of the call is enabled through the "Listen Reply" option, if the "Listen Reply" option
should be disabled the dialler will perform as many calls as the set attempts.
If all call attempts should fail systematically for more times consecutively, a warning message will be
displayed in keypad: "failed calls"
It is possible to interrupt the call to ones' own telephone number by pressing key "4" on the telephone
receiving the message or it is possible to interrupt the full cycle of calls by pressing key "3" on the
telephone receiving the message, if the telephone number is associated to a User enabled for
"interruption of the telephone communication";
Extend. accounts A A/B extended accounts: in this menu the telephone number is associated to the account group programmed
NO in GROUP A and/or GROUP B.
This link is useful when a telephone number is linked to many sectors.
Extend. accounts B EX: the control panel calls the telephone number of a supervision institute where, for every sector, an
NO "account code/messages" is dedicated.
User associated to telephone:
User # It is possible to associate the telephone number to a certain User to give the number the user features.
1 (1 .. 512) This association enables the called user to have the enablings dictated by its profile of reference (ex: RTC
- Calls block - Number recognition).

The association of the telephone number to the user also allows, if enabled, to enter in RTC telephone on
GSM channel directly upon recognition of the incoming number without requesting the code.
The calls interruption or input in RTC commands following a call from the control panel, will be subordinate
Enab. RTC func. Interrumpts comm. Valid. autom RTC
NO NO YES

OC on Ring O.C. on Ring: An O.C. can be established for each phone number which, when suitably programmed
0 (0 .. 250) (O.C. from Ring or O.C. User), activates when a GSM call is received from the associated phone number.
Zones Associate Zones
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnI In this menu the alarm zones are associated to the telephone number.
In this way, the individual alarm and/or zone tamper can be communicated to the programmed telephone
number, if this is set at "YES" in the menu: memorise alarm. The zone reset is communicated if the
menu: memorise reset is set at "YES".
ATTENTION: it is necessary to associate the telephone number to one or more sectors to ensure that the
control panel can call in case of zones alarm. The control panel will communicate to the telephone number
the sector zones associated to the telephone number.
Technical messages: the authorizations are automatic from the “EVENTS ASSOCIATION” submenu by
to following
page the phone numbers’ association and by the “SECTOR ASSOCIATION” submenu. From this very submenu,
it is possible to do it for the digital communication thanks to the association of the account code or vocally
thanks to the vocal message customization.
- 96 -
from previous
page Dialler
Teleph. options
ENT éê
Telephone Options
Dial tone listen: A free line tone detection circuit is present inside the telephone; when the line is engaged, it ensures that
Dial tone listen the dialling happens only when this is effectively present. In case the detecting of the line tone should be difficult, like in
YES cases of extensions from switchboards, by choosing the option "NO" the free line tone listening circuit is enabled, favouring
the dialling.
Answer listening The disabling of the free line tone listening circuit makes the analysis of the presence, or not, of the telephone line less
YES reliable and this may jeopardise the switching of the calls on the GSM channel of the control panel.
Answer listening: If this function is enabled, the vocal message starts to be transmitted only after the called User has
Autoansw.machine answered; in this case, the call is considered as "completed with success", therefore, it will not be repeated to the set
NO number if the first repetitive cycle is at least heard, or the call is voluntarily interrupted by the user by pressing key "4" or key
3 from the telephone receiving the message.
Dload w/o callb By not enabling this function, the message will start as soon as the dialler will have stopped dialling the telephone number
NO and the vocal calls will be repeated for all "number of attempts" programmed for all entered numbers (see "Attempts ")
N.B.: By setting NO, the unit no longer complies with EN50131.
Autoanswer machine: Should an answering machine be included, the overlapping can be activated (see "RTC Function").
Attempts pause
60 (0:255 sec) Download w/o callb: If this function is enabled, the control panel accepts the remote re-programming directly without
recalling towards the PC.
Attempts pause: Should the calls not be completed successfully, the delay programmed here will be interposed between
Vocal repetition
2 (0 .. 16) the second attempt and every subsequent attempt towards the same telephone number. It must be noted that, according
to regulation, a minimum pause of 6 seconds is automatically inserted between successive calls.
Vocal repetitions: It defines how many times the eventual vocal message must be repeated when a telephone
Num.rings answer communication is activated.
0 (0 .. 16)
In case of wanting to communicate the message to a fixed or mobile answering machine, we recommend setting a
sufficient number of repetitions, such to guarantee the recording of the message on the answering machine.
Slow DTMF dial Num.rings answer: By enabling the Reply Rings function with a number of rings greater than 0, it is possible to call the
NO
system where the control panel is installed to obtain an RTC connection (see "User RTC Functions").
Stop dig. calls: Enabling the function, after a successful call to a digital number the central control unit blocks further calls
Stop dig. calls to the other digital numbers memorised with the same protocol
NO
Slow DTMF dial: By enabling the Slow DTMF numeration function, the slow composition of the tones of the telephone
numbers called is activated.
Enab. RTC by GSM Stop dig. call: Byenabling this function, after a successful telephone call to a digital number, the system locks calls to other
NO memorised digital numbers which have the same protocol.
Enable RTC by GSM: By enabling this function, the system responds in the GSM channel after 3 rings – using
SMS Limiter XGSM485 the ring number is programmable
0 (0 .. 16) SMS limiting device: Defines maximum number of SMS to be sent in an interval of 1 hour. By entering 0 it is disabled,
otherwise the control panel sends maximum that number of SMS in one hour and then memorises an event of "STOP SMS
LIMIT N.". Starts sending again after an hour has passed from the sending of the first SMS of the series.

WARNING! With the “GPRS priority” option = YES, RTC IN GSM / PSTN AND SMS ARE NOT MANAGED

XGSM
ENT éê XGSM
PIN PIN: Enter the valid PIN code of the SIM card. If the PIN code has been disabled this parameter is
0000 ignored. If the PIN codes of the SIM and the one being programmed do not match, after two attempts
SIM credit ctrl. the control unit blocks the XGSM module, in this case it is necessary to set the PIN to “0000” and
NO confirm, then set the correct PIN and confirm.
SIM Credit ctrl: If this function is enabled, the control panel will check the credit of the SIM Card. Should
GPRS
ENT éê a rechargeable card be installed, leave "NO".
GPRS
APN APN (Access Point Name): Name of the access point (server) to which a mobile device will try to connect
ENT éê to gain access to the Internet to make data transfers
APN: Access point name. If left blank, the panel will use the default names made available by the network
APN
operator used (valid only for Italy): TIM: ibox.tim.it, VODAFONE: web.omnitel.it, WIND: internet.wind,
ILIAD: iliad
Username Username: user name for accessing the APN (if required by the operator)
Password: password for accessing the APN (if required by the operator)
Credit request personalization: In this menu, it is possible to personalize the credit request method, in
Password the case of variation by the operator. The control panel is programmed for the request by the following
operators:
Credit req. pers. Vodafone > call number = 404
ENT éê TIM > SMS = PRE CRE SIN \ SMS calling number = 40916
WIND > SMS = SALDO \ SMS calling number = 4155
Credit tel. num.
DO NOT USE THE FOLLOWING ACTION IF THE REQUEST PROCEDURE MATCHES
THE ONE ALREADY PROGRAMMED.
Use SMS Credit
NO Credit phone number: Introduce the operator phone number to be used by the control panel for calling/
forwarding the SMS
Credit SMS Use Credit SMS: Activating this function, the control panel send the indicated SMS in “Credit SMS” for
the credit request. Placing NO, the control panel will ring only once at the phone number indicated in
“Credit phone number”.
Credit SMS: In this menu, it is possible to personalize the credit SMS message, as required by the GMS
to following operator
page

- 97 -
 da pagina
precedente Telefonico
XGSM485
ENT éê XGSM485
Tamper commun. The XGSM485 can contain two SIM Cards. If both SIM Cards are installed, at the first power feed, by
NO
default the operation starts with the Main SIM Card (SIM Card A) and there is an automatic changeover
Tamper rst. comm. to the Secondary SIM Card (SIM Card B). This is controlled by the following events:
NO • No credit
• GSM network down
PSTN on XGSM485 • No GSM field
NO • GSM module operating faults
After switching to the Secondary SIM Card, the device sets a 240-minute timer for automatically
SIM.B avaiable
NO switching back to the Main SIM Card. The device may switch back the Main SIM Card earlier, however,
if any of the above occurs to the second one in the meantime.
Cont. dialtone
NO Communicate Tamper: When this function is enabled and communication with the central control
unit in RS485 is down, the XGSM485 autonomously communicates the Tamper event and any GSM
Num. rings answer faults to the first 8 telephone numbers programmed for communicating these events in GSM.
0 (0 .. 16)
Communicate Tamper reset: When this function is enabled, the XGSM485 communicates resetting
of communication with the central control unit in RS485 and any GSM anomalies to the first 8 telephone
SIM A
ENT éê numbers programmed for communicating these events in GSM.
PSTN to XGSM485: When this function is enabled, the state of the PSTN telephone line connected
PIN to the XGSM485 is controlled.
0000 SIM B available: When this function is enabled, the presence of a second SIM in the secondary
SIM credit ctrl. SLOT is confirmed.
NO Continuous dialtone: When this function is enabled and the PSTN telephone line is absent, the
XGSM485Plus generates a continuous rather than an alternating line tone.
GPRS Number Rings Answer: When the Rings Answer function is enabled and the number of rings is
ENT éê
greater than 0, it is possible to call the central control unit with the SIM active in the XGSM485 to
APN obtain an RTC connection (see “Functions RTC User”).
ENT éê
SIM A (Main SIM)
APN
PIN: Enter the valid PIN code of the SIM card. If the PIN code has been disabled this parameter is
ignored.
Username SIM Credit ctrl
If this function is enabled, the control panel will check the credit of the SIM Card. Should a rechargeable
card be installed, leave "NO".
Password GPRS
APN (Access Point Name) Name of the access point (server) to which a mobile device will try to
connect to gain access to the Internet to make data transfers
APN: Access point name. If left blank, the panel will use the default names made available by the
network operator used (valid only for Italy): TIM: ibox.tim.it, VODAFONE: web.omnitel.it, WIND:
internet.wind, ILIAD: iliad
Username: user name for accessing the APN (if required by the operator)
Password: password for accessing the APN (if required by the operator)

Credit req. pers.

ENT éê Credit request personalization
Credit tel. num. In this menu, it is possible to personalize the credit request method, in the case of variation by the
operator. The control panel is programmed for the request by the following operators:
Vodafone > call number = 404
Use SMS Credit TIM > SMS = PRE CRE SIN \ SMS calling number = 40916
NO
WIND > SMS = SALDO \ SMS calling number = 4155
Credit SMS DO NOT USE THE FOLLOWING ACTION IF THE REQUEST PROCEDURE MATCHES
THE ONE ALREADY PROGRAMMED.
SIM B Credit phone number: Introduce the operator phone number to be used by the control panel for
ENT éê calling/forwarding the SMS
PIN Use Credit SMS: Activating this function, the control panel send the indicated SMS in “Credit SMS”
0000 for the credit request. Placing NO, the control panel will ring only once at the phone number indicated
in “Credit phone number”.
SIM credit ctrl. Credit SMS: In this menu, it is possible to personalize the credit SMS message, as required by the
NO
GMS operator.
GPRS
ENT éê
SIM Card B (Secondary SIM Card)
APN The steps for programming SIM Card B are the same as those described for SIM Card A.
ENT éê
Username ÊPress (CLR) to vary
ÊWrite the number to be set
Password ÊPress (ENT) to confirm
ÊPress (é) and (ê) to move
a pagina
seguente

- 98 -
from previous
page Dialler
Event to dial
ENT éê Event to dial
Watch-Dog
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn In this menu the events are associated to the telephone numbers for sending:
Watch Dog
Com. Tamper Watch-Dog means a particular control function on the microprocessor; in cases of serious electrical disturbances
YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY (lightning, sudden voltage changes, etc.) this circuit causes a "restart" of the system without loosing any recorded
Mains fault data. This control event can be sent to the associated number.
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Com. Tamper
Communication of all events of Tamper type, to the associated telephone number; If associated to a vocal protocol,
Battery the following message will be sent: "Tamper Alarm"
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn N.B.: By setting NO, the unit no longer complies with EN50131.
Mains fault
Autotest
Communication of the No network voltage to the associated number, after a delay programmable in "Times
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
Programming".
Fire Zone Battery
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Communication of the low level state of the battery to the associated number.
Autotest
Interference
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Communicates to the number the activation of the automatic test function of the battery and of the call
FIRE Zone
ON Arming Communicates to the associated unit the fire protection alarm received from the satellites Fire lines
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Interference (No Fast)
Communicates the radio interference signal to the associated number;
HOME Arming
Arming ON
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Communication of the Arming in ON modality to the associated number;
AREA Arming Arming HOME
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Communication of the Arming in HOME modality to the associated number;
Arming ZONE
PERI Arming Communication of the Arming in ZONE modality to the associated number;
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Arming PERI
Disarmed ON Communication of the Arming in PERIMETER modality to the associated number;
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Disarming from ON
Communication of switch-off from ON mode and "failed switch-on" by the timing programmer if there is an event
Disarmed HOME
blocking switch-on.
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
Disarming from HOME
Disarmed AREA Communication of the disarming in HOME modality to the associated number
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Disarming from AREA
Disarming PERI Communication of the disarming in AREA modality to the associated number
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Disarming from PERIMETER
Communication of the disarming in PERIMETER modality to the associated number
Zone bypass Zone bypass (No Fast)
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Communication of an eventual zone exclusion to the associated number.
Sensor fault Sensor fault (No Fast)
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Communication of no reception of supervision of one or more detectors to the associated number.
Antimask (No Fast)
Antimask Communication of the antimask signal relating to the radio detectors enabled for this function.
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
Sirens failures (No Fast): Communication of HP Sirens anomalies
Sirens failures 1 Pre-alarm (No Fast)
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Communication of zones pre-alarm, if in zones options memorise pre-alarm is set at YES
Communicates codes (No Fast)
Prealarm Communication to the associated number when a Code enabled for telephone communication has been entered
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
on the keypad
Com. codes Emergency code (No Fast) - No entering of PATROL code
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Communication to the associated number when an enabled Emergency Code has been entered on the keypad
Only for the sectors defined PATROL, communicates the "No entering of patrol code" if it sets the "manual re-
Emerg. codes arming at YES", to the associated number.
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Communicates Panic (No Fast)
By keeping key (CLR) pressed, followed by (1) in keypad or pressing keys A/B/C/D followed by (ENT) if suitably
Com. Panic programmed, a silent panic emergency call is generated
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Communicates Medic (No Fast)
Com. Medic By keeping key (CLR) pressed, followed by (3) in keypad or pressing keys A/B/C/D followed by (ENT) if suitably
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn programmed, a medic emergency call is generated
Communicates Fire (No Fast)
Com. Fire By keeping key (CLR) pressed, followed by (2) in keypad or pressing keys A/B/C/D followed by (ENT) if suitably
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn programmed, a fire emergency call is generated
Us. / keys false (user/false key) (No Fast)
Us. / keys false Communication by a user or reading of a false key (only with RS)
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
PSTN Events (No Fast)
PSTN Events Communicates the cutting/resetting of the telephone line
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn GSM Events (No Fast)
Communicates the low and out SIM Card credit
GSM Events
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn ÊPress (CLR) to vary
ÊEnter the telephone number Note: (No Fast) indicates the events that are
to following ÊPress arrows (é) and (ê) to move on to another menu not communicated with the FAST protocol.
page

- 99 -
from previous
page Dialler
FAST Channels
ENT éê
Fast Channels
FAST arm./disarm. Programming of all Channels to be activated for the signalling in Fast Format that do not
2 (max. 8) relate to the zone events.
FAST tamper Below are all the Menus that allow entering the various parameters:
1 (max. 8) • Fast Format Channel for control panel Armed/Disarmed signal.
FAST fire • Fast Format Channel for alarm signal of the Tamper dedicated zone.
5 (max. 8) • Fast Format Channel for alarm signal of the Fire dedicated zone.
• Fast Format Channel for microprocessor Watch-Dog signal.
FAST watch-dog • Fast Format Channel for signalling of No mains fault.
3 (max. 8)
ÊPress (CLR) to vary
FAST mains fault ÊEnter number to be set
4 (max. 8) ÊPres (ENT) to confirm

Zone / OC param.
ENT éê
Zones/Open Collector Parameters
Zone Nr.: In this Menu all codes identifying the type of event to be transmitted for every control panel software zone and
1 (1 .. 640) for every telephone protocol are defined.
It is also possible to customise the vocal alarm message of the single zones or state of the O.C. outputs using
FAST Channel the available vocabulary (see telephone table).
3 (1 . . 8) Zone number (1..640): Select the zone to be customised and subsequently press (ENT).
ZONES customisation:
SIA Code FAST channel: The values of the channels to be entered vary from 1 to 8.
1 (1 . . 16) Example: by receiving this code, the Fast Format receiving control panel opens, in case of alarm, a channel
corresponding to the programmed code and closes it for resetting of the zone.
SIA coding (also valid for VOCAL protocol): Depending on the code set, the message relating to the type of
zone varies, both in the vocal communications and in those addressed to the Digital receivers (SIA; SIA-
HAYES; Contact ID).
(see "Example of telephone programming")
The assignable SIA codes are:
Com. codifica zona in Vocale (Sia) > WinRec 3.2 o successive
Code 1 GENERAL Code 9 IRRIGATION Code 1 " " Code 9 SPRINKLER
Code 2 THEFT Code 10 FLOODING Code 2 THEFT Code 10 LIQUID LEVEL
Code 3 GAS Code 11 TEMPERATURE Code 3 GAS Code 11 COLD
Code 4 FIRE Code 12 TAMPER Code 4 FIRE Code 12 TAMPER
Code 5 TEMPERATURE Code 13 BURGLARY Code 5 TEMPERATURE Code 13 SILENT
Code 6 DOCTOR Code 14 TECHNICAL Code 6 DOCTOR Code 14 TECHNICAL
Code 7 PANIC Code 15 MASKING Code 7 PANIC Code 15 MASKING
Code 8 EMERGENCY Code 8 EMERGENCY

For every input zone, the control panel is able to recognise and, therefore, automatically send, four different
states:
a) ALARM b) RESET c) LINE EXCLUDED d) LINE RE-INCLUDED
Says alarm/reset Note: By varying this coding the nature of the transmitted vocal messages is varied
YES
Zones automatic communications
Says zone code Says alarm/reset (communicates alarm/reset): By setting "YES" the word ALARM or RESET is communicated
YES in vocal or included in the SMS
Says zone code (communicates the zone coding): By setting "YES" the wording included in "SIA Coding" is
Says zone speech communicated in vocal or in the SMS
YES
Says zone speech (communicates the telephone zone): By setting "YES" the word ZONE is communicated
in vocal or included in the SMS
Says zone number Says zone num. (communicates zone number): By setting "YES" the ZONE NUMBER is communicated in
YES
vocal or included in the SMS
Send string SMS (sends zone strip on SMS): By setting "YES" the associated zone strip is included in the
Send string SMS sending of the SMS
YES
Zones customised communications
By entering a value different from zero (0) in the programming steps "Vocal word 1 - 2 - 3 - 4", it is possible to
Vocal word 1 customise the vocal alarm communication of the control panel with a maximum of 4 customised words. (See
0 (0 .. 511) telephone table)
Vocal word 1: By setting a numerical value different from "0", the control panel will communicate the word
Vocal word 2 associated to the value (see telephone table)
0 (0 .. 511) Vocal word 2: By setting a numerical value different from "0", the control panel will communicate the word
associated to the value (see telephone table)
Vocal word 3 Vocal word 3: By setting a numerical value different from "0", the control panel will communicate the word
0 (0 .. 511) associated to the value (see telephone table)
Vocal word 4: By setting a numerical value different from "0", the control panel will communicate the word
Vocal word 4 associated to the value (see telephone table)
0 (0 .. 511)
ÊPress (CLR) to vary
to following ÊEnter number to be set
page ÊPress (ENT) to confirm

- 100 -
from previous
page Dialler
O.C. #
1 (1 .. 250)
Zones/Open Collector Parameters
Says output sp. Open Collector customised communications
NO By entering a value different from zero (0) in the programming step "OC vocal word", it is possible to customise
the vocal communication of the O.C. output state (See telephone table).
Says O.C. number Open Collector Number (1..250)
NO Select the O.C. output to be customised and subsequently press (ENT).
Iss. Telephone output (communicates the telephone output)
Vocal word OC By setting "YES" the word OUTPUT is communicated in vocal
0 (0 .. 499) Iss. num.O.C.(communicates number of O.C. output)
By setting "YES" the NUMBER OF O.C. is communicated in vocal
OC vocal word
By setting a numerical value different from "0", the control panel will communicate the word associated to the
value (see telephone table) enabling to customise the communication.

Remote handling ÊPress (CLR) to vary

ENT éê ÊEnter number to be set
ÊPress (ENT) to confirm
Tel. Numb. #
********************* Remote management
Account code Tel. num.: this telephone number is dedicated to the re-programming of the control panel.
000000
Account code: client code that will be used for the re-programming and downloading of the events memory.
Extended accounts
ENT éê N.B.: The Account Code must match the Customer Code assigned in the XWIN programme
N.B.: use keys 0 to 9 to enter the Account code
Group A
éê
ENT
Extended Accounts
Link to partit.s
1 (1 .. 32) A/B Group: select the Group to be programmed.
Link to partitions - Group: the sectors are associated in this menu. Every telephone number can be
Partition #
0 (0 .. 65) associated to a maximum of 32 sectors.
- Select one of the 32 association possibilities (1..32).
Account code - Once one of the 32 possibilities has been selected,
000000 - Press (ENT) and associate the sector.
Partition #: set the sector to which it is associated; by entering the value 65, the telephone number is
Group B associated to all sectors. By entering the value 0 (zero), the number is not associated to any sector and
ENT éê does not perform the calls
Link to partit.s Account Code/messages
1 (1 .. 32) - if the telephone number is digital: enter the alphanumerical recognition code of the system
- if the telephone number is vocal, this step enables the customised communications of the vocal number.
Partition # For greater details check the chapter referring to the "vocal messages"
0 (0 .. 65)
N.B.: To enter the Account code, use buttons 0 to 9 for the numbers and buttons UP (ON) and DOWN
Account code (HO) for letters A, B, C, D, E, F.
000000
ÊPress (CLR) to vary
ÊEnter number to be set
ÊPress arrows (é) and (ê) to move on to another menu
ÊPress (ENT) to confirm
GPRS / WEB IP
ENT éê
GPRS / WEB IP
A
ENT éê GPRS/WEB IP interface
Ip digital protocols sent to 4 different receivers
IP Addr
Telephone profile SETTING:
- for SIA IP1> set 1 (or <empty>) on the telephone number / - for SIA IP2> set 2 to the telephone number
Socket Port - for SIA IP3> set 3 to telephone number / - for SIA IP4> set 4 to the telephone number
0
B “A” and “B” identify the complementary IP Addresses to which the communications are sent and the
ENT éê relative port.
E.G.: If the control panel does not dialogue via IP Addr “A”, it automatically reroutes communications to IP
IP Addr Addr “B” and remains connected until a dialogue block occurs with this IP Addr. Only in this case will
communications return to IP Addr “A”.
IP Addr: Technical network parameter
Socket Port Socket Port: Technical network parameter
0 User Password: this is the encrypting password, it is identical for both IP addresses and it must match the
one entered in the remote receiver.
User Password
Int.LinkTest IP: is the interval of the periodic presence test towards the SIA-IP receivers enabled (is sent
Int.LinkTest IP to the receiver a null event).
0 (10...65530) - 0 (zero) the link test is disabled. - from 10 to 65350 seconds, interval between tests
Telephone profiles programmed with digital protocols and GPRS / IP, EWEB or EWEB bk GPRS interface,
to following where the “Autotest” event has been enabled, are used to send the LinkTest IP
page

- 101 -
 from previous
page Dialler
Email
ENT éê Email
Server SMTP Email: this menu is used to set the parameters for sending events via email

SMTP Server: SMTP Server name. Parameter supplied by the service manager.
Socket Port
Socket Port: Technical network parameter
0 Sender: Enter the e-mail address or the name assigned to the control panel
Sender Showed name: Enter the name of the sender of the e-mail address
Username: By setting Authentication to “YES”, this is the Username required to access the SMTP Server
Password: By setting Authentication to “YES”, this is the Password required to access the SMTP Server.
Showed name Encryption: By setting to “YES”, it sends the message encrypted with the SSL protocol
Authentication: By setting to “YES”, it uses access credentials to the SMTP Server (Username and Password)
Username
ÊPress (CLR) to vary
ÊWrite the parameter to set
Password ÊPress arrows (é) and (ê) to move on to another menu
ÊPress (ENT) to confirm
Encryption
NO
Authentication
NO
App Manager
ENT éê App Manager
Enable
NO APP Manager: this menu is used to set the parameters for managing the dedicated App

GPRS priority Enable: By setting “Yes”, connection of users with the “MY AVS ALARM” App is enabled
NO GPRS priority: It defines if the GPRS connection is more or less important than the GSM one. Choosing
“NO” the GPRS connection is only activated via automatic sending of the sms message after accessing from
WEB bkup GPRS the MyAVSAlarm App for up to 10 minutes. Choosing “YES” the GPRS connection is normally active except
NO when communicating events.

A WARNING! With the “GPRS priority” option = YES, RTC IN GSM / PSTN AND SMS ARE NOT MANAGED
ENT éê WEB backup GPRS: By setting to "YES" the EWEB board will be used as a priority for the connection to the
IP Addr myAVSAlarm cloud and GPRS as a backup.
The switching to GPRS takes place after checking the absence of the EWEB board connection.
When the connection of the EWEB board is restored, the GPRS will remain active for 10 minutes before
Socket Port deactivating
0 “A” and “B” identify the complementary IP Addresses to which the communications are sent and the relative port.
E.G.: If the control panel does not dialogue via IP Addr “A”, it automatically reroutes communications to IP Addr “B”
B
ENT éê and remains connected until a dialogue block occurs with this IP Addr. Only in this case will communications return to IP
Addr “A”.
IP Addr IP Addr - dev.myavsalarm.com: Parameter set by the service operator (only to be changed if communicated by AVS
Electronics).
Socket Port - 27216: Parameter set by the service operator (only to be changed if communicated by AVS Electronics).
Socket Port
User Password: his is the identification password, identical for both IP addresses, that must coincide with the one
0
entered in the remote server.
Panel ID Panel ID: the alphanumerical code that identifies the central control unit.

Surveil. cameras
ENT éê Cameras
Surveil. cam. #
ENT éê Sourveillance cameras:

Events to dial Events to dial: The events that trigger the recording of the selected camera you can associate in this menu.
ENT éê

Com. tamper
NO Com. Tamper: Activation with all events of Tamper type

ON Arming ON Arming: Activation with the Arming in ON modality

NO
HOME Arming: Activation with the Arming in HOME modality
HOME Arming
NO
AREA Arming: Activation with the Arming in AREA modality
AREA Arming
NO PERIMETER Arming: Activation with the Arming in PERIMETER modality
PERI Arming
NO Disarmed ON: Activation with Disarming in ON modality

Disarmed ON
NO

to following
page

- 102 -
 from previous
page Cameras
Disarmed HOME Disarmed HOME : Activation with Disarming in HOME modality
NO

Disarmed AREA Disarmed AREA: Activation with Disarming in AREA modality

NO

Disarmed PERI Disarmed PERIMETER: Activation with Disarming in PERIMETER modality

NO

Com. codes Communicates codes: Activation with the entering of an enabled code
NO

Emerg. codes
Emergency Code: Activation with the entering of an enabled emergency code
NO
Us/Key false Us. /key false (user/false keys): Activation with a user or reading of a false TOY
NO

Com. Panic Communicates Panic: Activation with the panic message

NO

Com. Medic
NO Communicates Medic: Activation with the doctor message

Com. Fire
NO Communicates Fire: Activation with the fire message

Zones Zone: Activation with alaram selected zone

nnnnnnnnnnnnnn

Security Service Security Service: Parameters related to the associated Security Service
ENT éê The alarm video, created by wireless detectors with build in camera or IP Camera link to the zones, is sent
to the monitoring station.
N.tel.reference Teleohone Number reference: By associating the telephone number position, the Account Code
0 (0..64)
programmed for sectors 1 and 2 will be communicated
Acc.nt name P 1
Account name Partition 1: Name associated with partition 1 video checks
Acc.nt name P 2 Account name Partition 2: Name associated with partition 2 video checks

Rec.Center ID Receiver Center ID: Monitoring Station identification that links the video to this M.S.
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

Date/Time
Date/Time Programming
if the clock is managed by the hardware of the control panel the current date and time appearing on the
display keypad are set; for the analysis of the events recorded in the events memory to be reliable, it is
Date / Time important that the date and time be correctly programmed.
ENT éê

Hours ÊPress (CLR) to vary

15 (0 .. 23) ÊEnter the time
ÊPress (ENT) to confirm
Minuts ÊPress arrows (é) (ê) to move
30 (0 .. 59) ÊEnter Minutes/Day/Month/Year
Day ÊPress (ENT) to confirm
10 (0 .. 31) ÊPress (ESC) to exit
Summer/Winter
Month In this menu you set the time using the hardware management of the Central or via synchronization to an NTP
5 (0 .. 12) server over the Internet connection that is connected Eweb card.
Year Clock
6 (0 .. 99) Ctr Panel: the date and time must be set manually in the appropriate menu Hours / Minutes / Day / Month /
Year and enables to control the function of the change summer / winter time automatically or individually.
Summer/Winter Operations
ENT éê - Disabled: Clock: the automatic change (winter><Summer) is disabled.
- SS-LS Automatic: By setting at "YES", the time change is performed in automatic without considering
Clock that set in steps Time+1 /Time-1.
Ctr panel - Custom: By setting at "NO", the time change is performed following the parameters set in steps Time+1
/Time-1.
Operations
Disabled Time+1: means the passing to standard time (bring clocks forward by one hour, from 2:00 to 3:00,
usually the last Sunday in March)
Time-1: means the passing to summer time (bring clocks backward by one hour, from 3:00 to 2:00,
usually the last Sunday in October)

to following Note: following a connection (USB/MODEM or TCP/IP) with the Computer, the date and time
page automatically update with the time on the PC

- 103 -
 from previous
page Date/Time
Summer/Winter Clock
ENT éê Eweb: the date and time information is synchronized by a NTP server (eweb uses by default:
europe.pool.ntp.org:123 if not expressly customized in the "NTP" menu, see page 105) through the Internet
Clock connection provided to Eweb card.
EWEB
GPRS: the date and time are periodically updated from the myAVSAlarm cloud through the internet connection
Operations provided by the SIM card.
Disabled
- Operations
Timezone Disabled: Clock: the automatic change (winter><Summer) is disabled.
0 (0..112) Automatic DST: the change now winter-> standard and standard-> winter will happen automatically.
- Timezone
in this menu you should set the time zone of the country where the plant is installed.
Values from 0 to 12 indicate positive deviations to ‘UTC (Coordinated Universal Time / Coordinated
Universal Time). Values from 101 to 112 indicate negative deviations to ‘UTC.

Examples: Italy, France, Germany have the time zone UTC+1, setup Timezone: 1
Greece and Bulgaria have the time zone UTC+2 -> setup Timezone: 2
Guatemala and Nicaragua have the time zone UTC-6 -> setup Timezone: 106
Bolivia and Venezuela have the time zone UTC-4 -> setup Timezone: 104
Autotest
ENT éê
Autotest
I Autotest Hour
0 (0 .. 23)
The Autotest is a dynamic test of the batteries of the control panel and of the intelligent additional supply units (mod.
POWER1Q or POWER4Q); it evaluates the discharging curve of the relative batteries and shows the result if negative.
I Autotest Min.
0 (0 .. 59) It can be carried out at the programmed time and can also be intended as "supervision test of the system", if programmed
to send a call to a tele-listening centre.
Autotest Interv. With the programming of the interval, it is established every how many hours the Self-test function will be carried out.
0 (0 .. 255) By entering the value 0 (zero), the Self-test will never be carried out.
Every time access is gained with the installer code to the programming menu, the self-test restarts from the
Autotest on arm time and minutes programmed for the first self-test.
NO Example: the self-test function is to be activated at 22:30 of every day, both to evaluate the efficiency of the batteries
and to communicate the supervision of the same system.
Time 1st Autotest: 22
Min. 1st Autotest: 30
Autotest Interval: 24 (every 24 hours)
Autotest in Arming: NO (if enabled, the self-test is carried out upon arming of any sector of the control panel if this is
at least 5 minutes from the previous).
Note: The arming of the control panel is subject to the good outcome of the self-test procedure.
Programm. Timer
ENT éê
Timer
Operations
ENT éê The Timer has the possibility of managing the automatic armings of the system and the activations of
the OC.
Day # 0
(1.. 7) OPERATION TYPE

Operation # • NO OPERATION: no operation is carried out.

1 (1 .. 32)
• ACTIVATES O.C. (from 1 to 250): to select the wanted output, confirm with (ENT) and press the arrow
Operation Hours:
0 (0 .. 23) button downwards, then press (CLR), enter the number of the O.C. and confirm with (ENT).
Attention: the O.C. output in this way associated must be programmed as "O.C. timer" so that it
Operation Min.: cannot be controlled by the User Code, or "OC user" so it can be controlled by the User Code, with a
0 (0 .. 59) programmable time.
• DEACTIVATES O.C. (from 1 to 250): deactivates the O.C., subsequently programmed
Operation type:
No operation • Part. arm. ann.: activates the keypads buzzer in the time programmed in "Warning Duration". Example:
If having to warn the activation of an O.C. output a few minutes in advance, program the operation
O.C. # "Inclusion Warning" at the wanted time. Example: (22:25 - Inclusion Warning) and (22:30 - Activation
0 (1 .. 250)
O.C. 12)
Partition #
1 (1 .. 64) • Arm. ON Part. • Arm. HO Part. • Arm. AR Part. • Arm. PERI Sect.: Arms the
selector in ON-HOME-AREA-PERI
Shift # • Disarm. Part.: Disarms partition
1 (1 .. 15)
• Start shift (from 1 to 15): to select the start of the partition for which the User Codes and the Audio of
the A600 Plus keyboards are enabled, confirm with (ENT) and press (CLR), enter the number of the
time band and confirm with (ENT). Press (ESC) to exit.
• End shift (from 1 to 15): to select the end of the partition for which the user codes and the Audio of the
keyboards are enabled.

ÊPress (CLR) to vary

ÊWrite the parameter to set
to following ÊPress arrows (é) and (ê) to move on to another menu
page ÊPress (ENT) to confirm

- 104 -
from previous
page Timer
Extraordinary Activation: While the warning time upon arming is sounding, a Code must be entered enabled
for the inclusion of the extraordinary (see "Prog.User Code/ ... /Activate Extraord." with a "YES") and key (8)
must be pressed.
Every time arming is delayed by 1 hour for a maximum of 3 times. According to Standard CEI 79.2, the arming
delay can be maximum of 180 minutes.
Disarms Active Timer: By entering a Code enabled for the disarming of the Active Timer (see "Prog.User
Code/... / Disarms active Timer" with a "YES"), the User Code is allowed to disarm the system, even when the
system should result armed by Timer.
Functioning modality: With Conform.EN50131 set to YES: if an event is present at switch-on, the Timing
Programmer blocks and reports non-insertion on the phone to the programmed numbers (see Telephone /
Associate events / Switching off ON).
With Conform.EN50131 set to NO: if an event is present at switch-on, the Timing Programmer performs
insertion even with the “Conditioned switch-on” set to YES.

N.B.: the possibility of switching off a switch-on commanded by the Programming Timer from the keypad or
from an external key can be programmed in the User Profiles and Activators > Switch-on zone menu

The week day automatically synchronises with the date set in the system and makes the programming days
correspond as follows:
(1) Mon - (2) Tue - (3) Wed - (4) Thur - (5) Fri - (6) Sat - (7) Sun
In this way, by programming day 3, the operations to be carried out on the Wednesday are programmed.
(ATTENTION IN ENTERING THE DATE CORRECTLY)

Copy from Monday

ENT éê Copy from Monday
Copy from Monday:
Copy from Monday • To Friday: copies all operations programmed for day 1 to day 5.
• To Sunday: copies all operations programmed from day 1 to day 7. To disable the timer, program every
to Friday operation for day 1, with the "No Operation" modality, and use the function "copy to Sunday".
or
to Sunday
ÊPress (CLR) to vary
ÊWrite the parameter to set
ÊPress arrows (é) and (ê) to move on to another menu
ÊPress (ENT) to confirm

Holidays
ENT éê Holidays
Holiday # It is possible to program n. 20 annual holiday periods, during which no programmed function will be carried out.
1 (0 .. 20) Example 1: The holiday of only one day, ex. 22/07/97, must be set as follows:
1st - [start day 22] [start month 07] [end day 22] [end month 07]
Start Day Example 2: The holiday that starts on 25.04.97 and ends on 26.04.97 must be set:
0 (0 .. 31) 1st - [start day 25] [start month 04] [end day 26] [end month 04]
Example 3: The holiday that starts on 25/12/96 and ends on 06/01/97 must be set:
Start Month 1st - [start day 25] [start month 12] [end day 31] [end month 12] and 2nd - [start day 01] [start month 01] [end
0 (0 .. 12)
day 06] [end month 01]
End Day Example 4: The following holiday is not admitted:
0 (0 .. 31) 1st - [start day 15] [start month 12] [end day 15] [end month 01]

End Month Note: The order in which the holiday periods are entered is not important.
0 (0 .. 12)
ÊPress (CLR) to vary
ÊWrite the parameter to set
ÊPress arrows (é) and (ê) to move on to another menu
ÊPress (ENT) to confirm

Buzzer announce
0 (0 .. 60) Buzzer Annunce
Buzzer announce: it is possible to ensure that the automatic armings are pre-warned by a beep, on the
enabled keypads, for a time programmed under "warning duration". During this period of time, by entering an
enabled code, it will be possible to delay arming by one hour (extraordinary inclusion). Ex. If 5 minutes are
programmed, it starts to sound 5 minutes before arming.

NOTE: in the event of use of the timing programming, to prevent the voiding of compliance with EN50131, a
warning time must be programmed.

ÊPress (CLR) to vary

ÊWrite the parameter to set
ÊPress arrows (é) and (ê) to move on to another menu
ÊPress (ENT) to confirm

to following
page

- 105 -
 from previous
page XWEB/EWEB/WIFI
XWEB/EWEB The following steps must be configured on the basis of the parameters relating to the network to
ENT éê which the device is connected:

IP Addr IP Addr: the IP address that allows access to the XWEB board
0.0.0.0 Example: To enter the address 88.42.243.132, the numbers must be split as follows

Subnet Mask IP Addr

0.0.0.0 192.168.1.5

Subnet Mask: Network technical parameter

Gateway
0.0.0.0 Example: To enter the address 88.42.243.132, the numbers must be split as follows

Subnet Mask
DNS1 255.255.255.0
0.0.0.0

DNS2 Gateway: Network technical parameter

0.0.0.0 Example: To enter the address 88.42.243.132, the numbers must be split as follows

DHCP Gateway
NO 192.168.1.1

Web Port DNS1: Network technical parameter

80 Example: To enter the address 88.42.243.132, the numbers must be split as follows
HTTPS Port DNS1
443 192.168.1.1

Socket Port DNS2: Network technical parameter

2101 Example: To enter the address 88.42.243.132, the numbers must be split as follows
DNS2
Inst. Password 192.168.1.10

DHCP: NO: DHCP service deactivated

User Password YES: Uses the DHCP service for network parameters

Web Port: Access port through browser; usually configured with a value of 80
DDNS Type
0
HTTPS Port: Secure access port via Browser; 443 is the value that is normally configured.
This parameter can only be used with pre-set peripherals (such as EWEB).
DDNS Username
0
Socket Port: Access port for connection to PC via the proprietary AVS protocol
DDNS Password E.g.: for connection through ELM and XWIN, the value of 2101 is usually configured

Inst. Password: authentication code for publication of graphic maps

DDNS Website
User Password: master authentication code for registering user access password

WI FI DDNS Type: 0 = None; 1 = No IP ; 2 = DynDNS.org

ENT éê

SSID The following parameters must be configured only when using a dynamic DNS service:

DDNS Username: parameter supplied by DDNS service manager

KEY DDNS Password: parameter supplied by DDNS service manager
DDNS Website: parameter supplied by DDNS service manager
Encryption
Inactive WI FI: In the case of WIFI connection, the following steps must be configured according to the parameters of
the network to which the device will be connected
NTP SSID: the name that allows the users to identify the WIFI network. Technical parameter of the network.
ENT éê
KEY: Network technical parameter.
A
ENT éê Encryption: Network technical parameter.
IP Addr
NTP: in this menu you can set the parameters for the management of 1 or 2 alternative NTP servers with
respect to the one used by default by the EWEB network card (default: europe.pool.ntp.org:123)
Socket Port
0
IP Address A / B: NTP server address
B A / B socket port: Connection port with the NTP server
ENT éê
IP Addr
ÊPress (CLR) to vary
Socket Port ÊWriting keys:
(1)abc1(2)def2(3)ghi3(4)jkl4(5)mno5(6)pqr6(7)stu7(8)vwx8(9)yz. (0)_’0
ÊPress arrows (ç) and (è) to position the cursor
to following ÊPress (ENT) to confirm
page

- 106 -
 from previous
page

Copy
ENT éê
Copy
Zones This menu enables copying of the features set for one "zone, O.C., User, telephone number" on another
ENT éê "zone, O.C., User and telephone number".
Example - Zone
From => Just select the zone number to be copied
1 (1 ..999) "From => n. zone (1..999)" and the zone number on which all features are to be copied "=> To n. zone
(1..999)".
=> To
1 (1 ..999) !! Attention !!
no elements are copied and in particular for:
O.C. Zones:
ENT éê - the link between "software" zone and physical input
- the zone strip
From => O.C.:
1 (1 ..999) - the o.c. strip
User:
=> To - the value of the user code
1 (1 ..999)
- the user strip
Telephone numbers:
User
- the value of the telephone number
ENT éê
Note: with regard to the copy of the telephone numbers, all associations of the telephone numbers to the
From => events are also copied.
1 (1 ..999)
ÊPress (é) (ê) to move
=> To ÊPress (CLR) to select
1 (1 ..999) ÊEnter the element number
ÊPress (ENT) to confirm
Telephone numbers
ENT éê

From =>
1 (1 ..999)

=> To
1 (1 ..999)

Events memory
ENT éê
Events Memory
Partition 1-64 (+) All events that have been programmed for recording in the events memory of the control panel can be
0 viewed.

1° 09 : 22 15 / 09 The non-volatile memory contains up to 2000 events and when this limit had been reached, the new event
Installer code will "delete the oldest", which was the first to occur, so the last 2000 events will also be recorded.
2° 09 : 10 15 / 09 By accessing the Events Memory Menu, there is the possibility of analysing everything that has occurred
Alarm Line 1 starting with the most recent event, to recede in time to the eldest.
2° 09 : 10 15 / 09
When an event generated by a zone or a sector appears, press [CLR] once to display the Associated
Box
String; press again to see whether the Event Signalled by the phone dialler has been communicated to
ê1 ê8 16ê each of the phone numbers.
nnyynnnnyyynnnnn
When an event generated by a user code appears, press [CLR] once to display the Associated String;
ê17 ê24 32ê press again to view the access ID assigned to the code; press a third time to see whether the Event
nnyynnnnyyynnnnn Signalled by the phone dialler has been communicated to each of the phone numbers.
3° 09 : 05 15 / 09
The event results always not signalled if, during programming, it has not been associated to the
Us.Cod 1 P 1
telephone number or if in "Telephone options", "Listen Reply" is set at NO.
2° 09 : 10 15 / 09
Mario ÊPress (é) (ê) to move
ÊPress (CLR) to see the result of the telephone calls
2° 09 : 10 15 / 09 ÊPress (CLR) to return to the displayed event
Access. Iden. 2
ê1 ê8 16ê
nnyynnnnyyynnnnn
ê17 ê24 32ê
nnyynnnnyyynnnnn

to following
page

- 107 -
 from previous
page

EEPROM Reset
ENT éê
Reset EEPROM
Are you sure..?? Confirming RESET EEPROM causes the resetting of the entire control panel configuration bringing it back to
CLR=NO ENT=YES default values, excluding the Events Memory.
ÊPress (ENT) to reset all default parameters
ÊPress (CLR) to exit
USB link
ENT éê USB Connection
USB link Enter this mode to enable the USB connection to perform interactive programming.
>>> ÊPress (ESC) to exit

Firmware update
ENT éê
FIRMWARE update
Communic. Code Confirming the FIRMWARE update causes the deletion of the management software of the control
ââââââ panel. This operation makes the control panel unusable until the UPGRADE of the FIRMWARE
is carried out using a PC.
Are you sure..?? It is NOT possible, once the operation is confirmed, to restart the control panel.
CLR=NO ENT=YES This procedure does not delete programming of the control panel parameters; all settings relating to the
keypads number, satellites, zones programming, codes, telephone, etc., remain even after the UP-GRADE
procedure.
ÊEnter the communication code
ÊPress (ENT) to delete the FIRMWARE
DO NOT CARRY OUT THIS PROCEDURE UNLESS IN POSSESSION OF A PC WITH SOFTWARE FOR THE UPGRADING
OF THE FIRMWARE OF THE CONTROL PANEL

Diagnostic
ENT éê Diagnostics
Ctr Panel This programming step allows to check a series of parameters to verify the correct installation.
ENT éê It is possible to check the control panel and the new generation satellites.
Consumption (A) It is not possible to carry out diagnostics of th e satellites (SAT03/04 - SATWS - XSATWS/2/4 - Xsat2/
0.0A 8 - XSAT36v - XSATMini - XSATHP Virtuale).
RS485 #1 errors
val. (0 .. 1000) Control panel:
to monitor the Control Panel parameters
RS485 #2/#3 err.
val. (0 .. 1000)
Consumption (A)
Fuse F3(BUS #3) indicates the total charge in mA connected to the control panel, excluding the charge of the control
OK
panel battery and the output dedicated to the sirens (VPOW).
Fuse F4(BUS #2) Errors RS485 #1 - #2 - #3
OK indicates the correct functioning of the RS485 serial bus;
Fuse F5(BUS #1) Fuses F3 - F4 - F5 - F6 - F7 - F3
OK Indicates the state of the fuse
Fuse F6(Zones)
OK N.B. in XTREAM 64B - XTREAM 64 - XTREAM 32B - XTREAM32 - XTREAM 6B and XTREAM central
control units, the values monitored are
Fuse F7(VPOT)
OK "RS485 errors" and "Failed calls".

Fuse F2(V OC) - The arrow keys (é) and (ê) allow scrolling of the various controls
OK
Failed tel calls Failed tel calls
ENT éê In this menu, it is possible to verify the call that have been unsuccessful for different times.
Press ENT and see the phone calls.
If no calls are present, pressing ENT do not allow to access following menu.
Satellites
ENT éê Satellite:
Satell. add.. to monitor the satellite parameters
1 (1 . .32)
Consumption (A) Satellite ind:
0.0 select the number of the satellite to monitor
Fusib.F3 (+ out)
OK Consumption (mA)
indicates the total charge in mA connected to the extension, excluding the charge of the power supply
Fusib.F4 (+ out) battery and the output dedicated to the sirens (VPOW).
OK
Fusib.F5 (Zones) Fusibili F3 - F4 - F5 - F6 - F1
OK Indicates the state of the fuse
Fusib. F6 (VPOT)
OK
Fusib. F1 (V OC) ÊPress (CLR) to vary
OK ÊWrite the parameter to set
ÊPress arrows (é) and (ê) to move on to another menu
to following
page ÊPress (ENT) to confirm

- 108 -
 from previous
page Zones' Test
Zones tWalk est The zones' test function allows to display the state of all zones for the control panel/keypads/satellites.
ENT éê
- Key (5), allows to deactivate or activate the memory function. Also, by exiting and entering the
Control Panel MEMO function, the previous memorisations are deleted.
ENT éê
- Key (CLR), allows exiting from the Zones' Test function.
I. BA 1S
ssssssssss
- The arrow keys (é) and (ê) allow selecting the group of zones to be displayed.
I. BA 1D
nnnnnnnnnn - The wording (MEMO) signals that the memorisation modality is active, therefore the unbalancing
of one or more zones, causes the relative memorisation.
I. EX 1S
nnnnnnnnnn
I. EX 1D
nnnnnnnnnn

Keypads Note: for the lines on the keypads the MEMO function is always active and cannot be excluded
ENT éê
KBD 1 MEMO
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
KBD 17 MEMO
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn

Satell. add.
1 (1 .. 32)

I. BA 1S
ssssssssss

I. BA 1D
nnnnnnnnnn

I. EX 1S
nnnnnnnnnn
I. EX 1D
nnnnnnnnnn
Menu standby
ENT éê Menu standby
Rem. time: (min.) By accessing this modality, there will be the possibility of blocking all alarm signals for 60 minutes,
60 in order to comfortably intervene in the installation or maintenance of the system.
The time can be reset at 60 minutes by simply exiting and accessing this menu again or by pressing
any key.

EPROM Version
ENT éê
Eprom Version
Eprom Version The software of the control panel is displayed in this menu.
V x.xx
The software version of the keypad is displayed by simultaneously pressing keys (CLR) and (ESC).

End of programming and return to "Installation" menu

Reset the Codes - Sectors disconnection

In case of losing the Installer Code, programming of the control panel would be impossible as would the possibility of varying it.

It is possible to Reset the installer code by activating a particular procedure.

• Close the S4 jumper on the board of XTREAM 640 central control unit or the S1 jumper on the XTREAM 64B - XTREAM 64 - XTREAM 32B
- XTREAM32 - XTREAM 6B and XTREAM 6 central control units and keep it closed.
• Press and release the Reset button on the control panel electronic board.
• the alarm relay activates after a few seconds; as soon as it does, remove the S4 jumper on the board of XTREAM 640 central control unit
or the S1 jumper on the XTREAM 64B - XTREAM 64 - XTREAM 32B - XTREAM32 - XTREAM 6B and XTREAM 6 central control units.
• The alarm relay automatically de-excites after approximately 2 seconds.
• The control panel now disarms the previous armings, and immediately enters the installer menu on the keyboard with address 1 (of serial
1 for XTREAM640), from which the eventual amendments to programming can be carried out
• The Installer code is reset to default value (000000)
• The Communication code is reset to default value (not setted)
ATTENTION: By setting programming step “R. Def Prg. Codes” to “YES”, the Code Reset sets all programming to default values.

- 109 -
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY WITH R&TTE DIRECTIVE 99/05/EC

- 110 -
DICHIARAZIONE DI CONFORMITA’ ALLA DIRETTIVA R&TTE 99/05/CE

- 111 -
- 112 -
 Via Valsugana, 63
35010 (Padova) ITALY
Tel. 049 9698 411 / Fax. 049 9698 407
[email protected]
www.avselectronics.com

[email protected]

- 113 -